Advanced Measurement Technology OTM 1000 - omnitek.tv · This documentation contains proprietary information of OmniTek. No part of this documentation may be reproduced, stored in

Advanced Measurement Technology

OTM 1000

User Guide

Software Version: 3.1

October 2013

OmniTek OTM 1000 User Guide, v3.1

© 2010-2013 OmniTek. All rights reserved This documentation contains proprietary information of OmniTek. No part of this documentation may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, recorded or otherwise without the prior written permission of OmniTek. The information contained in this documentation was prepared by OmniTek with all reasonable care and is believed to be accurate. However OmniTek. does not assume responsibility for loss or damage resulting from omissions, inaccuracies or errors contained herein. The information contained in this document is subject to change and revisions hereto or new additions may be issued to incorporate such changes.

Warranty OmniTek systems are warranted for one year from date of purchase. This includes all feature upgrades and bug fixes to the application software, plus repair or replacement of the hardware (at the discretion of OmniTek). Extended warranty agreements are also available, please consult your local dealer.

Contact Information OmniTek Intec Unit 2.3, Wade Road, Basingstoke, Hants RG22 8NE, UK Tel: +44 (0)1256 345900 Fax: +44 (0)1256 345901 Email: [email protected] Web: www.omnitek.tv

Conventions Used in this Guide The following typographical conventions are used:

Convention Meaning or Use <item> Placeholder for item of the named type Italic font Reference to a signal Or: reference to a separate document Bold font Reference to a file/software package xxxxxx Link to additional information.

mailto:[email protected]

http://www.omnitek.tv/

OmniTek OTM 1000 User Guide, v3.1a

Contents A OTM 1000 Equipment Guide

Introduction ........................................................................................................................ A-1 Safety Statement ................................................................................................................. A-2

A.1 System Features and Instrument Options ..................................................................... A-3 A.2 Installation .................................................................................................................... A-5

Preliminary steps: ............................................................................................................... A-5 Mounting in a rack ............................................................................................................. A-6 Cabling ............................................................................................................................... A-6 Common Set-ups ................................................................................................................ A-8 Optional Additions ............................................................................................................. A-9

A.3 Power Up .................................................................................................................... A-11 Power Requirements ........................................................................................................ A-11 Applying Power ................................................................................................................ A-11 Start-Up Procedure ........................................................................................................... A-11 Shutting Down .................................................................................................................. A-12 Running with Screen Blanked .......................................................................................... A-12

A.4 Installing Additional Software Options ...................................................................... A-13 A.5 Updating to the Latest Version ................................................................................... A-14 A.6 General Care ............................................................................................................... A-14

Cleaning ........................................................................................................................... A-14 Changing the Fuse ............................................................................................................ A-15 Changing the Battery ........................................................................................................ A-15

A.7 Certification ................................................................................................................ A-16

B OTM 1000 System Control B.1 General Controls .......................................................................................................... B-1

The Control Panel ............................................................................................................... B-1 Using a Mouse .................................................................................................................... B-3 Keyboard Controls ............................................................................................................. B-4

B.2 Settings ......................................................................................................................... B-5 B.3 Window Displays ......................................................................................................... B-7

Status Bar ........................................................................................................................... B-7 Button Bar .......................................................................................................................... B-8 Picking out Items to work with .......................................................................................... B-9 Window Properties ........................................................................................................... B-10 Switching between Full Frame Mode and Windows Mode ............................................. B-11 Directing the display to a separate monitor ...................................................................... B-11

B.4 Presets ......................................................................................................................... B-12 Using Presets from other OmniTek systems .................................................................... B-13 Recording Presets ............................................................................................................. B-13 Preset Selection ................................................................................................................ B-16 Assigning Presets to Function Keys ................................................................................. B-17

B.5 File Selection .............................................................................................................. B-19 B.6 Saving Files ................................................................................................................ B-20


C The View Window C.1 Overview ...................................................................................................................... C-2

Selecting the View Window ............................................................................................... C-2 Definitions .......................................................................................................................... C-2 Basic Screen Layout ........................................................................................................... C-3

C.2 View Window Operations ............................................................................................ C-6 View Selection ................................................................................................................... C-6 Full/Multiple Tile display ................................................................................................... C-8 Setting Overall Window Properties.................................................................................... C-9 Setting Tile Properties ...................................................................................................... C-10 Saving and Recalling Specific Tile Selections ................................................................. C-11

C.3 Video Stream .............................................................................................................. C-12 Video Stream Selection .................................................................................................... C-12 Input Video Standard ....................................................................................................... C-13

C.4 Freezing the display ................................................................................................... C-14

D Screen Layout D.1 Overview ...................................................................................................................... D-1 D.2 Selecting Edit Mode ..................................................................................................... D-2 D.3 Changing the Range of Views Displayed .................................................................... D-3 D.4 Changing Size, Position etc. ......................................................................................... D-5 D.5 Saving the New Layout ................................................................................................ D-6

E Image Analysis

E.1 General Steps ................................................................................................................ E-1 E.2 Focus of Analysis ......................................................................................................... E-2 E.3 Waveform View ........................................................................................................... E-4

Selection ............................................................................................................................. E-5 Configuration Issues ........................................................................................................... E-5 Display Properties .............................................................................................................. E-6 Composite Waveforms ....................................................................................................... E-8 Waveform Measurement .................................................................................................... E-9 Shared Waveform Markers ................................................................................................ E-9

E.4 Vectorscope ................................................................................................................ E-11 Selection ........................................................................................................................... E-11 Configuration Issues ......................................................................................................... E-12 Display Properties ............................................................................................................ E-12

E.5 Gamut View ............................................................................................................... E-14 Selection ........................................................................................................................... E-14 Configuration Issues ......................................................................................................... E-15 Display Properties ............................................................................................................ E-15

E.6 Status .......................................................................................................................... E-16 The Status Overview ........................................................................................................ E-16 Status Summary ................................................................................................................ E-17 Selection ........................................................................................................................... E-18 Configuration Issues ......................................................................................................... E-18 Display Properties ............................................................................................................ E-19 Resetting the display ........................................................................................................ E-19

E.7 Video Information Displayed ..................................................................................... E-20


F Video Proxy F.1 Basic Picture Display .................................................................................................... F-1

Selection .............................................................................................................................. F-1 Configuration Issues ............................................................................................................ F-2 Display Properties ............................................................................................................... F-2

F.2 Picture Overlays ............................................................................................................ F-4 Crosshair .............................................................................................................................. F-4 Timecodes ........................................................................................................................... F-5 Closed Captions & Teletext Subtitles ................................................................................. F-7

F.3 Safe Action/Safe Title Cages ........................................................................................ F-9 Set-Up ................................................................................................................................ F-10 Displaying the cages .......................................................................................................... F-11 Saving and Re-loading ...................................................................................................... F-11

F.4 Region of Interest (ROI) ............................................................................................. F-12 Enabling/Disabling the ROI .............................................................................................. F-12 Setting the Size and Position of the ROI ........................................................................... F-13

F.5 Picture Zoom ............................................................................................................... F-14

G Pixel Data (VIEW_DATA Option) G.1 Overview of Display .................................................................................................... G-1

Selection ............................................................................................................................. G-2 Display Properties .............................................................................................................. G-2 Setting the focus for the display ......................................................................................... G-3

G.2 Standard View .............................................................................................................. G-4 Overview of Display Features ............................................................................................ G-4

G.3 Extended View ............................................................................................................. G-5 Overview of Display Features ............................................................................................ G-5

H DCI Support (VIEW_XR_DCI option) H.1 CIE Colour Chart ......................................................................................................... H-1

Selection ............................................................................................................................. H-2 Configuration Issues ........................................................................................................... H-2 Display Properties .............................................................................................................. H-3

H.2 Histogram ..................................................................................................................... H-5 Selection ............................................................................................................................. H-5 Configuration Issues ........................................................................................................... H-6 Display Properties .............................................................................................................. H-6

I Stereo 3D Analysis and Camera Alignment (VIEW_3D & ALIGNMENT options) Terminology ........................................................................................................................ I-1

I.1 Stereo 3D Overview ...................................................................................................... I-2 I.2 Enabling 3D Monitoring ............................................................................................... I-3

Defining the 3D Video Format ............................................................................................ I-4 Applying Auto-correction ................................................................................................... I-4

I.3 Visual Comparison of S3D Left/Right Images ............................................................. I-5 Selection .............................................................................................................................. I-7 Configuration Issues ............................................................................................................ I-7 Display Properties ............................................................................................................... I-8

I.4 Depth Analysis of Stereo 3D video ............................................................................... I-9 Background ......................................................................................................................... I-9 Configuration Issues .......................................................................................................... I-10


I.5 Depth Map ................................................................................................................... I-12 Selection ............................................................................................................................ I-13 Configuration Issues .......................................................................................................... I-13 Display Properties ............................................................................................................. I-13

I.6 Depth Plan ................................................................................................................... I-14 Selection ............................................................................................................................ I-16 Configuration Issues .......................................................................................................... I-16 Display Properties ............................................................................................................. I-17

I.7 Depth Map Histogram ................................................................................................. I-18 Selection ............................................................................................................................ I-18 Configuration Issues .......................................................................................................... I-18 Display Properties ............................................................................................................. I-19

I.8 Camera Rig Alignment ................................................................................................ I-20 3D Meters Display ............................................................................................................ I-20 Selection ............................................................................................................................ I-21 Configuration .................................................................................................................... I-21 Display Properties ............................................................................................................. I-22 Single Camera Alignment ................................................................................................. I-23 Camera Pair Alignment ..................................................................................................... I-24

I.9 Luma/Chroma Comparisons ....................................................................................... I-25 1. 3D Chroma Sabres ........................................................................................................ I-25 2. Colour Comparison on Waveform Display ................................................................... I-28 3. Colour Comparison on the Vectorscope Display .......................................................... I-30 4. Colour Comparison using Histogram Display .............................................................. I-32

I.10 Error Reporting ........................................................................................................... I-35 Configuration Issues .......................................................................................................... I-38 Display Properties ............................................................................................................. I-38

J Logging J.1 Event Logs ..................................................................................................................... J-1

Overview ............................................................................................................................. J-1 Event Log Display ............................................................................................................... J-1 Selection .............................................................................................................................. J-2 Upper Part of the Event Log ............................................................................................... J-3 Lower Part of the Event Log ............................................................................................... J-4 Configuration Issues ............................................................................................................ J-6 Display Properties ............................................................................................................... J-6 Event Log: Live Log ........................................................................................................... J-7 Event Log: Session Logs ..................................................................................................... J-8

J.2 Loudness Logs ............................................................................................................. J-10 Loudness Log Display ....................................................................................................... J-10 Selection ............................................................................................................................ J-10 Recording Loudness Logs ................................................................................................. J-11

J.3 Closed Caption Log ..................................................................................................... J-14 Selection ............................................................................................................................ J-14 Configuration Issues .......................................................................................................... J-15 Display Properties ............................................................................................................. J-15 The Live Log ..................................................................................................................... J-17 Recording Closed Caption Logs ....................................................................................... J-18

J.4 SNMP .......................................................................................................................... J-21


K Audio Monitoring (AUDIO option) K.1 Audio Input .................................................................................................................. K-1 K.2 PPMs Display ............................................................................................................... K-2

Selection ............................................................................................................................. K-3 Configuration Issues ........................................................................................................... K-4 Display Properties .............................................................................................................. K-4 Error Reporting .................................................................................................................. K-5

K.3 Surround Sound ............................................................................................................ K-6 Stereo Mix Down ............................................................................................................... K-6 Surround Sound View ........................................................................................................ K-7 Selection ............................................................................................................................. K-8 Configuration Issues ........................................................................................................... K-8 Display Properties .............................................................................................................. K-8

K.4 Loudness (AUDIO_LOUD option) ............................................................................ K-10 Configuration ................................................................................................................... K-11 Loudness View ................................................................................................................. K-12 Display Properties ............................................................................................................ K-13 Loudness History .............................................................................................................. K-14 Selection ........................................................................................................................... K-17 Display Properties ............................................................................................................ K-17 Loudness and the Surround Sound View ......................................................................... K-19

K.5 Lissajous Figures ........................................................................................................ K-20 Selection ........................................................................................................................... K-20 Display Properties ............................................................................................................ K-21

K.6 Surround Sound Lissajous Display ............................................................................ K-22 Selection ........................................................................................................................... K-22 Display Properties ............................................................................................................ K-22

K.7 Audio Status ............................................................................................................... K-23 Status Overview Display .................................................................................................. K-23 Status Summary Display .................................................................................................. K-23 Selection ........................................................................................................................... K-24 Configuration Issues ......................................................................................................... K-24 Display Properties ............................................................................................................ K-24 Audio Information Displayed ........................................................................................... K-24 Resetting the display ........................................................................................................ K-25

K.8 AES/EBU Audio ........................................................................................................ K-26 Adding the AES card ........................................................................................................ K-26 Cabling ............................................................................................................................. K-26 Configuration ................................................................................................................... K-27 Analysing the Input .......................................................................................................... K-27

K.9 Audio Playback .......................................................................................................... K-28 Playing back over headphones or the internal speaker .................................................... K-28 Playing back over the AES card outputs .......................................................................... K-30

L Dolby Audio Support (AUDIO_DOLBY options) L.1 Background .................................................................................................................. L-1 L.2 Configuring the OTM 1000 for Dolby analysis ........................................................... L-3 L.3 Dolby PPMs ................................................................................................................. L-5 L.4 Dolby Loudness ............................................................................................................ L-6


L.5 Dolby Metadata ............................................................................................................ L-7 Displaying Metadata .......................................................................................................... L-7 Dolby E Data ...................................................................................................................... L-8 Dolby Digital Data ............................................................................................................. L-9 Channel Data (Both Dolby E and Dolby D) ...................................................................... L-9

L.6 Playing out the Extracted Audio ................................................................................ L-10 Configuration for Multi-channel Dolby Playback ........................................................... L-10 Multi-Channel Playback ................................................................................................... L-10

M Physical Layer Measurements (EYE options)

M.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................... M-1 Views Offered ................................................................................................................... M-1 Adding Transport Layer Measurement to the OTM 1000 ................................................ M-2 Upgrading EYE_xx option ................................................................................................ M-2

M.2 Set-Up .......................................................................................................................... M-3 Cabling .............................................................................................................................. M-3 Configuration .................................................................................................................... M-3

M.3 Jitter Display ............................................................................................................... M-4 Selection ............................................................................................................................ M-5 Display Properties ............................................................................................................. M-5

M.4 Eye Diagram ................................................................................................................ M-7 Selection ............................................................................................................................ M-8 Display Properties ............................................................................................................. M-9 Obtaining Measurements from the Eye Diagram ............................................................ M-11

M.5 Cable Length ............................................................................................................. M-13 Configuration .................................................................................................................. M-13

N Timing Measurements (AUDIO and AV_ISD options) N.1 Reference Timing Measurements ................................................................................. N-2 N.2 AV Delay (Lip-Sync Delay) Measurements ................................................................ N-6

In-Service AV Delay Measurement (AV_ISD option) ...................................................... N-6 Using Dedicated Test Sequences ....................................................................................... N-8

N.3 Loop Delay Measurement (AV_ISD option) ............................................................. N-12

O Simultaneous Monitoring (VIEW_2 option) O.1 Overview ...................................................................................................................... O-1 O.2 Enabling and Disabling Simultaneous Monitoring ...................................................... O-2 O.3 Picking the Input analysed in a particular tile .............................................................. O-3

P The Gen Window (GEN/GEN_BASIC option) Selection .............................................................................................................................. P-1

P.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................... P-2 Controls ............................................................................................................................... P-3

P.2 Gen Window Set-Up ..................................................................................................... P-5 Saving and Recalling Specific Gen Window Set-ups ......................................................... P-7

P.3 Capture from Input ........................................................................................................ P-8 P.4 Basic Test Pattern Generation ..................................................................................... P-10

1. Playing out Colour Bars ................................................................................................ P-10 2. Using the provided Pathological Test Patterns ............................................................. P-11 3. Live Input Pass-through ................................................................................................ P-12 4. Displaying the Test Signal on a Monitor ...................................................................... P-12


Q Gen Actions (GEN option) Q.1 Loading Patterns from Disk ......................................................................................... Q-1 Q.2 Creating Test Patterns .................................................................................................. Q-3

Zoneplates .......................................................................................................................... Q-3 Line Patterns ....................................................................................................................... Q-6

Q.3 Saving Patterns ............................................................................................................. Q-8 Q.4 Deleting Patterns .......................................................................................................... Q-9 Q.5 Playing Out Test Patterns ............................................................................................. Q-9

Preparation for Play-Out .................................................................................................... Q-9 Play-Out ........................................................................................................................... Q-10

Q.6 Modifying the output .................................................................................................. Q-11 Enable SMPTE 352 .......................................................................................................... Q-12 Gain .................................................................................................................................. Q-12 Noise ................................................................................................................................. Q-12 Bounce .............................................................................................................................. Q-12 Panning ............................................................................................................................. Q-12 Wide Screen Signalling .................................................................................................... Q-13 Video Index ...................................................................................................................... Q-14 Output Range and Gamma ............................................................................................... Q-15

Q.7 Interpreting Image Files ............................................................................................. Q-16 General Rules ................................................................................................................... Q-16 Individual Images ............................................................................................................. Q-17

Q.8 Adding Simple Audio Tones ...................................................................................... Q-19 Q.9 Adding Timecodes ..................................................................................................... Q-20 Q.10 Adding Deliberate Bit Errors ..................................................................................... Q-21 Q.11 Saving and Recalling Pattern Selections .................................................................... Q-23 Q.12 Dual-Generator Operation .......................................................................................... Q-23

Enabling Dual-Generation Operation ............................................................................... Q-24 Configuring the Generators .............................................................................................. Q-25 Playing out Test Signals ................................................................................................... Q-26 Synchronising Generators ................................................................................................ Q-27

R Sequence Capture & Play-Out (CAP_MOTION; GEN_MOTION options)

R.1 Capturing Video Clips .................................................................................................. R-1 Initial Set-up ....................................................................................................................... R-1 Capture ............................................................................................................................... R-3 Twin-Channel Capture ....................................................................................................... R-4

R.2 RVF Files ..................................................................................................................... R-4 R.3 Sequence Play-Out ....................................................................................................... R-5

Loading a Sequence ........................................................................................................... R-5 Playing out a Sequence ...................................................................................................... R-6 Modifying the Output ......................................................................................................... R-6

R.4 Working with Stereo 3D Video (GEN_2 option) ......................................................... R-7 Loading 3D Images ............................................................................................................ R-7 Playing Out a 3D Pattern .................................................................................................... R-8 Saving 3D Patterns to Disk ................................................................................................ R-8


S Picture Quality Analysis (PQA option) S.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................... S-1

Architecture ......................................................................................................................... S-3 Operating Modes ................................................................................................................. S-4

S.2 Setting Up the OTM for Quality Analysis .................................................................... S-5 Step 1: Switch into PQA Mode ........................................................................................... S-5 Step 2: Setting the OTM up for the required Operating Mode ........................................... S-6 Step 3: Align Test and Reference Signals ........................................................................... S-9

S.3 Picture Difference Display .......................................................................................... S-11 Selection ............................................................................................................................ S-12 Configuration Issues .......................................................................................................... S-12 Display Properties ............................................................................................................. S-13

S.4 PQA Meters Display ................................................................................................... S-15 Selection ............................................................................................................................ S-15 Configuration .................................................................................................................... S-16 Display Properties ............................................................................................................. S-16

S.5 PQA Charts ................................................................................................................. S-17 Selection ............................................................................................................................ S-17 Configuration Issues .......................................................................................................... S-18 Display Properties ............................................................................................................. S-19 Capturing and Comparing Picture Quality Graphs ........................................................... S-21

S.6 Status ........................................................................................................................... S-23 Selection ............................................................................................................................ S-24 Configuration Issues .......................................................................................................... S-24 Video Information Displayed ............................................................................................ S-24

S.7 Remote Control ........................................................................................................... S-25

T The Config Window T.1 Overview ...................................................................................................................... T-1

Saving and Recalling Specific System Set-ups .................................................................. T-1 T.2 Video Config Page ....................................................................................................... T-2

The Parameters ................................................................................................................... T-4 Input Video Standards ........................................................................................................ T-4 RGB Input Section ............................................................................................................. T-4 XYZ Input Section ............................................................................................................. T-4 Picture Content Section ...................................................................................................... T-4 Error Checking Section ...................................................................................................... T-5 Picture Quality .................................................................................................................... T-6 Eye/Jitter Settings ............................................................................................................... T-7 Timecode Settings .............................................................................................................. T-7 Caption Settings ................................................................................................................. T-7 Picture View Aspect Ratio ................................................................................................. T-8

T.3 Audio Config Page ....................................................................................................... T-9 Selecting the Audio Type ................................................................................................. T-10 Parameters ........................................................................................................................ T-10


T.4 System Page ............................................................................................................... T-12 System Configuration Settings ......................................................................................... T-12 3D Settings ....................................................................................................................... T-14 Waveform Graticules ....................................................................................................... T-15 Time ................................................................................................................................. T-15 System Information .......................................................................................................... T-16 IP Address Information .................................................................................................... T-16 Licences ............................................................................................................................ T-16 Button Bar options ........................................................................................................... T-16

T.5 Video Inputs Page ...................................................................................................... T-17 T.6 Audio Inputs Page ...................................................................................................... T-17

Channel Allocation ........................................................................................................... T-18

U Importing/Exporting Settings and User Files U.1 Overview ...................................................................................................................... U-1 U.2 Calling up the Manage User Files Dialogue ................................................................ U-3

Log Files Folder ................................................................................................................. U-4 USB Drives ........................................................................................................................ U-4

U.3 Exporting User Files ..................................................................................................... U-5 Exporting Files from their Default location ....................................................................... U-5 Exporting Generator Patterns from other locations ............................................................ U-7

U.4 Importing Files into the User area ................................................................................ U-8 U.5 Deleting User Files ....................................................................................................... U-9

Deleting Files from their Default location ......................................................................... U-9 Deleting Generator Patterns from other locations ............................................................ U-10

U.6 Importing/Exporting/Deleting the Configuration ....................................................... U-11 U.7 Importing/Exporting/Deleting the System Settings ................................................... U-11

V Extended Video Support (VIDEO_HD option + others)

V.1 HD and HSDL Dual-Link Support (Added by VIDEO_DL) ...................................... V-2 V.2 3G Level A Signal Support (Added by VIDEO_3G) .................................................. V-3 V.3 3G Level B Dual-Link Signals (Added by VIDEO_3G) ............................................. V-4 V.4 3G Level B Dual-Stream Signals (Added by VIDEO_3G) ......................................... V-5 V.5 Digital Cinema Support ................................................................................................ V-5

App. I: ANC Packet Descriptor Creation ................................................................................ I-1

Overview ............................................................................................................................. I-1 Description Creation ........................................................................................................... I-3 The Elements ....................................................................................................................... I-4 Layout ................................................................................................................................ I-12

App. II: Remote Control using SNMP .................................................................................... II-1 II.1 Set-Up ........................................................................................................................... II-1 II.2 Controlling the OTM 1000 ........................................................................................... II-2

App. III: OmniTek OTM 1000 System Recovery ................................................................ III-1 Steps .................................................................................................................................. III-1


OmniTek OTM 1000 User Guide, v3.1a A-1

A : Equipment Guide Introduction

The OmniTek OTM 1000 is an extremely versatile instrument for video test and measurement. The base instrument is an image analyzer, offering picture monitoring and waveform, vectorscope, gamut and status displays. However, the OTM is offered with a wide range of instrument options, some of which enhance the facilities it offers as an image analyzer while other options add test signal generation facilities. Further options allow the OTM to be set up to carry out picture quality assessments, a range of timing tests and physical layer measurements. As an image analyzer, the OTM 1000 can provide high precision waveforms, vectorscope and gamut displays; real-time picture monitoring; comprehensive SDI input status information; audio monitoring capabilities; and transport layer analysis including eye-pattern and jitter displays. (The options offered depend on the software options that are installed.) As a test signal generator, the instrument can generate a wide range of standard test patterns and zoneplates; play-out video images and sequences from disk (including 3D sequences), and add gain, noise, bounce and audio tones to the resulting test signal (again depending on which options are installed). It is also able to generate and add timecodes, WSS, video index and SMPTE 352 codes. The OTM also has the ability to freeze the screen display and to capture images from the incoming video The system is designed to be driven from the control panel on the front of the instrument but the OTM can also be driven using a mouse and keyboard. Most instrument features can be selected using either method but there are some facilities that are only available when a mouse is attached. For example, a mouse is needed to set up new screen layouts. However, once any layout has been recorded as a preset, it can be called into use from the control panel – without any need for a mouse. In designing the system, we have given close consideration to our existing customers and made the interface as familiar as possible to them, while also making it easy for users of other manufacturers’ systems by designing it to follow a similar methodology.


Safety Statement To avoid injury and prevent damage to the OTM or to any products connected to it, use this product only as specified and take the following safety precautions. Where the OTM is being used alongside other equipment, you must also ensure that you act in accordance with the advice given in the documentation supplied with those other products.

Only use the power cord that is both specified for this product and certified for the country of use.

Ensure that the product is properly grounded through the grounding conductor within the power cord.

Ensure that it is always possible for the user to switch off the power to the unit if need be.

Keep all product surfaces clean and dry.

Ensure that the unit is properly ventilated.

Do not operate in an explosive atmosphere or in damp/wet conditions.

Do not operate the OTM 1000 with either the cover or any of the panels removed or otherwise displaced from their standard positions (except where the cover has been replaced by the rack-mounting enclosure).

Do not operate an OTM 1000 that has been damaged (or that you suspect has been damaged).

When replacing the power supply fuse, only use a fuse of the specified type and rating.

When replacing the on-board battery, only use a battery of the specified type and rating.

Do not connect or disconnect test leads while they are connected to a voltage source.

Do not touch exposed connections and components without first disconnecting the unit from mains power.

Please note: The only user-serviceable parts are the fuse associated with the power supply and the battery on the motherboard that backs up the system clock. There are no other user-serviceable parts.


A.1 System Features and Instrument Options

The main features of the OTM 1000 are summarised in the following table.

Feature Description Monitoring system Centred around a single 1024x768 ‘View’ window – divided into ‘tiles’, each

of which may be used to show the result of a separate type of analysis applied to the video under test. Individual tiles may be shown full screen or directed to a separate monitor. Default set of four tiles, readily extended to any number and arrangement to tiles.

Presets Save and re-call of unlimited number of ‘View’ window layouts, recorded complete with details of individual Views that are displayed. Similar ability to save and re-call configurations and test signal selections.

Control systems Front panel controls; alternative keyboard and mouse control; range of ‘Soft’ buttons offering context-sensitive selection of actions.

Video formats supported

SD and HD video supported as standard; DL and 3G support added through software options.

Configuration System configured through dedicated ‘Config’ pages. Individual displays configured through ‘Properties’ controls.

Image Analysis: General Features Analysis of full raster/active picture/selected area as required.

Fully digital processing. Waveform High resolution Waveform View displaying YCbCr, RGB, YRGB or

composite waveforms. Cursors provided for measurement with automatic read-out of results.

Vectorscope Choice of 100% and 75% graticules. Gamut Choice of Bar chart; CIE Colour Chart and Histogram views. Pixel Data Standard display of data from both the active area and the blanking;

‘Extended’ display with interpretation, especially of ANC packets; option of defining own ANC packet descriptors.

Audio Audio displays include PPMs, True Peak, Loudness History, Status information, Surround Sound and Lissajous displays. Wide-range of industry-standard graticules and ballistics applied.

3D Toolset Additional displays/display modes analysing depth in Viewer’s world, luma & chroma differences between left and right images, and camera alignment.

Picture Quality Special ‘PQA’ Mode in which the OTM may be used to carry out ‘Full-reference’ Picture Quality Analysis (PQA) of both live and stored SD, HD or 3G video.

Picture Display Full-resolution video images on which timecodes and other embedded data can be displayed; alternative pulse cross and full frame displays. Aspect ratio from WSS, Video Index, AFD or set manually. Safe Area and Safe Title cages. Option of display on dedicated monitor.

Status Information Comprehensive Status information with automatic flagging of those sections where an error has occurred.

Timecode Support VITC and ATC timecodes supported as standard. LTC timecodes supported through addition of LTC_READER option.

Error tracking and logging

Automatic Live log, plus option of user-defined session logs – saved on disk as XML files e.g. for subsequent analysis. Also option of alarm as response to error events. Also possible to log captions and loudness.

Eye and Jitter Eye and Jitter displays and waveform measurements available through addition of appropriate EYE_ options. Also estimate of cable length.


Timing measurements A/V Delay measurements and Reference Timing measurements. Test Signal Generation:

Generation of zoneplate and line pattern test signals including standard Pathological test patterns. Images and video clips stored on disk can also be used as test signals. Full raster images/sequences and 3D supported through additional options.

Capture of Video Clips Single frame capture provided with test signal generator. Full frame and sequence capture provided as options.

Remote control Support for remote control using SNMP protocol. Screen freeze and capture

Single frame GUI freeze and capture offered as standard.

Instrument Options The OTM 1000 is offered with a wide range of options that enhance the facilities it offers in various ways (see below).

Video Standard Support

VIDEO_SD Support for SD video (included as standard)

VIDEO_HD Adds support for HD video (included as standard)

VIDEO_DL Adds support for Dual Link video

VIDEO_3G Adds support for 3G video

Monitoring Options VIEW_DATA Pixel data display (presented as bare data or with data interpretation as

required),

VIEW_2 Adds support for dual simultaneous monitoring for SD, HD and 3GA. (Simultaneous monitoring of two 3GB or Dual Link inputs not supported.)

VIEW_XR_DCI Adds XYZ monitoring, CIE colour chart, histograms, and support for 12 bit.

VIEW_3D Adds 3D Toolset.

ALIGNMENT Adds ability to align a camera to reference (also provided by VIEW_3D option).

PQA Adds picture quality analysis (requires AV_ISD).

AV_ISD Adds ‘In-Service’ audio/video delay measurement.

Audio Options AUDIO Audio monitoring: PPM, phase with Clip, Over, Silence, Mute indication;

Playout; Audio Status, Surround Sound, Lissajous (included as standard) AUDIO_LOUD Loudness PPMs; True Peak values; Loudness Range; Loudness History

(automatically installed in systems for which earlier AUDIO option was purchased)

AUDIO_AES AES audio card: requires AUDIO

AUDIO_DOLBY_E Full decode + all AUDIO features + stereo mix-down monitoring: requires AUDIO

AUDIO_DOLBY_D Full Dolby Digital decode: requires AUDIO

Physical Layer. Note: Video standard support of selected EYE option must match system video standard support. Also adding any of these options may require hardware swap out and replacement at the factory. EYE_SD SD Eye Height, Eye Diagram and Jitter; and estimated cable length

EYE_HD SD / HD Eye Height, Eye Diagram and Jitter; and estimated cable length: requires VIDEO_HD

EYE_3G SD / HD / 3G Eye Height, Eye Diagram and Jitter; and estimated cable length: requires VIDEO_HD & VIDEO_3G


Generator Options

GEN_BASIC Basic static test pattern generator: colour bars, pathological patterns and genlock – included as standard

GEN SD / HD Generator: zoneplates, line patterns, active video stills, gain, noise, bounce insertion; audio tone generation; VITC, ATC, WSS, VINDEX, SMPTE 352 generation; single frame capture

GEN_MOTION Sequence Play-out from PC RAM: requires GEN

GEN_ADV RVF Generation and ANC Generation, custom ANC streaming, CC generation: requires GEN

GEN_2 Simultaneous generation of two output streams. Enables generation of Stereo 3D video: requires GEN.

Capture Options

CAP_MOTION Full Motion Capture: records uncompressed to RAM; requires GEN

CAP_ADV RVF and ANC Capture, RVF still or sequence capture; Trigger on errors; requires GEN

Other Options

OTM_COVER Portable Carry Case: incl. Handle, Feet, Tilt Stand

OTM_CASE Custom Designed Aluminium Carry Case with USB keyboard

OTM_DUAL_RACK Dual Rack Adapter: mounts any two standard half-rack instruments in a 19 in. instrument rack. The front depth of the Rack Adapter is adjustable, to match instrument bezels

OTM_FILLER Filler Panel for OTM_DUAL_RACK

LTC_READER LTC Timecode Reader

Note: Enhancing your system may involve adding extra software facilities or additional hardware or occasionally both. New hardware is generally supplied with instructions for fitting. The exception to this is where an EYE_ option is added: in this case, the OTM system may need to be returned to have the necessary hardware factory-fitted. (Your dealer will advise you on this.) Extra software facilities are made available by providing an updated licence file, and again instructions will be provided alongside the new licence file. When installing new facilities, it is a good idea to check that you are using the most up-to-date version of the software. How this is done is described in Section A.5. (Details of the version you are currently using are given on the System page of the OTM’s Config window.)

A.2 Installation

The OTM 1000 is supplied with the software and any additional hardware that is required to support the instrument options that have been purchased e.g. AES and Eye/Jitter cards already installed. So after a couple of preliminary steps (see below), the job of installing the OTM 1000 is simply one of locating the instrument where you want to use it and attaching the appropriate cables.


Preliminary steps:

Checking the Pack Contents Alongside the OTM 1000 in the OTM 1000 pack, you should find:

Appropriate national power cord (UK/US/Europe/Australia)

OTM Screen Protector (affixed to the unit)

USB Stick (in the mini-box)

Quick Start Guide Cards (in the mini-box)

Wooden bracket for rear of chassis – this is used when shipping the unit to protect the rear of the chassis and provide support.

Note: This list is subject to change. A packing list for the OTM you have bought is included in the pack. Before starting to install the OTM 1000 for use in your facility, check that you have received all of items listed above. Note: Any additional boards that are required to support additional application options you have purchased will be already installed in the OTM 1000. We recommend saving the shipping carton and all packing materials in case you subsequently need to ship the OTM 1000 anywhere.

Mounting in a rack The OTM 1000 can be used mounted in a standard 19" rack. To mount the instrument in such a rack, you first need to purchase the OTM_DUAL_RACK rack mounting kit. Instructions for fitting are included in this kit.

Cabling The remaining task therefore to make the appropriate connections for the task it is to perform. The majority of these connections will be to the connectors on the back panel of the instrument, which are detailed in the following diagram and table.

Serial Port

Reference Loop

Power On/OffMaster Switch

Fuse Compartment

Power Socket

Extracted Clock

Eye/Jitter Card Outputs

SDI IN 1,2

USB Ports Video OutEthernet Connectors

Analog Out

SDI OUT 1,2

Eye/Jitter Card Inputs

AES Card (where fitted)

I/O Port B

I/O Port A

Eye/Jitter Card (where fitted)

ANA OUT SDI OUT2 SDI OUT1 SDI IN2 SDI IN1

EX CLK EYE OUT2 EYE OUT1 EYE IN2 EYE IN1

Figure A-1: Rear view of an OTM 1000 with optional AES Audio and Jitter cards fitted.


The back panel offers the following connectors:

Connector: Use:

SDI Card

SDI IN1, SDI IN2 SDI video inputs Connection: 2 x BNC with 75ohm termination Return Loss: >15dB up to 1.485GHz, then >10dB to 2.97GHz Bit Rates: 270Mbit, 1.485Gbit, 2.97Gbit (SMPTE 259M, 292M, 424M)

SDI OUT1, SDI OUT2 SDI video outputs, providing either Generator output or loop-through of input video (see Section P.4) Connection: 2 x BNC with 75ohm termination Bit Rates: 270Mbit, 1.485Gbit, 2.97Gbit (SMPTE 259M, 292M, 424M) Jitter: < 0.2UI, 10Hz to 100kHz

ANA OUT Analog (Monitor) output Connection: 8-pin Lemo Video Output: RGB with bi- or tri-level sync on green, 0.7Vpk-pk video; or YPrPb with bi- or tri-level sync on Y, 0.7Vpk-pk video; or Composite & S-Video (in PAL or NTSC) 0.7Vpk-pk video. Return Loss: >20dB up to 30MHz

Jitter Card (where fitted)

EYE IN1, EYE IN2 Eye/Jitter card inputs: Connection: 2 x BNC with 75ohm termination Return Loss: >15dB up to 1.485GHz, then >10dB to 2.97GHz Bit Rates: 270Mbit, 1.485Gbit, 2.97Gbit (SMPTE 259M, 292M, 424M)

EYE OUT1, EYE OUT2 Eye/Jitter card outputs, providing loop-through of Eye/Jitter card inputs Connection: 2 x BNC with 75ohm termination Bit Rates: 270Mbit, 1.485Gbit, 2.97Gbit (SMPTE 259M, 292M, 424M) Jitter: < 0.2UI, 10Hz to 100kHz

EX CLK Extracted Jitter clock. 800mV p-p into 75ohm load. SD frequency: 27MHz; HD frequency: 74.25 or 74.18MHz

AES Card (where fitted)

I/O Port A AES Card Port A. Breakout cabling (XLR connectors) to four digital inputs, four digital outputs and a clock input.

I/O Port B AES Card Port B. Breakout cabling (XLR connectors) to four digital inputs, four digital outputs and a clock output.

Other Connectors

Ethernet Connectors 2 x RJ-45 gigabit Ethernet connectors

Video Out Standard 15-pin VGA connector

USB Ports 2 x USB 2.0 ports on the rear, and 1 x USB 2.0 on the front, available for connecting USB 1 or USB 2 mouse, keyboard, memory stick etc.

Reference Loop Connection: 2 x BNC connectors, linked internally. Resistance 5ohm Return loss: >25dB to 30MHz

Serial Port RS232 port

Headphone Jack 3.5mm stereo jack (on front).


Common Set-ups The following describes the set-ups needed for the two most common uses of the OTM 1000:

Monitoring an SDI video signal

Acting as a Test Pattern Generator It also describes some optional additions to the OTM 1000:

Mouse and keyboard

Alternative graphics display

Separate picture monitor for the generator

External sync

Monitoring an SDI video signal Setting the OTM 1000 up to monitor a video signal typically just requires a BNC cable from the video source to either IN 1 or IN 2. Where dual-link video is to be analysed, two such cables are needed – one for each link – one connected to IN 1 and the other to IN 2. The primary connection should be made to the IN 1 BNC, while the secondary connection should be made to the IN 2 BNC.

Power On/OffMaster Switch

Power Socket

SDI IN 1,2

SDI OUT 1,2 ANA OUT SDI OUT2 SDI OUT1 SDI IN2 SDI IN1

Figure A-2: Rear view of an OTM 1000 showing the important connections

when the OTM 1000 is being used to monitor a video signal. Note: The video signal can be passed through the OTM 1000 by connecting a BNC cable to the corresponding OUT socket, then selecting the Gen window and ‘running’ the ‘Pass Through’ pattern corresponding to the required input – see Section P.4. (Where the OTM 1000 doesn’t include a test signal generator, any signal fed into IN 1 is automatically made available on OUT 1; similarly any signal fed into IN 2 is automatically made available on OUT 2. The only additional step that is required is to set the Genlock to lock to the selected input as described in Section P.2.)

Acting as Signal Generator Operation as a test signal generator (i.e. with either the GEN option or the GEN_BASIC option installed) just requires a BNC cable connected to either OUT 1 or OUT 2 (or both where a dual-link signal is being generated). Note: The generated signal may be analyzed by the machine on which it has been created e.g. by plugging the other end of the BNC cable to one of the two IN sockets.


Optional Additions

Adding a Mouse and Keyboard The OTM 1000 offers three USB ports through which a USB mouse, USB keyboard or combined USB mouse and keyboard may be plugged in – one on the front panel and two on the back panel. Devices plugged into any of these ports will be automatically recognised by the underlying Windows system and immediately made available for use, with the standard mouse actions of pointing and clicking having their usual effects. Further information on using a mouse and keyboard is given in Section B.1.

Adding an Alternative Graphics Display The graphics output from the OTM 1000 can be displayed on a separate computer monitor by plugging this monitor into the Video Out connector on the back panel. Note: A high-resolution computer monitor is needed when working with 3G video.

Video Out


Figure A-3: Rear view of an OTM 1000 showing the Video Out connector.

Adding a Picture Monitor for the Generator The OTM 1000 generator provides a non-broadcast grade analog signal on the Analog connector provided alongside the SDI inputs/outputs. To display the output, simply feed the Analog Out (ANA OUT) output to a suitable monitor. Note: A suitable analog cable can be purchased from your OmniTek dealer.


Analog Out


Figure A-4: Rear view of an OTM 1000 showing the Analog Out connector.

Adding an External Sync Where the OTM 1000 is used to analyze incoming video, it needs to be synchronised to that incoming video but for timing analyses (including assessments of the clock derived from the input stream), it needs to be locked to an external reference signal. You may also require the output from the OTM 1000’s test signal generator to be synchronised with an external reference clock. The OTM 1000 can be linked both to the source of the reference signal and to other instruments using the same reference signal through the Reference Loop connectors on the back of the machine.

Reference Loop


Figure A-5: Rear view of an OTM 1000 showing the Reference Loop connectors.


A.3 Power Up

Power Requirements The OTM 1000 should be operated from a single-phase power source, using the supplied power cord. The live conductor in this power cord is fused to protect against over-current conditions. It operates on an AC line frequency of 47 – 63 Hz, over the range 85 – 256 Volts, without the need for any configuration. A fully loaded system draws less than 100 Watts. For safe operation, the OTM 1000 must be properly grounded through the grounding conductor within the power cord.

Applying Power Connect the supplied power cord to the power connector on the back panel of the OTM 1000 and use the switch immediately above this connector to apply power to the machine.

When power is applied to the machine, the power button on the front panel will be lit and either showing as red,

green or orangey-red depending on the state the machine is in. The power button is red when the OTM 1000 is powered but not running any software; green when the OTM application is fully loaded and running; but orangey-red when the machine is running with the screen blanked (see below). The button may also flash green and orange. Should it do this, it means there is a problem such that pressing the buttons on the front panel no longer controls the software. To recover from this situation, press and hold the power button until the OTM starts its shutdown procedure. Once it has powered down, switch off at the back. Wait for the power button light to go out before switching on and re-loading using the standard Start-Up procedure (given below).

Start-Up Procedure Note: The additional steps needed to run the OTM in ‘PQA Mode’ are described in Section S.2.

Control Panel Mouse & Keyboard

To load the OmniTek OTM application:

1. Plug in the power cord and power from the mains. 2. Switch on at the back of the instrument. 3. Press the power button on the front panel. The OTM 1000 then loads the OTM 1000 application. As the software loads, the buttons on the front panel are lit in a moving sequence, demonstrating both that the machine itself is working and that the system can talk to each button. When the software has loaded, the screen will show whatever display was on the screen when the application was last shut down using the Shut Down procedure described below.

On/Off Switch

Power Socket

Figure A-6: Power Socket and ‘hard’ On/Off

Switch on the back of an OTM 1000.


Shutting Down Control Panel Mouse & Keyboard

To shut the instrument down:

1. Press the power button on the front panel. The OTM then displays a message in the middle of the screen, together with a Button Bar at the bottom of the screen.

2. Take the Shut down option from the Button Bar of options (WFM button). Note: Should it not be possible to shut down the OTM using the above procedure, then the machine may be forcibly shut down by pressing and holding the power button for at least four seconds. The current display set-up will not be saved in this case

Figure A-7: Power Down message and associated Button Bar

IMPORTANT: DO NOT shut down the machine either by using the On/Off switch on the back panel or by removing the power cord except when the power button on the front panel is red, otherwise you run the risk of corrupting the file system.

Running with Screen Blanked There may be occasions when you want the OTM to be running but have no need for the screen display. Where that happens, you can opt to run the OTM with the screen display switched off.


To run the instrument with the screen blanked:

1. Press the power button on the front panel. 2. Take the VGA only option from the Button Bar of options (VECTOR button).. The screen display is then turned off and power button is coloured orangey-red to distinguish the current state from the one where the OTM is powered but the software is not loaded (see above). Pressing the power button when it is coloured orangey-red instantly brings up the screen display.


A.4 Installing Additional Software Options

The range of software options that are supported on any system is controlled through a set of licences recorded in a licence file. When additional software options are purchased, the licence file needs to be updated. The procedure used is as follows. It is in two parts – one carried out at the time the additional software options are purchased; the other carried out when the updated licence file is received from OmniTek. Note: Both parts of the operation copy files to or from a USB memory stick. There is no need to formally unmount this stick at the end of the operation but, if required, the stick can be unmounted through the USB Drives option described in Section U.2.

Steps at time of purchase


1. Insert a memory stick in one of the USB ports on the OTM 1000. 2. Display the System page of the Config window.

3. Take the Save Licences option offered on the Button Bar and use the file selector that appears to save a copy of your current licence file to the USB memory stick. The use of this file selector is described in Section B.6.

3. Take the Save Licences option offered on the Button Bar and use the Windows file selector that appears to save a copy of your current licence file to the USB memory stick.

4. Email a copy of this licence file to OmniTek/your OmniTek dealer as advised by your dealer.

Steps on receipt of the updated licence file


1. Copy the received licence file to a USB memory stick and insert this in one of the USB ports on the OTM 1000.

2. Display the System page of the Config window. 3. Take the Load Licences option offered on the Button Bar and use the file selector this offers

to open new licence file. 4. Allow the system to shut down and restart.


A.5 Updating to the Latest Version

The following is an outline of the steps to follow to update the version of the software that you are currently using to the latest version. Note: Details of the version you are currently using are given on the System page of the OTM’s Config window. The procedure starts with how to download the latest version of the software. Supplied alongside the new software will be a set of Software Upgrade Instructions that gives full details of the steps to take.


1. Use a web browser on any machine to visit the OmniTek website (http://www.omnitek.tv) and call up the Software Downloads option on the Support page. Use the form on this page to register a username and password to log-in to this website.

2. Confirmation of your registration will be provided in an email. When this confirmation arrives, return to the Software Downloads page of the OmniTek web-site, login, then download the latest version of the OTM 1000 software from the Downloads page that is displayed.

3. Download a copy of the Upgrade Instructions provided alongside the new software, together with any other documents you require.

4. Put the software file(s) you downloaded on a USB memory stick. Turn your OTM on (if not already turned on), then plug this memory stick into one of its USB ports.

5. Follow the procedure given in the Upgrade Instructions. Note: There is no need to formally unmount the USB stick at the end of the operation but, if required, the stick can be unmounted through the USB Drives option described in Section U.2.

A.6 General Care

The OTM 1000 should be kept encased in the enclosure in which it is supplied or mounted in a standard rack unit. This will avoid dust getting into the hardware. We also recommend keeping the exterior of the OTM 1000 clean (see below). You should also have any damaged, worn or missing parts replaced as soon as possible through your OmniTek dealer. This will prolong the life of your OTM 1000. DO NOT try to clean or otherwise maintain the internal hardware of the OTM 1000. If there is an issue, consult either your OmniTek dealer or OmniTek support. IMPORTANT: Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures.

Cleaning The exterior of OTM 1000 may be brushed clean of dust with a soft-bristle brush or wiped over with a dry lint-free cloth. DO NOT use any abrasive compounds or solvents. In addition, the glass cover to the screen may be cleaned with an ethanol-based solvent such as those sold as cleaners for LCD screens. DO NOT press or rub or use anything abrasive to clean the screen and take care to ensure that the glass cleaner is only applied to the glass cover as it is possible that the chemicals in the cleaner might damage the surrounding plastic. Before using any other type of cleaner, consult either your OmniTek dealer or OmniTek support.



Changing the Fuse The fuse is located in a small compartment located immediately above the power socket.

On/Off Switch

Power Socket

Fuse Compartment

Figure A-8: Power connection, showing fuse compartment.

There should normally be no need to change the fuse but should the need arise, it may be replaced with a 5x20mm Low Breaking Capacity (LBC) 3A fuse. Note: The OTM 1000 is delivered with two fuses in the fuse compartment – an active one and a spare.

Steps:


1. Turn the On/Off switch above the power socket to Off, then remove the power cord from the power socket.

2. With the power cord removed, it should be possible to locate a small lip on the top surface of the power socket surround.

3. Use this lip to pull the fuse compartment forward, bringing the fuses with it. 4. After a short distance, the compartment is able to turn down through 90º, at which point the

fuses become easy to take out and replace. The active fuse is the one of the right (looking from the back). You should be able to see the contacts on the right-hand side of the slot from which the fuse compartment has been removed.

5. Simply remove the fuse from the right-hand fuse slot, then either move the fuse from the left-hand slot to the right-hand slot or take a new fuse and put it in the right-hand slot. (To make the fuse easy to remove, angle it so that the top of the fuse is pointing to the right in the right-hand slot/to the left in the left-hand slot. The replacement fuse also goes in more easily when angled in this way.)

6. Slide the fuse compartment back into its slot.

Note: For the fuse compartment to slide in, each fuse needs to be correctly aligned. If they are not correctly aligned, the compartment won’t slide in the full way. If you have difficulty sliding the fuse compartment back in with two fuses in the compartment, try gently squeezing the tops of the fuses together before carefully sliding the unit back in.

Changing the Battery The OTM 1000’s motherboard includes a battery that is used to maintain the system clock in the event of a power failure. This battery can be expected to last for at least two years. If the battery fails, it should be replaced with an identical CR2032 manganese dioxide lithium coin battery. Be careful to ensure that the battery is inserted with the negative side closer to the CPU. Note: The default BIOS settings for the OTM are held in a BIOS bin file and will be automatically restored when the instrument is reassembled with the new battery in place.


A.7 Certification

The OTM 1000 has been tested and certified as compliant under the following regulations:

EMC Directive 2004/108/EC This Declaration of Compliance is based on the compliance of the product with the harmonised EMC standard EN61326:2006-1. In addition, the OTM 1000 is:

Exempt from FCC Code of Federal Regulations 47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class A Limits (on the grounds of being a digital device used exclusively as industrial test equipment). It has however been designed to exceed FCC Class A and tested to confirm this.

Conforms to the 2002/95/EC RoHS Directive

Self-certified to Safety Standard EN61010 The instrument’s display screen is a 17cm NEC TFT colour LCD module and conforms to the specification given by NEC for their NL10276BC13-01 module.

OmniTek OTM 1000 User Guide, v3.1 B-1

B : System Control This section describes the facilities the OTM 1000 offers for selecting program features.

B.1 General Controls

The main control is provided by the buttons on the instrument’s front panel. However, there is also the option of driving the OTM 1000 using a mouse and keyboard as described later in this section. Indeed, a few specialised actions can only be carried out with a mouse and keyboard.

The Control Panel

Figure B-1: Front view of an OTM 1000, showing the button groups.

The following table details the actions of the different buttons and knobs of the OTM 1000’s control panel, grouped according to the type of action they carry out.

Button Description

Input & Preset – select what the numeric pad is used for.

INPUT Pressing INPUT enables the numeric pad to be used for input stream selection. Pressing and holding INPUT brings up a list of the input streams that are currently available in input number order.

PRESET Pressing PRESET enables the numeric pad to be used to select a preset. Pressing and holding this button calls up a complete list of available presets. See Section B.4 for more details.

Window Buttons – select the top-level window displays

VIEW Selects the View window, which displays monitoring tools

GEN Selects the Capture / Generator window

CONFIG Selects the Configuration window

HELP Selects the Help window (not available in the current version)

FREEZE Selects the Freeze facility, through which screen shots and SDI input stills may be captured and saved.


Button Description

Full & Multi

FULL Used in the View window to bring the currently-selected tile into full screen display. Subsequent presses toggle between full screen display with and without the associated status/button bar.

MULTI Reverts from full screen display of one tile to its parent multiple-tile display (where this exists).

Tile Buttons. Note: The naming of these keys come from the category of display they select in the View window.

WFM Waveform category displays or 1st (leftmost) soft key

VECTOR Vectorscope category displays or 2nd soft key

PICT Picture category displays or 3rd soft key

AUDIO Audio category displays or 4th soft key

GAMUT Gamut category displays or 5th soft key

STATUS Status category displays or 6th soft key

TIMING Timing category (Delay Measurement) displays or 7th soft key

PHY Physical category (Eye/Jitter etc.) displays or 8th (rightmost) soft key

Navigation Buttons

HOME Goes to top level of hierarchy / menu structure.

BACK Goes back up one level of hierarchy / menu structure. Also acts as Backspace when entering text and as Close for menus/other subsidiary displays.

PROPS Calls up the Properties control, which is used to set window/item properties

Numeric Pad

Numeric Pad Provides numeric entry for values, Input channel and Preset numbers. Note: The ‘*’ button is used with ‘ENTER’ to type Input/Preset numbers 10 and above. It is also used to enter negative values and decimal point.

Knobs and OTHER button. Note: The detailed action of these knobs is context sensitive

GENERAL Twisted to cycle through options at same level in hierarchy. Pushed to select items and to display the Button Bar (see below). Its current action is shown at the top of the display.

HORIZ Twisted to adjust Horizontal parameters and to move cursors from left to right across hierarchical listings. Pushed to switch e.g. between a pair of cursors.

VERT Twisted to adjust Vertical parameters and to move cursors up and down hierarchical listings. Pushed to switch e.g. between a pair of cursors.

OTHER Toggles the display of the Button Bar (see Section C.1)


Using a Mouse As well as driving the OTM 1000 from the control panel, it is also possible to plug in a mouse and keyboard at any time and use these alongside the control panel to drive the OTM 1000. Operating with a mouse and keyboard gives the user both an alternative way of selecting features that can be accessed from the control panel and access to some features that aren’t accessible using the control panel controls. The OTM 1000 offers three USB ports through which a USB mouse, USB keyboard or combined USB mouse and keyboard may be plugged in – one on the front panel and two on the back panel. Devices plugged into any of these ports will be automatically recognised by the underlying Windows system and immediately made available for use, with the standard mouse actions of pointing and clicking having their usual effects.

USB Port Figure B-2: Front view of an OTM 1000 showing the port available for attaching a mouse

and/or keyboard.

USB Ports


Figure B-3: Rear view of an OTM 1000 showing the ports available for attaching a mouse

and/or keyboard The OTM 1000 is PC-based and its interface broadly follows the control conventions of a standard Microsoft® Windows® interface, with the PC’s mouse and keyboard being used for data entry and option selection. Items and options are therefore typically selected through a combination of positioning the cursor and single-clicking the left-hand mouse button. Where other actions are required, this should be clear from the description in this document.


Right-click menu Right-clicking with a mouse displays a context-sensitive menu. The following three entries always appear, as do two of View, Generator and Configuration (giving you a route to the alternative window displays). Home: Goes to the top-most level of the current display, at which no individual item included in the display is selected. Back: Used in hierarchical displays to go one step back up the hierarchy. Properties: Calls up the Properties control for the current window.

The remainder depend on the window that is displayed and what the pointer was on when the mouse button was clicked. The example shown here is displayed when the View window is in its normal mode (as opposed to its Edit mode: see Section D).

Keyboard Controls Where the OTM is driven using a mouse & keyboard, the following alternative keystrokes can be used.

Top Level Windows To select: Press: Config Window C Gen Window G View Window V Freeze function F Properties Control Tab key

Navigation To select: Press: Back function Backspace key Home function Home key

Full/Multi Display To select: Press: Full display Numeric keypad + Multi display Numeric keypad –

Preset Selection To select: Press: Presets 0 – 9 P followed by the number of the preset, typed using the numeric keypad. Presets 10 and above P followed by numeric keypad *, followed by the digits of the number

(typed using the numeric keypad), followed by pressing the Enter key. Predefined Preset Combinations F1 – F12

Others: Dual-Link Press D to toggle selection of Force Dual-Link option (see Section T.4).


B.2 Settings

Many aspects of the OTM 1000’s operation are configurable by the user. There are a number of general features to the displays through which these settings are made. Firstly, parameters are typically presented in a collapsible hierarchy much like the one used in Windows Explorer to display folders. Sections of the display that can be opened further are indicated by a [+] beside the heading; those that are already fully displayed are indicated by a [-].

Figure B-4: Example display involving Settings.


To open a section of the display (currently marked [+])

Use the GENERAL knob to move the focus (copper-coloured/blue highlighting) onto the heading line of the section. (As you twist this knob, the focus moves line by line through the display, automatically picking out the active element(s) on each line.)

Then push the GENERAL knob

Click on the [+] beside the heading.


To open a section fully:

Select the heading line as above. Push and hold the GENERAL knob

Click and hold on the [+] beside the heading.

To close a section of the display (currently marked [-])

Move the focus onto the heading line of the section and push the GENERAL knob – or push and hold to close that entire section of the hierarchy.

Note: Where the heading is associated with a tick box, care is needed to ensure that the cursor is just on the heading, otherwise the tick box setting will toggle.

Click on the [-] beside the heading.

Note: The steps used to open and close sections of the Status hierarchy, Video Configuration and Audio Configuration displays are similar but use the HORIZ and VERT knobs rather than the GENERAL knob.

The associated settings themselves may be of three types.


Check boxes:

Switch these between checked (ticked) and clear by moving the focus to the option and pushing the GENERAL knob

Switch these between checked (ticked) and clear by clicking on the box.

Options offered in a menu:

To set these, move the focus to the current setting, push the GENERAL knob, then select the required option from the menu that is displayed

To set these, click on the current entry, then click on the required option in the menu that is displayed

Thumbwheel settings:

Move the focus to the current setting, push the GENERAL knob then: For small adjustments: twist the GENERAL knob. For larger adjustments: type the new value using the numeric keypad. To finish, push the GENERAL knob again or, if you typed the new value, press the ENTER button.

Click on the current setting then: For small adjustments: use either the control or the thumbwheel on the mouse or the Up, Down arrow keys (the Left and Right arrow keys have no effect). For larger adjustments: type the new value you want using the keyboard.

Note: To enter a negative value on the numeric keypad, start by pressing ‘*’. Also press ‘*’ to enter a decimal point.


B.3 Window Displays

The OTM 1000 application has four ‘top-level’ window displays, used for different areas of the system’s operation as follows:

‘View’ window – used for Image Analysis

‘Gen’ window – used for Signal Capture/Generation

‘Config’ window – used for System Configuration and Version information

‘Help’ window – used for On-screen Help (not supported in the current version) To make the most efficient use of the screen area, the above windows are overlaid one on top of another. They are also normally shown ‘full frame’ without any of the usual framing associated with Microsoft Windows. However, where the OTM is being used with a mouse and keyboard, it can be used in a ‘Windows’ mode (see below) in which the basic controls are offered as a set of toolbars and the windows have the normal Windows handles. To select any of the main window displays:


To select any of the main window displays:

Press the corresponding button from the group of five on the left-hand side of the screen.

1. Check that the Windows Toolbar is displayed (selected via the View menu).

2. Click on the name of the required window in the Top-Level Windows Toolbar

Other displays are called up on screen as a consequence of selecting options within one of the main windows. Note: The Config window is divided into ‘pages’ covering different aspects of the OTM 1000’s system configuration. So inspecting or changing any detail of the system configuration involves first calling up the Config window, then selecting the appropriate page of this window.

Status Bar The window displays may also include a Status Bar such as the one shown here, giving appropriate information for example about the video currently being received on the OTM’s IN ports together with a clock and details of the preset that is currently selected (see Section B.4). The Audio data indicates the channels on which audio is present (P) in the order Channel 1 – 16.

Figure B-5: Sample Status Bar display


Button Bar Associated with each display is a Button Bar. In the Gen and Config windows, the Button Bar is always shown at the bottom of the screen. In the View window, the default arrangement is for the Button Bar to temporarily take the place of the Status Bar at the bottom of the screen but there are other options. (For details, see Section C.1.) The Button Bar is a command bar and it provides direct access to some commonly-required actions. In particular, several Button Bar options provide shortcuts to settings within the Properties control (described below). In most cases, successive presses of the Tile button cycle through the possible options while pressing and holding the Tile button brings up the Properties control with the focus on the selected feature. The options shown depend on the window being shown and the action being carried out. A sample Button Bar is shown below.

Figure B-6: Sample Button Bar

The standard colouring for any button is a dark grey, changing to a lighter grey when the feature it selects is not currently available. Where options on the Button Bar turn on or turn off particular features, the button is additionally highlighted (copper-coloured) when that feature is currently selected.


Picking out Items to work with Throughout the OTM 1000 application, items in windows or menus are picked out to work with by moving the ‘focus’ of the window to the required item, after which it may be necessary to further select the item in order to either change it or activate it. The item that currently has the focus on it is identified by blue highlighting, which is replaced by copper-coloured highlighting when the item is selected for further work.

Basic Navigation:


To move the focus to any item on the current window (blue highlighting),

Twist the GENERAL knob on the Control Panel

Scroll the thumbwheel on the mouse until the required item is selected.

Alternatively, click on the item then press the Backspace key

To select an item for further work (copper-coloured highlighting)

Move the focus to the item as described above, then push the GENERAL knob

Simply click on it

Note: There is no reason for concern if currently nothing on the screen is shown either as having the focus on it or as being selected. Simply turn the GENERAL knob and a coloured boundary will appear as the focus moves from one item to another.

Navigating around hierarchical structures Several OTM 1000 displays have a hierarchical structure to them. The steps generally used to navigate these structures are given below. (Note: Where special steps are needed to navigate a hierarchical display, these steps are explained alongside the description of those displays.)


To navigate a hierarchy:

1. Turn the GENERAL knob to move the focus from item to item at the current level.

2. Push the GENERAL knob to move down into the next level of the hierarchy. (This works until a single item is reached at which point, pushing GENERAL selects the item.)

3. Move one step back up the hierarchy by pressing the BACK button.

4. Move directly to the top of the current hierarchy by pressing the HOME button.

1. Select the required item by clicking on it. If this selects other items alongside the required item (i.e. a higher level of the hierarchy), click again until just the required item is selected.

2. Move one step back up the hierarchy by taking the Back option from either the right-click menu or the Navigate toolbar.

3. Move directly to the top of the current hierarchy by taking the Home option from either the right-click menu or the Navigate toolbar.


Window Properties Each window offers a number of choices about how the window itself and the items within that window are displayed. The choices that are made are referred to as the ‘Properties’ of the window and each window has a Properties control through which the various selections can be made and displayed, while some of the more common settings are offered as Button Bar options.


To display a window’s Properties control:

Display the required window (if not already displayed) and press the PROPS button. (Press PROPS again to close up the display.)

Right-click on the required window and take the Properties option from the menu that is displayed, or

Select Properties from the View menu, then select the appropriate View option from the sub-menu that is displayed.

Note: In the View window, access to some of the settings in the Properties control is provided through options on Button Bars, providing a useful short-cut for a range of common settings. An example Properties control is shown below. The window to which the Properties relate is shown in the title bar. (Note: The View window is sometimes labelled as View 1 because, in future versions, where OTM systems are networked together, the View windows associated with other OTM systems will be identified as View 2, View 3 etc. You should also note that the width of the Properties control can vary depending on the layout of the current display.

Figure B-7: Sample Properties controls – Full View and Multi View


The properties listed at the top of the display set some overall details either about the window and its Properties control. The properties of the items within the window display appear towards the bottom of the display. The range of properties associated with any item entirely depend on the type of item. As in other parts of the OTM’s operation, copper-coloured/blue highlighting is used to indicate the current focus within the Properties control and this focus is moved by twisting the GENERAL knob. If an item is selected within the main window display when the Properties control is called up, the focus will be on this item. Similarly, if the Properties control is called up as a result of selecting an option from the Button Bar, the focus will be on the selected setting. The aspects set through the Properties control are arranged in a collapsible hierarchy with [+] or [-] symbols alongside the ‘headings’ so that you can readily arrange to see just those details that you want to see. The basic procedure for setting properties is as follows:

1. Display the Properties control for the window you are working on. 2. Use the [+] and [-] markers to open/close sections of the display as required. 3. Make any adjustments that are necessary to the various settings shown.

Close the Properties control by pressing either PROPS or the BACK button.

Switching between Full Frame Mode and Windows Mode The OTM is typically used in its ‘Full Frame’ mode in which the various displays shown without any of the framing usually associated with Microsoft® Windows. However, where the OTM is being used with a mouse and keyboard, it can alternatively be used a ‘Windows’ mode in which the windows have the normal Windows handles allowing them to be moved, re-sized, tiled, cascaded etc. The associated toolbars can also be moved using standard Microsoft techniques.

To switch from Full Frame mode to Windows mode, press ESC on the keyboard.

To switch from Windows mode to Full Frame mode, also press ESC i.e. ESC toggles between these two display modes.

Whether the OTM is working in Full Screen mode or Windows mode is one of the aspects of the system that is recorded when the OTM is shut down and automatically restored the next time the OTM is run.

Directing the display to a separate monitor The current window display can be shown on a separate monitor by plugging a suitable monitor into the Video Out connector on the back panel.


B.4 Presets

Particular combinations of settings and other selections can be captured for recall on subsequent occasions by recording these as Presets. Four types of Preset can be recorded: View Presets; Gen Presets; Config Presets and System Presets.

View Presets record the detailed layout of the View window (including all the settings in the View Properties).

Gen Presets record all the settings in the Gen properties, together with the details of the ‘patterns’ (images, sequences, line patterns and zone plates) that are currently loaded for play-out but not the source files for these patterns.

Config Presets record the current set of audio, video and system configuration settings.

System Presets record all the details about the current system that would be recorded by a View Preset, a Gen Preset and a Config Preset, together with such things as the positioning of the different windows when the OTM is used in Windows mode, which toolbars are displayed and where they appear on the display.

Multiple presets of each type can be recorded. Presets are identified by a number which may be used to select the required Preset (see below). A short description can also be included to aid in identification. When a Preset is selected, all the settings that the Preset records are replaced by the values etc. that are recorded in the Preset. So when a View Preset is selected, it populates the View window with the saved combination of tiles. Similarly, when a Config Preset is selected, the various settings shown in the Config window are replaced by the ones that were in place when the Preset was recorded, and when a Gen Preset is selected, the Gen properties are set to match the ones recorded in the Gen Preset and the patterns are replaced by the set of patterns that were in place when the Preset was recorded. Note: It is up to the user to ensure that the source files to which these patterns refer are available in their expected locations. When a System Preset is selected, all three of the View window, the Gen window and the Config window are changed to reflect the settings recorded in the Preset. It also switches the selected input stream back to the one that was selected when the Preset was saved. (It doesn’t, of course, change the data stream on the selected input.) To make individual System Presets and/or combinations of individual View and/or Gen and/or Config Presets even easier to recall, these can also be assigned to function keys. The number of the currently selected View Preset is displayed on the Status Bar, followed by an asterisk when the layout has been changed from the recorded version in some way. A number of ‘Factory’ Presets are supplied alongside the OTM software. These Presets cannot be altered in any way but a ‘User’ Preset (i.e. one set up by the user as described below) that is assigned to the same Preset number takes precedence and will always be used in place of the Factory Preset. (For further information, see Section U.)


Using Presets from other OmniTek systems As well as using Presets set up and saved on your own system, you can also use Presets both from other OTM systems and from OTR systems. The option that enables you to do this is the Manage Disk option offered when you call up the list of Presets (as well as at other points within the OTM application). Taking this option displays a Manage User Files dialogue with options for Importing, Exporting or Deleting the different types of file that you may have in your User area, which include Presets. Further information is given in Section U. Note: When a System Preset that was created on a raster system is used on an OTM 1000, the window displayed when the System Preset is selected will be whichever window was the active window when the Preset was saved.

Recording Presets The following gives the steps used both to record individual Presets of the four different types and to assign individual System Presets and/or combinations of individual View and/or Gen and/or Config Presets to function keys. Note: The procedure used for saving System Presets differs from that used to save View, Gen or Config Presets.

Recording a View, Gen or Config Preset


To assign the current View, Gen or Config window set-up to a Preset:

1. Press the PRESET button to put the keypad into ‘Preset’ mode.

2. Press and hold the appropriate numeric key to assign the current window set-up to that Preset number (or for numbers greater than 9, type “* [number]”, then press and hold the Enter key).

3. When the following dialogue appears, set a suitable description then select OK.

Figure B-5: Example Save Preset dialogue

1. Display the Presets toolbar shown below (if not already displayed) and make it the active window e.g by clicking on it.

2. Click and hold the appropriate key of

the numeric keypad within this toolbar (or press and hold the corresponding key of the numeric keypad on your keyboard) to assign the current window set-up to that Preset number. Note: For numbers greater than 9, enter the sequence “* number”, then click and hold on the Enter button).

3. When the Save Preset dialogue appears, set a suitable description then select OK.


Recording a System Preset


To assign the current system set-up to a System Preset:

1. Select the View/Gen/Config window as appropriate and press and hold the PRESET button to display the Presets dialogue.

2. Take the Save system option (VECTOR button).

1. Select Load/Save presets… from the File menu (or press, hold then release the P key on your keyboard) to display the Presets dialogue.

2. Take the Save system option.

Figure B-6: Presets dialogue

3. Enter the index number for this System Preset in the dialogue that is displayed and select OK.

4. When the Save Preset dialogue appears, set a suitable description, then select OK.

The new Preset is then added to the list.

When you have finished with the dialogue, select Close from the Button Bar.


Changing the Description of a Preset (User Presets only) The description associated with any User Preset can be modified at any time as follows:


To assign the current system set-up to a System Preset:

1. Press and hold the PRESET button to display the Presets dialogue.

1. Select Load/Save presets… from the File menu (or press, hold then release the P key on your keyboard) to display the Presets dialogue.


2. Take the Rename option. 3. When the Rename dialogue appears, edit the Description then select OK.

Figure B-8: Example Rename dialogue

4. This returns you to the Presets dialogue.

When you have finished with the dialogue, select Close from the Button Bar.


Preset Selection All the Presets that have been set up (together with any ‘Factory’ Presets that are still in use) may be called up from a list of all the Presets. This list also offers a Manage Disk option that can be used to remove unwanted Presets or to exchange Presets with another system (for further details, see Section U). View, Gen and Config Presets may alternatively be selected by giving the number of the required Preset. In addition, System Presets or combinations of Presets that have been assigned to a function key may be selected using that function key.

Selecting Individual Presets


To select any type of Preset:

General Method

Display the window you want to affect, then press and hold the PRESET button, to display the Presets dialogue. Then pick the Preset you require from the list that is offered and take the Load option (WFM button).

Select Load/Save presets… from the File menu (or press, hold then release the P key on your keyboard) to display the Presets dialogue, then pick the Preset you require from the list that is offered and take the Load option.


Selecting View/Gen Presets by Number

1. Select the View/Gen window as appropriate.

2. Press the PRESET button to put the keypad into ‘Preset’ mode.

1. Select the View/Gen window as appropriate. 2. Display the Presets toolbar (if not already displayed)

by ticking the Presets toolbar option in View menu, and make it the active window e.g. by clicking on it.

Figure B-10: Presets toolbar



3. Use the numeric keypad to enter the number of the required Preset. For Preset numbers up to 9, just press the appropriate number button. For Preset numbers greater than 9, type “* [number] ENTER”. E.g. * 1 2 ENTER for 12

3. Use the buttons of this toolbar or the numeric keypad on your keyboard to enter the number of the required Preset. For Preset numbers up to 9, just click on the appropriate number. For Preset numbers greater than 9, enter the sequence “* [number] ENTER”. E.g. * 1 2 ENTER for 12

Assigning Presets to Function Keys Control Panel Mouse & Keyboard

To assign a System Preset/Selection of individual Presets to a Function Key:

1. (i) Press and hold the PRESET button to display the Presets dialogue. (ii) Take the Function Keys option. (iii) Select the chosen Function Key from the list that is displayed and take the Edit option.

1. Press and hold the chosen Function Key.

Figure B-11: Save Preset Combination dialogue

2. Either: Select Individual Presets, then use the drop-down menus for the View, Gen and Config entries to select the required combination of Presets Or: Select System Preset, then select the required System Preset from the associated drop-down list.

3. Select OK.


Selecting Predefined Combinations Combinations of Individual Presets and System Presets that have been assigned to a function key can be recalled as follows:


To select a Preset Combination that has been assigned to a Function Key:

1. Press and hold the PRESET button to display the Presets dialog.

2. When the dialogue appears, select the Function Keys option.

3. Pick the required Function Key from the list that is offered and take the Recall option (WFM button).

Press the required function key.

Figure B-12: Save Presets dialogue

Figure B-13: Function Key Assignment dialogue


B.5 File Selection

Several actions in the application involve the selection of a file stored on disk.

Where the OTM is being used with a mouse and keyboard, a standard Windows file selector is shown through which to select the file you require.

Where the OTM is being used without a mouse and keyboard fitted to it, a special form of file selector is used (shown below), together with a dedicated button bar. Together, these allow files to be picked out using the buttons of the control panel. The main display shows a list of the items (disks, folders, files) present at the current point in the file hierarchy. Note: The “..” entry at the top of the listing (where shown) represents the ‘parent’ directory.

Button Bar

WFM VECTOR PICT AUDIO GAMUT STATUS TIMING PHY

Toggle select switches the current item between unselected (clear) and selected (ticked). Where the item is a folder, the whole contents of that folder are selected. Toggle select all switches all the items in the current folder between unselected (clear) and selected (ticked) or vice versa, depending on the current setting of the individual items. OK is used once you’ve selected the required file(s) to close the file selector and work with the selected files. Cancel closes the File selector without making any changes.

Control Panel

To select files:

1. Navigate to the folder containing the required file(s). To step through different folders, move the focus to the appropriate folder name (by turning the GENERAL knob), then push the GENERAL knob to enter that folder.

2. Select individual files by moving the focus to each file in turn and pushing the GENERAL knob to tick it, or select all the files in a folder either by using the Toggle select all option (VECTOR button) or by moving the focus to the folder name and taking the Toggle select option from the Button Bar (WFM button).

3. When all the required files are ticked, select OK from the Button Bar (PICT button).

Figure B-14: Sample File Selector and associated

Button Bar (below)


B.6 Saving Files

Some actions involve saving a file to disk. In some cases, the file is saved automatically in a standard location and under a standard name; in others, the user needs to select both where the file is stored and its filename. Where the OTM 1000 is being used with a mouse and keyboard, a standard Windows file selector is shown through which to set these details. Where the OTM 1000 is being used without a mouse and keyboard fitted to it, a special form of file selector is used (shown below), together with a dedicated button bar. Together, these allow the required details to be selected using just the buttons of the control panel.

Figure B-15: Sample File Save dialogue and associated Button Bar (below)

Button Bar

WFM VECT PICT AUDIO GAMUT STATUS TIMING PHY

Create new… starts the process of creating the new file in the chosen location Cancel closes the File selector without making any changes As in other file selectors, the main display shows a list of the items (disks, folders, files) present at the current point in the file hierarchy, while the “..” entry at the top of the listing represents the ‘parent’ directory.


Control Panel

To save the file: 1. Navigate to the required folder by moving the focus to the appropriate folder name (by

turning the GENERAL knob), then pushing the GENERAL knob to enter that folder. 2. Select Create new… from the Button Bar (WFM button). 3. Set up the required filename by using the GENERAL knob to pick characters from the

schematic keyboard that is displayed (see below). Note: Simple push for lower-case characters; push and hold for upper-case characters. (Correct any mistakes by using the ‘Backspace’ ‘key’ beside the ‘Space bar’ to delete characters.)

4. To finish, select the ‘Return’ ‘key’.

‘Space Bar’‘Shift’ key

‘Backspace’ key

‘Return’ key

Figure B-16: File Selector ‘keyboard’. Note: This keyboard is also provided in other places within the OTM application e.g. when saving details of Safe Title and Safe Area cages. If it doesn’t appear automatically at the point it is needed, press the GENERAL knob.


OmniTek OTM 1000 User Guide, v3.1 C-1

C : The View Window The View window is used to display the results of various data analysis tools applied by the OTM 1000 to the currently selected input(s). The different analyses may be shown either individually or in combination.

Figure C-1: Sample View Window display

The range of analyses that may be viewed depends on the options purchased but may include:

Waveforms

Vectorscope displays

Gamut charts

Status information

Pixel data

Audio PPMs, Loudness assessments etc.

Eye and Jitter diagrams

A/V Delay measurements This section looks at the overall features of the View window. The displays associated with the different analysis tools that may be applied are described in a separate sections.


C.1 Overview

Selecting the View Window Control Panel Mouse & Keyboard

To display the View window:

Press the VIEW button on the Control Panel.

Click on View in the Windows toolbar.

Note: If this toolbar isn’t displayed, tick Top-level Windows toolbar in the View menu)

Definitions The View window is divided into ‘Tiles’, each showing a particular aspect of the video under test (referred to as a ‘View’). For ease of selection, each View is allocated to a ‘Category’. ‘Views’ and ‘Categories’ are explained further below.

Views The basic graphical elements that can appear on the OTM 1000’s View window are referred to as Views. Each View shows the results from a separate analysis tool and may include pictures, audio meters, waveforms, etc.

Categories Views are organized into ‘categories’, each based around a particular type of data analysis offered by the OTM 1000. The principal categories are:

WFM (Video waveforms) VECTOR (Vectorscope) PICTURE (Video image) AUDIO (Audio displays such as PPMs) GAMUT (Component gamut, CIE Colour Chart) STATUS (Status information, pixel data) TIMING (System timing, A/V Delays etc.) PHY (Transport layer measurements such as eye height and jitter)

Each category can have any number of members (including 0), one of which will be the current default. For example, the AUDIO default might be the PPM display, while the STATUS default might be the ‘DataView’ pixel data display (where installed). Initially, some categories will just comprise the View after which the category is named, some may be empty while others may include additional Views depending on which instrument options have been installed. For example, where the OTM 1000 includes the VIEW_DATA option, the STATUS category will also include the DataView display. The labels on the ‘Tile’ buttons positioned along the bottom edge of the OTM 1000 (WFM, etc.) each represent a different category.


Basic Screen Layout The default layout for the View window comprises four tiles, arranged in the simple ‘quad split’ shown below. This allows the results from up to four different monitoring tools to be displayed simultaneously.

Figure C-2: Standard Quad-Split Layout.

It is also possible to set up custom screen layouts offering more complex arrangements of tiles (see Section D). A mouse is required to set such layouts up but, once in place, the Control Panel can be used to call up the different layouts. The tiles are referred to in terms of the View they show. So, for example, the screen shown above comprises an Audio PPMs tile, a Picture tile, a Waveform tile and a Vectorscope tile. Each tile can readily be replaced by one showing a different View. It is also possible to select any tile and show the View it contains full screen. (These actions are described in Section C.2.) Different combinations and arrangements of tiles may be saved for re-use on a subsequent occasion by saving these as Presets. (These actions are also described in Section C.2.). Optionally, a ‘Tile info’ line can be shown at the top of each tile, detailing the View that is displayed and the input that the display relates to. Whether this information is shown is set through the Properties control (see Section C.2), and is also saved as part of each Preset. Note: If a tile isn’t big enough to show the entire display, the tile will be shown with scroll bars. With a mouse, these scroll bars can be simply dragged to show the part of the display you are interested in. The bars can also be moved by pushing the corresponding HORIZ or VERT knob, then twisting to make the required adjustment. (Push the knob a second time to cancel this action.)


Status Bar Where the View window includes a Status Bar, this gives brief details of the inputs that have been detected, together with a thumbnail of the video being received, a clock and the number (and description, where set) of the preset that is currently selected (see Section B.4). The Audio data indicates the channels on which audio is present (P) in the order Channel 1 – 16.

Figure C-3: Example View Status Bar.

Button Bar Associated with each display in the View Window is a Button Bar offering access to up to eight commonly-required actions or settings.

Figure C-4: Sample Button Bar

There are three modes of operation for Button Bars in the View window, selected through the Soft keys mode section of the View Window’s Properties control:

Figure C-5: Soft keys settings within the View window’s Properties control.

Normal: In this mode, when the Tile is selected, the Button Bar is displayed over the part of the screen normally occupied by the Status Bar. The Button Bar then remains displayed until it is either actively cleared from the screen (see below) or it times out (again, see below).

Side-by-Side: In this mode, the Button Bar associated with the View on the current tile is permanently displayed in the left-hand half of the area normally occupied by the Status Bar, while a compressed version of the Status Bar is displayed in the right-hand half.

Per Tile: In this mode, the appropriate Button Bar is permanently displayed at the bottom of each tile.

Note: The Side-by-Side and Per Tile modes are principally intended for use where the OTM is used with a mouse and keyboard, while the Per Tile mode is intended for use with larger monitors.


The following controls are used in working with the Button Bar:


To display the Button Bar (‘Normal’ mode only)

Either: Push the GENERAL knob. Or: Press the OTHER button. The OTHER button then becomes lit.

Click on the display

To select an option from the Button Bar:

(In Normal Mode) Press the Tile button (WFM – PHY) located immediately below the required option. (Alternatively, match the Button Bar option to the required Tile button by counting from the left,)

Click on the required option

To hide the Button Bar (‘Normal’ mode only)

Either: Press the BACK button knob. Or: Press the OTHER button. The OTHER button will no longer be lit.

Press the Backspace key

Soft Keys Timeout In Normal mode, if the Button Bar isn’t used, it can be set to time out. This timeout is adjustable through the Soft keys timeout section offered when Normal mode is selected (and hidden when either Side-by-Side or Per Tile is selected). This length of time after which the bar times out is set as the Duration (in seconds) while the timeout facility is selected by ticking the Enabled option.


C.2 View Window Operations

This section describes some general actions that are carried out on the View window.

Selecting the Views to display

Switching between Full screen and Multiple tile display

Setting tile and/or window properties

View Selection Any tile can readily be replaced by one showing a different View. The key factor is the category to which the required View belongs. Note: Where the same View is displayed by more than one tile, the Views are independent copies in order to allow the tiles to have different display properties. You should also note that some types of display – specifically waveforms, the vectorscope, the CIE Chart, Eye and Jitter displays – make significant use of resources. You will always be able to select whichever View you want where a tile is displayed full screen but more complex selections may not be available in a multi-tile display.


To display the required View:

Steps when the category is known: 1. Move the focus (blue box) to the tile that

you want to replace. (If a Button Bar is shown, press either OTHER or BACK.)

2. Press the Tile button (below the screen) corresponding to the required category.

3. The View shown then switches the most recently used View within that category. If the View that is selected isn’t the one you want, keep pressing the Tile button until the required View is displayed (cycles through the Views in that category).

Note: If you select a category for which no Views are currently installed, the tile simply doesn’t change.

In all cases: Either: 1. Click on the tile that you want to replace. 2. Select the View you require in the View

Tile Browser. Or: 1. Right-click on the tile that you want to

replace. 2. Select Replace Tile in the menu that

appears, then use the associated submenus to select first the category of View and then the actual View.

The View that is currently displayed as replaced by the View you select.

General steps: 1. Move the focus to the tile that you want to

replace. (Again, if a Button Bar is shown, press either OTHER or BACK.)

2. Press and hold any of the Tile buttons. This displays the View Tile Browser with the cursor on the category corresponding to the button you pressed.

3. Use the GENERAL knob to scroll through the available Views and select the required View. The View currently displayed is then replaced by the selected View.


The View Tile Browser

Figure C-6: View Tile Browser.

The View Tile Browser provides access to all the various Views that are available, organized into their categories, and allows you to pick the one you want in the current tile.


To display the View Tile Browser:

Press and hold any of the Tile buttons (WFM, VECTOR etc.) below the OTM 1000’s screen.

The View Tile Browser is displayed by default, but if it has been closed it can be displayed by ticking View tile browser toolbar in the View menu included on the screen’s menu bar

The top level of the Browser comprises a list of the categories that have been defined. To display details of the Views that have been allocated to a particular category :

Move the focus to that category Click on the [+] adjacent to the category name

When the Browser is displayed, the focus is automatically on the category from which you called up the Browser. Views are generally picked out by expanding the appropriate category then selecting the required View but the current default View within a category can be picked out by selecting the category. Note: If you select a category for which no Views are currently installed or a View that is not currently available (shown greyed out), the tile simply doesn’t change.


Full/Multiple Tile display Views can be displayed full screen (and subsequently switched back to a multi-tile display) using the FULL and MULTI buttons. Either the FULL or the MULTI button is lit to indicate the mode that is currently selected.


To show a tile full screen:

Move the focus to the required tile and press the FULL button.

Press the FULL button again to toggle between showing and hiding the Status Bar/Button Bar at the bottom of the screen.

Click on the required tile, then take the Full option from the Full/Multi toolbar or press the + key of the keyboard’s numeric keypad.

Click on Full or press + again to toggle between showing and hiding the Status Bar/Button Bar at the bottom of the screen.

Note: If no focus is shown (e.g. after selecting HOME), selecting FULL will result in the previously selected top-level View being shown full screen, automatically resized to fit the aspect ratio of the screen.

To return to multi-tile display:

Press the MULTI button. Select the Multi option from the Full/Multi toolbar or press the – key of the numeric keypad.

The multi-tile display will show any changes you have made in full screen mode, unless there is a resource conflict in which case it will revert to the previous multi-tile display.


Setting Overall Window Properties Control Panel Mouse & Keyboard

To change overall aspects of how the View window is shown on the screen:

1. Call up the View window’s Properties control (e.g. by pressing the PROPS button).

1. Call up the View window’s Properties control (e.g. by taking the Properties option from the right-click menu).

2. Make any changes you require within that control. The entries that set overall details are listed towards the top of the Properties control. Show all tiles: This option sets whether the Properties control shows details of every tile of the current display or just the one that is currently selected. Navigate flat mode: Ticking this option directs the OTM 1000 to ignore any hierarchy in moving the focus between the Views on the screen. Soft keys mode: Selects between the various options for showing Button Bars (see Section C.1). Tile info line: Sets whether brief details of the View and the input it relates to are permanently shown above each tile. Edit mode: Controls the granularity of the grid used either in setting up a new screen layout or in changing an existing screen layout (see Section D). Audio Monitor: Controls the volume at which audio is played back. (See Section K.9) Inputs: Sets/displays aspects of the input streams that apply to more than one View, such as the current position of the crosshair cursor. Shared Waveform Markers: Allows the definition of additional time and amplitude markers displayed across all waveform displays to aid comparison. (See Section E.3)

Figure C-7: Sample View window

Properties control


Setting Tile Properties The properties relating to the current range of tiles are listed in the section of the Properties control starting at the heading ‘Tiles’, and can be changed by editing the details shown in the Properties control. However, the first place to look when you want to change some aspect of a tile is the Button Bar because the Button Bar typically offers short-cuts to the most common settings associated with the selected View. In particular, some Button Bar options directly switch controls on and off (these options are given a copper-coloured highlight when the control is ‘On’). Other Button Bar options cycle through the possible settings, while pressing and holding the associated Tile button calls up the Properties control with the focus already on the required setting.


To set any property of a tile:

1. First check the options in the Button Bar. (If the Button Bar isn’t shown, push the GENERAL knob on the tile.)

2. If the Button Bar includes the required property, take that option – otherwise press the PROPS button and make the required setting directly within the Properties control.

1. First check the options in the Button Bar. (If the Button Bar isn’t shown, click on the tile.)

2. If the Button Bar includes the required property, take that option – otherwise make the required setting directly within the Properties control.

Note: The properties listed in the Properties control reflect the current View window display. So if the window currently shows one tile full screen, the Properties control will just show the settings for that tile. What is displayed is also subject to the setting of the Show all tiles option listed at the top of the control. If this option is ticked, the settings of all the tiles currently on the screen are displayed; if it isn’t ticked, information is just shown about the tile that currently has the focus on it.


Saving and Recalling Specific Tile Selections The Views currently selected for display in the tiles and how these Views are configured can be saved for re-use by recording this set-up as a ‘View Preset’ (see Section B.4). A View Preset records:

The View shown on each tile and which input is being analysed

How each View is configured (as recorded in the Properties control)

The other settings from the Properties control, covering such things as the soft key timeout and the speaker volume for audio play-out

Where a mouse and keyboard are fitted, the View Preset will also record:

Which toolbars etc. are displayed

The position and ordering of the various windows


To save the current selection as a View Preset:

1. Select the View window. 2. Press PRESET to put the keypad into

‘Preset’ mode. 3. Press and hold the appropriate numeric

key. 4. Set a suitable description and select OK.

1. Display the Presets toolbar. 2. Click and hold the appropriate key of the

numeric keypad within this toolbar. 3. Set a suitable description and select OK.

To recall a saved selection:

Either press and hold PRESET and load the required View Preset from the list that is displayed

Or, if you know its index number, display the View window, press PRESET to put the keypad into ‘Preset’ mode, then use the numeric keypad to enter the index number

Either take Load/save presets… from the File menu and load the required View Preset from the list that is displayed

Or, if you know its index number, display the View window, then use the Presets toolbar to enter the index number

For more detailed instructions and further information about using presets, see Section B.4.


C.3 Video Stream

The OTM 1000 supports a range of possible sources for the video stream to analyse. The main option is provided by the two SDI inputs included on the back panel of the OTM 1000. These are provided by the right-most pair of BNCs of the group of four that appear on the same card as the Analog connector. Each of these inputs can supply one or more video stream to analyse.

SDI Output 2

SDI Output 1

SDI Input 2

SDI Input 1


Figure C-8: The SDI Input (and Output) Connectors.

Further inputs are available where the instrument includes a Jitter card. Where the system includes either the GEN or the GEN_BASIC option, it is also possible to set the OTM 1000 to analyse the output from its own test signal generator. Depending on the options installed, the OTM 1000 has the potential to analyse video delivered in a wide range of standards from the PAL and NTSC SD standards (supported as standard by all implementations of the OTM 1000), through to HD, 3GA and 3GB standards. The OTM 1000’s View window typically displays the results of analysing video on one particular input and, when a different input is selected, all the displays instantly switch to the selected input. But where one of the Simultaneous Monitoring options is installed, it is possible for two or more video streams to be monitored at the same time. This is explained in Section O.

Video Stream Selection Note: This section describes how to select a video stream to analyse from among those currently offered. As supplied, the system is configured to just offer video from the two SDI inputs. How to configure the OTM 1000 to offer the input from an installed Jitter card is explained in Section T (System Configuration). Similar steps may also be used to configure the OTM 1000 to analyse the output from the built-in generator, though there is the alternative of using a cable to feed the generated video from an SDI output to one of the SDI inputs. Once the OTM 1000 is suitably configured, the steps given here can be used to select the input you require. The OTM 1000 maintains a list of the input streams that are currently available for analysis in its Inputs toolbar. Precise details of the different services to the inputs are given on the Video Inputs page of the Config window (see Section T.4). Note: References to stream 2 (where shown) refer to the second video stream that is offered by 3G Level B Dual-stream video. Other video standards only offer a single video stream on any input. Selecting the input that is analysed is ultimately a matter of picking the required input from Inputs toolbar. However, it can also be picked out by giving its Input number, which corresponds to its position in the Inputs toolbar (starting with Input 1 at the top). Alternatively, where a mouse and keyboard are fitted to the OTM, the input to be analysed in a particular tile can be selected by dragging the relevant Picture icon on the Status Bar to the tile.



To select an input

If the input number known: 1. Press the INPUT button (if not

already lit). 2. Use the numeric keypad

to enter the number of the required input

Otherwise: 1. Press and hold the

INPUT button on the Control panel to display the Inputs toolbar.

2. Select the required input from the list that is displayed.

1. Display the Inputs toolbar (if not already displayed) by ticking the Inputs toolbar option in View menu.

2. Select the required input from the list that is displayed.

Alternatively: 1. Right-click on the required tile. 2. Select Set Input from the menu that is

displayed and take the required input from the submenu that is shown.

Or: Drag the Picture icon for the required input

from the Status Bar to the tile.

Figure C-9: Inputs toolbar and the alternative right-click Set Input option.

The input stream that has been selected may be seen by setting the Tile Info Line option in the Properties control to Permanent. Note: If the OTM has difficulty in locking to the input you select, try setting it to Ignore Smpte (see ‘Input Video Standard’, below) as the problem could just be that the SMPTE packet has become corrupted.

Input Video Standard The OTM is supplied set-up to automatically determine the input video standard. Where the input stream includes a SMPTE 352 packet, the input video standard will be taken from this. Otherwise, the OTM will make its own determination of the input video standard. If required, the OTM can be set to ignore any SMPTE 352 packet and always make its own determination of the video standard. Alternatively, you can force a particular input video standard to be selected. Note: Whether the input video standard has been selected automatically or forced can be seen from the Status displays (see Section E.6 & E.7) where the details of the selected video will either show Format (Auto) or Format (Manual).



To set the OTM to ignore SMPTE 352 packets:

Display the System page of the Config window and tick the option to Ignore Smpte.

To force a particular input video standard:

The required video standard is set through the Input Video Standard sections of the Video Config page of the Config window. There are separate sections for Input 1 and Input 2. 1. Display the Video Config page of the Config window. 2. Open the appropriate Input Video Standard section (shown at the top of the Video Config

page) and clear the Automatic Detection option. 3. Use the separate Interface, Raster, Refresh rate and Sampling format options in that

order to specify the characteristics of the video standard you want to use. Then select the Set option offered below these individual settings (shown with a flashing outline once any of the above settings are changed to indicate that this Set option is required in order to implement the new selection).

To revert to automatic detection:

1. Display the Video Config page of the Config window. 2. Open the appropriate Input Video Standard section (shown at the top of the Video Config

page) and tick the Automatic Detection option.

C.4 Freezing the display

At any time, the current window display can be ‘frozen’ for further inspection as follows:


To freeze the display:

Press the FREEZE button Select Freeze from the Top-Level Windows toolbar.

The display remains in Freeze mode until such time as either the FREEZE button/the Freeze option is pressed/selected again.

This action causes a bitmap of the screen display at the moment Freeze was selected to be captured and displayed in the VIEW window. It is then possible both to switch between this bitmap and the live VIEW window display and to save a copy of this bitmap as a file on disc. Currently, this facility can only be used to capture VIEW window displays, but it may in future versions be extended to also capture Gen window and Config window displays. While in ‘Freeze’ mode, the VIEW display has a special ‘Freeze’ Button bar.


Figure C-10: Freeze Button bar.

Show Bitmap: Switches between displaying the captured bitmap (shown when this option is highlighted) and the live-input display. Save Bitmap: Displays a File Selector through which to save the bitmap of the frozen screen display to disc. (Further details of the File Selector are given in Section B.6).

OmniTek OTM 1000 User Guide, v3.1 D-1

D : View Screen Layout The quad-split screen used by default for the View window is simply one possible screen layout. Where a mouse is attached, other layouts may be set up to the user’s own specification. Moreover, when recorded as ‘Presets’ (see Section B.4), these layouts then become as easy to call up as the default quad-split. This section describes how to set up a new layout and how to save this layout for future use.

D.1 Overview

A new layout is created for the View window by modifying the layout you are currently using. Close

Close

Move left and stretch

Move left and stretch

Add new tile

Figure D-1: Example set of changes

To make the required changes, you need to put the View window into its ‘Edit mode’. In this mode, the View window continues to offer the same basic facilities as it does in its standard display mode (e.g. switching the View shown on any tile and setting tile properties) but the tile that is currently selected isn’t simply outlined with a coloured box. Instead it is shown with Microsoft Windows-style handles which allow the user to move the tile, re-size it or delete it. New tiles can also be added in Edit mode. In outline, the steps used to set up an alternative screen layout are as follows. A mouse is required for many of these actions. Indeed, it is not possible to enter Edit mode without a mouse.

1. Put the screen into Edit mode. 2. Close any tiles that are not required. Alternatively, add further tiles (there are two ways

of doing this: see below). 3. Set the size and position of all the various different tiles shown on the screen. 4. Leave Layout Edit mode. 5. Check that the different tiles of the display are set to show the Views that you require. 6. Record the layout as a View Preset (see Section B.4). If the new layout is not recorded as

a Preset, it will be lost the moment you either make any further changes to the layout or call up another View Preset.


Figure D-2: View Window in Edit mode

D.2 Selecting Edit Mode

Mouse & Keyboard

To enter Edit mode:

Check that the View window is set into multi-tile mode, then right-click with the mouse anywhere within the View window. Then left-click on the Edit mode option in the menu that is displayed.

Figure D-3: Right-click menu outside Edit mode

Right-clicking again will show a tick beside the Edit mode option to show that this mode has been selected

To leave Edit mode:

Right-click then left-click on the Edit mode option again, this time clearing the tick. When Edit mode is first selected, there may be no obvious change in the appearance of the screen. The selection of Edit mode becomes obvious when a tile is selected. The selected tile is then shown with Windows-style bars and handles ready to be resized, moved or closed as required. Note: When editing a layout, you should be aware that elements of the display may be present but not visible. For example, a closed caption overlay may be specified for the Picture display but not be visible because the video that is currently being analysed doesn’t include a text service.


D.3 Changing the Range of Views Displayed

Once in Edit mode, the range of Views that make up the display may be changed through a combination of:

Switching what is shown in the current tiles, and either

Closing tiles that you no longer require, or

Adding any extra tiles that are required.

Switching the Views Shown The View shown in any tile may be replaced by another in exactly the same way as this is done outside Edit mode (details given in Section C.2). In particular, the required View may be selected by right-clicking on the tile, and taking the Replace tile option from the menu that is displayed (as shown here).

Removing Unwanted Tiles

Mouse & Keyboard

To remove a tile that you don’t require:

1. Click on the tile to select it. 2. Click on the Close box (‘X’ box) in the top right-hand corner of the tile window surround.

Figure D-5: Location of Close box on selected tile

Close box

Figure D-4: Right-click menu showing Replace tile option


Adding Tiles Further tiles may be added to the layout either by using the Insert tile option included in the right-click menu when in Edit mode, or by dragging the required Views from the View Tile Browser.

Mouse & Keyboard

Using the Insert tile option:

1. Right-click to display the right-click menu. 2. Select the Insert tile option. 3. Select the required View from the list of categories and Views that is displayed.

Figure D-6: Right-click menu showing Insert tile option

The View you select is then added to the screen, occupying the quarter of the screen in which you right-clicked to call up the Insert tile option. The new tile can then be re-sized, positioned etc. alongside all the other window tiles (see below). Its display properties can also be set through the Properties control.

Adding a new tile by dragging:

1. Display the View Tile Browser (for example, by pressing and holding the Tile button for the category of tile that you want to add).

2. Select the required View in the View Tile Browser and drag it to one of the tiles already on the display. The OTM 1000 then creates a new tile over the tile you selected.

Figure D-7: Creating a new tile by dragging View from the View Tile Browser

to an existing tile. The new tile can then be re-sized, positioned etc. alongside all the other window tiles (see below). Its display properties can also be set through the Properties control.

Drag to tile


D.4 Changing Size, Position etc.

In Edit mode, selecting a tile automatically causes the tile to be re-drawn with the window handles associated with standard Microsoft windows. With these window handles displayed, the tile becomes just like any other Microsoft window shown less than full-screen size and it can be re-sized, re-positioned etc. in the same way i.e.

Mouse & Keyboard

To re-size the tile: Drag either the corners or the sides until the tile is the required size.

Figure D-8: Dragging the edge of a tile to re-size it.

To re-position the tile: Drag it to the new position by dragging its top bar.

Figure D-9: Dragging a tile’s top bar to re-position it.

Where tiles overlap, the sides and corners of one tile may be hidden by another. In order to adjust the size or position of the tile that is partially hidden, you need either to bring this tile to the front or to send the other tile to the back.

Drag to re-size

Drag to re-position


Individual tiles can be brought to the front or sent to the back as follows:

Mouse & Keyboard

To send to front/back:

1. Select the tile that you want to affect. 2. Right-click anywhere on the display. 3. Take the option to Send to back or

Bring to front as appropriate.

Snapping into position To aid the process of aligning the different tiles, the OTM automatically ‘snaps’ the edges of the tile you are re-sizing/re-positioning to the edge of the adjacent tile once the edge gets close to this. Edit mode also offers a grid to which tiles may be aligned. Enabling this grid typically makes it even easier to put the tiles into a neat, ‘tiled’ arrangement.

Figure D-11: Grid settings with the Properties control

The grid is enabled by ticking the Enable grid option within the Edit mode section of the View window’s Properties control. This section also includes a Count setting that sets the granularity of the grid to which the tiles are aligned by defining the number of sections into which the ‘working’ area of the screen is divided both horizontally and vertically. (This working area doesn’t include the area reserved for the Status Bar/Button Bar.) Larger values of the Count correspond to a finer grid.

D.5 Saving the New Layout

The layout you create using the above steps will be the one used until you either change it further or call up a View Preset. At that point, the layout may be lost: calling up a View Preset automatically changes to the View window layout to the one that was in place when the View Preset was recorded. To have the layout you have created available for future use, it needs to be recorded as a View Preset – as described in Section B.4.

Figure D-10: Right-click menu when

in Edit mode

OmniTek OTM 1000 User Guide, v3.1a E-1

E : Image Analysis The OTM 1000’s View window offers a wide choice of image analyses, described over the next few sections of this User Guide. Note: Users of the PQA option should however note that some displays – specifically, the Waveform display, the Vectorscope display and the CIE Chart – are not available when the OTM is operating in PQA Mode (as described in Section S). This section starts with a brief review of the steps needed to use these displays, then goes on to describe the Waveform View; the Vectorscope; the Gamut View and the Status displays – the four analyses that are provided as standard on the OTM 1000. Where these data analyses focus on displaying the results from a particular area of the image, the way in which this ‘Focus of Analysis’ is selected is described in Section E.2.

E.1 General Steps

The following steps are used in working with the Views described in this section:


1. Display the required View in one of the tiles of the current View window.

Move the focus to the chosen tile – or if the focus is already on this tile, clear any Button Bar that is shown by pressing OTHER or BACK – then press the appropriate Tile button The button to use is detailed under ‘Selection’ in the following descriptions. Note: Where more than one View is included in a particular category, you may need to press the Tile button more than once before the required View is displayed.

To do this: Either: Move the focus to the chosen tile then select the required View from the appropriate Category section of the View Tile Browser (as described in Section C.3). Or: Right-click on the required tile, select the Replace Tile option, then select the required View from the associated sub-menus. The View to select is detailed under ‘Selection’ in the following descriptions.

Note: Some types of display – specifically waveforms, the vectorscope, the CIE Chart and the Eye Diagram – make significant use of resources. However, this is only an issue if you attempt to display more than four of these at the same time or if you try to show more than one Eye Diagram.

2. Ensure that the relevant system parameters are set appropriately on the Video Config and Audio Config pages of the Config window (see Section T.2 and T.3). Details that may be important are listed under ‘Configuration Issues’ in the following descriptions.

3. Set the View’s ‘Properties’ to give you the display you require. The Properties control is described in Section C.3. The different properties of the display that can be set are detailed under ‘Display Properties’ in the following descriptions.

4. Determine the required information from the display that is shown. The descriptions of each View also include details of any particular measurements (or other determinations) that can be made from the View.

Note: If a tile isn’t big enough to show the entire display, the tile will be shown with scroll bars. With a mouse, these scroll bars can be simply dragged to show the part of the display you are interested in. The scroll bars can also be moved by pushing the corresponding HORIZ or VERT knob, then twisting to make the required adjustment. (Push the knob a second time to cancel this action.) You may also wish to limit the part of the image that is analysed, by defining the Region of Interest (see below).


E.2 Focus of Analysis

While many of the results displayed by the OTM 1000 come from analysing entire frames of video, the system can be set such that displays such as the Waveform View and the Vectorscope just show the results from a particular line or band of lines of each frame, or from a particular ‘Region of Interest’ or to show just the data that applies at or around a particular point within the frame (indicated by a ‘crosshair’ cursor on the Picture display).

Figure E-1: Waveform View showing YCbCr components around point in frame

marked by crosshair cursor on the Picture display. The Region of Interest and the position of the crosshair can both be seen on the Picture display and can be adjusted via that display. However, the choice of the area to work with and the position of the crosshair cursor typically need to be coordinated across more than one display, so the details are seen as properties of the video stream under test rather than of the Views through which the results are displayed. The relevant settings are therefore displayed – and can be adjusted – in the Inputs section of the View window’s Properties control.

Line Mode The Line Mode control works with Line Mode controls for the Waveform, Vectorscope and CIE Chart displays. When set to Single, it switches all the above displays to analysing the line under the crosshair cursor (see below): the individual displays can subsequently be set to display ‘MultiLine’ results. The other options here define how much of the frame is analysed when this MultiLine option is taken, either All the lines of the frame, just the Active lines or a Custom band of lines (defined by Y start and Y range).

Figure E-2: Inputs section of

the View window Properties control. Note: The Cage option is described in Section F.2.


Crosshair The Crosshair entry provides both controls for and information about the current focus within the video display (as indicated by the crosshair on the Picture display). The position of this crosshair determines such things as the line that is displayed when the waveform is set to ‘Single line’ and the pixel around which the DataView display is based. The X and Y controls allow you to position the crosshair anywhere within the frame, including the blanking areas, while the Field control switches directly between the two fields of an interlaced signal. The crosshair can also be re-positioned from the Picture display and from the Data View (where licensed) – as described in other sections of this guide. The crosshair position is normally measured in pixels from the top left-hand corner of the screen but when the VIEW_3D option is enabled (see Section I), it can optionally be expressed as a percentage of the screen width or in metres with the origin at the centre of the screen.

Region of Interest (ROI) When enabled, the Region of Interest defines the part of the image that is analysed in the Waveform, Vectorscope and Histogram displays. The Region of Interest settings define:

Whether analysis is required just of the marked area (Enable ROI ticked) or of the whole area (Enable ROI clear)

The position of the top left-hand corner of the Region of Interest (Y defines the top line; X defines the leftmost pixel on that line)

The Width and Height of the Region of Interest. The Region of Interest can also be sized and positioned directly on the Picture display, using the HORIZ and VERT knobs – as described in Section F.4. Note: Selecting a View Preset (see Section B.4) automatically clears any Region of Interest that was previously selected.

Figure E-3: Region of Interest as shown on the Picture display.


E.3 Waveform View (Not available in PQA Mode) The Waveform View offers high resolution displays of the video’s YCbCr / RGB components. Arbitrary combinations of colour components may be displayed simultaneously, optionally together with a composite waveform derived from the luma and chroma data within the original video stream (see below). Waveforms may optionally be overlaid with a graticule calibrated in ms along the (horizontal) timing axis and giving either digital values, percentage IRE or millivolts along the vertical voltage axis. The labels shown below are also optional. For RGB and YUV, two separate waveform calibrations are offered: SMPTE range (decimal 64 – 940/960) or Full Range 0 – 1023 (Full Range is always used when working with XYZ), Waveforms can be shown either for a single line (the line currently selected by the crosshair cursor) or for all the lines in the current frame/in the current Region of Interest where this is enabled (see above). If required, the waveform can be shown offset from either axis of the graticule or the whole pattern shifted up or down, left or right by applying the appropriate offset – see ‘Lock Waveform Graticule’ below. Waveforms may further be adjusted for gamma and other corrections that may have been applied to the video source. Gamma may be either applied or removed as required, while other linear, log or custom adjustments applied to RGB or XYZ waveforms can be handled through the application of the appropriate look-up table (LUT). The Reference White Level used in converting between RGB and XYZ may also be set to the required value. Notes: (i) Custom lookup tables should be in CSV (comma separated variable) format. LUTs are included for Sony SR and Thomson Viper cameras, which can be modified to create complete custom LUTs. The supplied LUTs are located in c: Program Files\OmniTek\DataLab\LUTs (ii) Where the VIEW_3D option is installed, the Waveform View can also be used to compare luma and chroma levels between left-eye and right-eye Stereo 3D video images or between a reference image and a test image (see Section I.8). The latter option is also available where the ALIGNMENT option is installed.

Figure E-4: Example waveform display.

Control is offered over several aspects of the waveform display, including: Which colour components are displayed, the colour(s) they are displayed in and how they

are arranged (in parade form; stacked or overlaid). The line/lines of the video that are analysed together (selected through a combination of

the position of the crosshair cursor, the line mode and the sweep mode). The horizontal magnification and vertical gain that are applied.

The OTM 1000 also offers the option of filtering/ interpolating the waveform.


To allow the waveform to be measured, pairs of horizontal (time) and vertical (amplitude) cursors can be displayed, together with a read-out of their positions and the spacing between the cursors. To make it easier to compare one waveform display against another and/or against particular requirements, you can also define one or more additional time and amplitude markers. These ‘Shared Waveform Markers’ work with all waveform displays to provide user-defined reference points for comparisons between different displays. In the main, the display options are set as part of the tile’s properties i.e. set within the Properties control and, in some cases, also controlled from the Button Bar (Control Panel: press GENERAL; Mouse/Keyboard: click on tile to display). The exceptions are the details of which line(s) are analysed which are set as properties of the selected input because they potentially apply across a number of displays. (See the section above on the ’Focus of Analysis’.) Internal signal processing is normally performed to 10-bit precision, but where the VIEW_XR_DCI option is installed, the precision is increased to 12-bit. This option also adds support for the XYZ colour space.

Selection The Waveform View is a member of the WFM category.


To display the Waveform View:

Press the WFM tile button. Select Waveform from the WFM section of the View Tile Browser.

(For more detailed instructions, see Section E.1.)

Note: No more than four waveforms, vectorscopes or CIE Charts can be displayed at the same time.

Configuration Issues The following Configuration settings affect how the waveform is displayed. Note: Further settings are required where 3D images are analysed: these are described in Section I.8.

Input Settings Certain aspects of how the input is interpreted are configurable as follows. The required settings are all made on the Video Config page of the Config window (described in Section T.2).

1. Two waveform calibrations are offered for RGB and YUV: SMPTE (64 – 940/960) or Full Range (0 – 1023). (Full Range is always used for XYZ.) The required Range is selected within the RGB Input section of the Video Config page.

2. The RGB Input and XYZ Input sections also include a LUT setting that controls the application of either a standard or a custom look-up table to the input data.

3. These sections also include a Remove Gamma setting for handling gamma-encoded input data.

4. The XYZ Input section also includes a Reference White Level setting for use in converting between RGB and XYZ. The standard value for the white level is 48cd/m2

Range Errors Parts of the waveforms that fall outside the pre-set legal range are displayed in a different colour. The values at which any colour component switches between being ‘legal’ and being ‘illegal’ is part of the system configuration. The OTM 1000 is delivered with these levels set in accordance with standard practice within the industry. The current settings can be viewed and adjusted as required on the Video Config page.


Lock Waveform Graticule A lock is associated with the graticule that overlays the waveform. Where this lock is set, applying horizontal and vertical offsets (as described under ‘Display Properties’ below) moves the waveform but does not move the graticule. When the lock is not set, the whole pattern (waveform + graticule) can be shifted left or right, up or down the screen by applying horizontal and vertical offsets. Whether the graticule is locked is set on the System page of the Config window.

Amplitude Measurement Units The units in which the signal amplitude axis is measured is set by the Amplitude Measurement Units setting on the System page of the Config window.

Composite Matrix Different matrices may be applied in producing the composite waveform display. The OTM can either be set to select the appropriate matrix automatically, based on the input video standard or it can be set to select a particular composite matrix. The selection is made through the Composite Matrix Type option offered on the Video Config page of the Config window.

Display Properties Other aspects of the Waveform View are determined by the tile’s properties, a complete read-out of which is given in the Properties control (Control Panel: press PROPS to display). Shortcuts to several settings are provided through the Button Bar (Control Panel: press GENERAL or OTHER; Mouse/Keyboard: click on tile to display).

Scaling and Offset H Mag and V Gain define the horizontal and vertical scaling applied to the waveform. The options in the Properties control are associated with a range of values (H Mag: x1, x2, x5, x10; ROI, V Gain: x1, x2, x5, x10). Selecting the H Mag/V Gain option offered in the Button Bar switches between 1x and the last of the other scalings to have been selected. H Offset and V Offset define the offset of the waveform displayed from the time and voltage axes. These offsets may also be adjusted by turning the HORIZ and VERT knobs (respectively), while pushing either knob returns the corresponding control to its default position. Note: The HORIZ and VERT knobs cannot be used to adjust these offsets when cursors are displayed (see below) because then the role of these knobs is to move the cursors. Note also that if the waveform graticule is unlocked (see Configuration Issues above), adjusting the offset simply shifts the whole pattern up or down, left or right.

Figure E-5: Waveform

Properties.


Mode of Operation The Colour Mode control selects between YRGB, YCbCr, Bowtie, Composite etc. waveforms, while the following tick selections control the components that are actually displayed. The Button Bar option cycles through the available settings. The Line Mode control selects between displaying the waveform of a single line (picked out by the crosshair cursor) or multiple lines. The Button Bar option switches between these two settings. When Labels are shown (see Show Labels below), the Line Mode that is currently selected is shown in the top right-hand corner of the display as either Line (single line) or Multi (multiline). Where Single line is selected, the line being analysed is shown in the bottom left-hand corner of the display. (For details of the lines selected, see Section E.2 ‘Focus of Analysis’.) The Sweep control selects between displaying traces from a single sweep and traces separated by one line, one field or one frame. The Button Bar option cycles through the available settings. The Filter control selects how the incoming data is sampled. The choice offered is between a Flat filter, a Low Pass filter or No Interpolation. The Button Bar option cycles round these three options. When Labels are shown (see Show Labels below), the type of filtering that is being applied is shown in the bottom right-hand corner of the display. Interpolation is usually enabled but users should be aware that it can occasionally produce out of range results. Where these occur, you may prefer to turn the interpolator off. The TRS Passthrough tick selection enables the inclusion of the TRS in the display.

Cursors The OTM offers cursor-pairs through which time differences and amplitude differences may be determined, together with optional user-defined time and amplitude cursors (see ‘Shared Waveform Markers’ below). The Time, Amplitude and Shared markers options provide individual control over the display of the different sets of cursors while Show Cursors provides overall control over the display of the cursors over the waveform display. Show Cursors is also turned On and Off by the Cursors option on the Button Bar. The individual cursors of the Time and Amplitude cursor pairs may be moved using the HORIZ and VERT knobs. The cursor moved is the one currently shown in yellow. Pushing the knob switches over control to the other cursor. The Shared markers may be positioned either by setting values in the Shared Waveform Marker section of the View window Properties control or by Ctrl-clicking and dragging with a mouse. The X1, X2, Y1 and Y2 selections in this part of the Properties display control the two pairs of cursors, one pair providing difference measurements in the horizontal (time) direction and the other pair providing measurement in the vertical (amplitude) direction.

Display Mode The Display Mode control allows a choice between Overlay; Parade; and Stacked presentation of the component waveforms. The Button Bar option cycles through these arrangements.

Dither Mode This option offers a choice of Dither mode between 8bit, 10bit and 12bit (where supported).

Visualisation The Gain control sets the intensity of the displayed waveform (as a percentage of the received signal level). The Persistence setting sets the rate at which the displayed data decays. Larger values have the result of smoothing out time variations.


The Gamma setting applies gamma encoding to the waveform. A setting of 100 corresponds to a gamma value of 1. The CRT Emulation option applies a special filter to the waveform data to emulate the look that is typical of analog CRT-based waveform monitors. The Show Graticule option controls the display of the underlying grid. The Show Labels option controls the display of labels and other additional information.

Colour The Colour setting selects the colour used for the waveform trace, out of Cyan, Green, White, ‘Temperature Ramp’ or ‘Match Component’ (which makes each trace the appropriate colour for the component represented).

(For information about the 3D View option, see Section I.8.)

Button Bar


Composite Waveforms One of the Colour Mode options offered by the OTM is ‘Composite’. The composite waveform takes the form of a band of varying width around a central line that follows the Y (luma) component of video data. The width of the band at any point of the waveform is determined by the chroma components of the waveform, the magnitude and phase of which determine an overall magnitude (M) for the colour component of the signal. The outer limits of the composite waveform are given by Y + M and Y – M. The area between the Y + M and Y – M curves is filled in with solid colour as there is no useful information to be obtained from this area.

Figure E-6: Composite Waveform display

Different Composite matrices need to be applied depending on the input video standard. As part of the Video Configuration (see Section T.2), the OTM can either be set to select this matrix automatically or to select a particular matrix. The matrix that is currently being applied is shown in the heading to the composite waveform display. Y, U and V waveforms can optionally be displayed alongside the composite waveform in the same tile. To see R, G and B alongside a composite waveform, set up a second ‘Waveform’ tile to show RGB.


Waveform Measurement To enable the waveforms to be measured, pairs of voltage and time cursors can optionally be overlaid on the Waveform display, so the first step is to display these cursors. These cursors may be moved using the HORIZ and VERT knobs or by dragging with a mouse. The cursor that is moved by the knobs is the one currently shown in yellow. Pushing the knob switches control over to the other cursor. A read-out showing the current positions of the cursors and their separation is displayed in the top right-hand corner of the screen.


To display the cursors: To select which cursors are displayed, tick the required cursors in the Properties control.

Toggle between displaying and hiding these cursors either by ticking and clearing the Show Cursors option in the Properties control or by selecting the Cursors option from the Button Bar (highlighted when the cursors are displayed).

Shared Waveform Markers To aid comparisons across multiple waveforms, the OTM allows you to define one or more additional ‘Shared Waveform Markers’ that occupy the same custom positions across all waveform displays. The Waveform Markers are set up either through the Shared Waveform Marker section of the View window Properties Control or, where a mouse and keyboard are fitted, through the Right-click menu. Additional Time markers and Amplitude markers can be set up, positioned and removed both using this section of the Properties Control and from the Right-click menu. The display of the markers on any particular Waveform tile is controlled separately through the Cursors section of the Waveform Properties. Here their display is controlled both through a Shared markers option that needs to be ticked, and the same overall Show Cursors option used to toggle the display of the pairs of measurement cursors.

Figure E-7: (i) Shared Waveform Markers Definition; (ii) Selection within Waveform

Properties; (iii) Right-click menu within Waveform View.



To set up a Waveform Marker:

1. Display the View window Properties Control e.g. by pressing the PROPS button.

2. Open the Shared Waveform Marker section.

3. Use the Add options to add further Time markers and/or Amplitude markers as required. Entries for each marker are added to the Properties display.

4. To set a colour for the marker, select the white block shown for the marker in the Properties control, press GENERAL then choose a colour from the selection displayed.

1. Right-click within the waveform display where you would like to add the measurement marker.

2. Select the type of marker you want from the menu that is displayed.

3. To set a colour for the marker, click on the white block shown for the marker in the Properties control, then choose a colour from the selection displayed.

To display the markers on a Waveform tile:

1. Tick Shared markers in the Cursors section of the Waveform Tile Properties. 2. Toggle between displaying and hiding these cursors (and the other cursors) either by ticking

and clearing the Show Cursors option in the Properties control or by selecting the Cursors option from the Button Bar (highlighted when the cursors are displayed).

To position the markers:

Place each marker in the required positions by using the corresponding thumbwheel setting within the Shared Waveform Marker section of the Properties control.

Either: Place each marker in the required positions by using the thumbwheel settings that are added to the Properties control Or: Ctrl-click on each marker on the Waveform display and drag it to the required position Or: Right-click on the marker and select Edit marker from the menu that appears (added when the cursor is on a marker).

To remove a marker:

1. Display the View window Properties Control e.g. by pressing the PROPS button.

2. Open the Shared Waveform Marker section.

3. Select the Delete option associated with either Time markers or Amplitude markers as required.

Note: The marker that is deleted will be the last of that type to have been added, so after deleting a marker, check the positions of the remaining markers.

1. Right-click on the marker you want to delete.

2. Select Delete marker from the menu that appears (added when the cursor ison a marker).


E.4 Vectorscope (Not available in PQA Mode) The Vectorscope displays a vector representation of the incoming waveform.

Figure E-8: Example Vectorscope display.

The Vectorscope can be displayed either from SDI data or from the equivalent Composite signal and may be shown on either 75% or 100% graticules. If required, a ‘Luma mask’ can be applied that limits the display to luma values between defined minimum and maximum values. The graticules are automatically adjusted for the appropriate 601, 709 or composite colour matrix. The vectorscope can also be displayed at a range of different magnifications – including your own choice (up to 20x), selected by turning the HORIZ knob on the Control Panel. (Pressing HORIZ returns the scaling to 1x.) The graticule can either scale with the vectorscope display or keep its 1x size by ticking the Fixed Graticule option in the Properties control. Where the VIEW_3D option is installed, the Vectorscope can also be used to compare luma and chroma levels between left-eye and right-eye Stereo 3D video images or between a reference image and a test image (see Section I.8). The latter option is also available where the ALIGNMENT option is installed. The display is constructed from an analysis of the active video, however when the Enable ROI option is ticked for the selected input in the Properties control, the analysis is limited to the current Region of Interest (see Section E.2).

Selection The Vectorscope is a member of the VECTOR category.


To display the Vectorscope:

Press the VECTOR tile button Select Vectorscope from the VECTOR section of the View Tile Browser.


Note: No more than four waveforms, vectorscopes or CIE Charts can be displayed at the same time.


Configuration Issues The following Configuration settings affect how the Vectorscope is displayed. Note: Further settings are required where 3D images are analysed: these are described in Section I.8.

Error Mask The OTM 1000 allows you to specify a number of lines from the top and bottom of the display and a number of pixels from the left and right edge that can be omitted from the checking process. This is referred to as an Error Mask and it is defined on the Video Config page of the Config window. Its purpose is to avoid producing misleading results as a result of including video data that has been corrupted by the sync.

Composite Matrix Different matrices may be applied in producing the composite version of the Vectorscope display. The OTM can either be set to select the appropriate matrix automatically, based on the input video standard or it can be set to select a particular composite matrix. The selection is made through the Composite Matrix Type option offered on the Video Config page of the Config window.

Display Properties Other aspects of the Vectorscope are determined by the tile’s properties, a complete read-out of which is given in the Properties control (Control Panel: press PROPS to display). Shortcuts to the most-commonly required settings are provided through the Button Bar (Control Panel: press GENERAL or OTHER; Mouse/Keyboard: click on tile to display).

Mode of Operation The Filter control selects how the incoming data is sampled. The choice offered is between a Flat filter, a Low Pass filter or No Interpolation. The Button Bar option cycles round these three options. When Labels are shown (see Show Labels below), the type of filtering that is being applied is shown in the bottom right-hand corner of the display. The Button Bar option switches between Interpolation On (button highlighted) and Interpolation Off. Interpolation is usually enabled but users should be aware that it can occasionally produce out of range results. Where these occur, you may prefer to turn the interpolator off. The TRS Passthrough tick selection enables the inclusion of the TRS in the display. The Bar Targets option lets you select between comparing the trace against a 100% graticule and comparing it against a 75% graticule. The Button Bar option switches between the two graticules.

Figure E-9: Vectorscope Properties.


The Line Mode control selects between displaying the waveform of a single line (picked out by the crosshair cursor) or multiple lines. The Button Bar option switches between these two settings. (For details of the lines selected, see Section E.2 ‘Focus of Analysis’.) Where Single line is selected, the line being analysed is shown in the bottom left-hand corner of the display. The Mag option in the Properties control offers the choice of 1x, 2x, 5x or whatever customised (xx.xx) zoom was last selected, while the Mag option on the Button Bar switches between 1x and the last of the other scalings to have been selected. (Customised zooms are selected by using the HORIZ knob on the Control Panel. Note: Pressing HORIZ returns the scaling to 1x.) The Colour Mode control selects between displays based on the SDI input or on the Composite version (see Waveform View above). The Button Bar option switches between these options. Note: The OTM automatically switches the graticule to match the selected Colour Mode. The Dither Mode option offers a choice of Dither mode between 8bit, 10bit and 12bit (where supported).

Luma Mask When Luma Mask is selected, the display becomes limited to those pixels whose luma value lies between the associated Minimum and Maximum settings. The Button Bar option switches between the two displays.

Visualisation The Gain control sets the intensity of the displayed waveform (as a percentage of the received signal level). The Persistence setting sets the rate at which the displayed data decays. Larger values have the result of smoothing out time variations. The Gamma setting applies gamma encoding to the waveform. A setting of 100 corresponds to a gamma value of 1. The Colour setting selects the colour used for the waveform trace, out of Cyan, Green, White or ‘Temperature Ramp’. The CRT Emulation option applies a special filter to the waveform data to emulate the look that is typical of analog CRT-based waveform monitors. The Show Graticule option controls the display of the underlying grid and associated information. The graticule normally scales with the Mag setting. Ticking the Fixed Graticule option keeps the graticule for x1 for all magnifications. The Show Labels option controls the display of labels and other additional information.

(For information about the 3D View option, see Section I.9.)

Button Bar



E.5 Gamut View

The Gamut View chiefly comprises a set of bar graphs showing the range of values for the different possible colour components (YCbCr, RGB, Composite and XYZ where supported) in the video currently being analysed.

Figure E-10: Example Gamut View display.

The individual graphs show the ranges encompassed by the current frame. Where the values go outside the configured legal values, the values in excess are shown in red. Displayed at the bottom of the Gamut display are details of the percentage of pixels in the current frame for which the value goes outside the specified ranges, together with details of the peak value of this percentage over the session since the last time the display was reset (e.g. using the Reset button on the Button Bar).Note: These values are also reset when the overall status is reset (see Section E.6).

Selection The Gamut View is a member of the GAMUT category. To select it:


To display the Gamut View:

Press the GAMUT tile button until the Gamut View appears.

Select GAMUT from the GAMUT section of the View Tile Browser.


Button Bar



Configuration Issues The following Configuration settings affect how the Gamut View is displayed:

Error Ranges The legal range of any colour is part of the system configuration. Separate settings are made for each component of the RGB, YCbCr and XYZ colour spaces (where supported). The OTM 1000 is delivered with these levels set in accordance with standard practice within the industry. The current settings can be viewed and adjusted as required on the Video Config page of the Config window.

Error Mask The OTM 1000 allows you to specify a number of lines from top and bottom of the display and a number of pixels from the left and right edge that can be omitted from the checking process. This is referred to as an Error Mask and it is defined on the Video Config page of the Config window. Its purpose is to avoid producing misleading results as a result of including video data that has been corrupted by the sync.

Composite Matrix Different matrices may be applied in producing the composite version of the Gamut display. The OTM can either be set to select the appropriate matrix automatically, based on the input video standard or it can be set to select a particular composite matrix. The selection is made through the Composite Matrix Type option offered on the Video Config page of the Config window.

Amplitude Measurement Units The units in which the signal amplitude axis is measured is set by the Amplitude Measurement Units setting on the System page of the Config window.

Display Properties

Other aspects of the Gamut View are set through the Properties control (Control Panel: press PROPS to display), where tick boxes control the colour components for which bar graphs are displayed.

Properties Control

Figure E-11: Gamut View Properties.


E.6 Status

The OTM also provides real-time status information about the video signal under test and, in particular, about errors displayed in that stream. This information is displayed in two forms – as a hierarchical tree giving an overall listing of the current status (the ‘Status Overview’) and as a set of ‘Status Summaries’ covering different aspects of the system e.g. the video content, the audio levels etc. Both forms of the display are provided within the same Status display, called up either by pressing the STATUS button or by selecting Status from the STATUS section of the View Tile Browser. The different displays are then shown by selecting different options from the associated Button Bar (displayed e.g. by pressing the OTHER button or clicking on the Status View with a mouse).

Button Bar


The Status Overview

Figure E-12: Status Overview

The information shown by the Status Overview depends on the item being reported but in most cases reports the current value of the parameter (which may or may not be in error), a cumulative total of errors since the display was last reset and the average number of errors per frame. Detailed information about the data displayed is given in Section E.7. The information shown is displayed in a collapsible hierarchy similar to that used in the Properties control. As in the Properties control, a [+] next to any ‘heading’ indicates a section, the details of which are currently hidden, whereas a [-] next to a heading indicates that the associated part of the hierarchy is already displayed.


However, unlike the Properties control, this hierarchical structure is navigated using the VERT knob, rather than the GENERAL knob – while the HORIZ knob can be used to scroll the display from left to right when a scroll bar is shown at the bottom of the display. It is also the HORIZ and VERT knobs that are pushed on the [+] and [-] markers to open and close sections of the hierarchy. (Pushing the GENERAL knob displays the Button Bar.) Through opening some sections of the hierarchy and closing up others, you can readily tailor the display to show just the information you are interested in. As shown in the example display, the ‘values’ associated with particular status items are shown in colour make it immediately clear where the value currently being reported is incorrect in some way because it is shown in red. In addition, the section headings (together with the main ‘Video’ heading) may be marked with a cross in a red circle to indicate where either an error or a critical error has been detected among the items of that section. This provides a simple and effective way of, firstly, alerting the user to the fact that an error has occurred and, secondly, guiding the user to the relevant part of the status display. Note: Where the Status display includes line and field details, selecting the symbol next to this information automatically adjusts the position of the crosshair cursor and hence the focus of displays such as the Data View to the specified position within the image to allow closer investigation. You should also note that the aspects of the video that are checked depend both on the video format and on which software options are installed.

Status Summary The Status Summary displays comprise a set of pages, each showing status information about a different area of the video being analysed. These displays are grouped into a number of categories, each associated with a separate button on the Button Bar.

Figure E-13: Sample Status Summary display.


The displays are called up by selecting the appropriate button on the Button Bar. A single press selects the most-recently selected display within the selected category; subsequent selections cycle through the other displays of that category. Alternatively, pressing and holding the button calls up a menu of the displays within that category, from which to select the one you want. The information shown depends on the item being reported but in most cases reports the current value of the parameter (which may or may not be in error), a cumulative total of errors since the display was last reset and the average number of errors per frame. Detailed information about the data displayed is given in Section E.7. As in the Status Overview, the ‘values’ associated with particular status items are colour-coded make it immediately clear where the value currently being reported is incorrect in some way because it is shown in red. Note: The aspects of the video that are checked depend both on the video format and on which software options are installed. In particular, the PHY display is omitted if the EYE option is not installed or if there isn’t any physical data included in the input.

Selection The Status View is a member of the STATUS category.


To display the Status View:

1. Press the STATUS tile button until the Status View appears.

2. Press OTHER to display the Button Bar and use to select the required status information.

1. Select Status from the STATUS section of the View Tile Browser.

2. Click on the tile to display the Button Bar and use to select the required status information.


Configuration Issues The following Configuration settings affect the data displayed on the Status View:

Error Ranges, Persistence and Severity The level at which any aspect of the video becomes in error, the length of time that this condition has to persist for an error to be reported and the severity of that error (Error/Warning/OK) is part of the system configuration. The OTM is delivered with these levels set in accordance with standard practice within the industry. The current settings can be viewed and adjusted as required on the Video Config and Audio Config pages of the Config window. Further details are given where these pages of the Config window are described (Section T).

Error Mask The OTM 1000 allows you to specify a number of lines from top and bottom of the display and a number of pixels from the left and right edge that can be omitted from the checking process. This is referred to as an Error Mask and it is defined on the Video Config page of the Config window. Its purpose is to avoid producing misleading results as a result of including video data that has been corrupted by the sync.


Display Properties The widths of the different columns of the display may be adjusted either by dragging with a mouse (where fitted) or through the Properties control (Control Panel: press PROPS to display).

Column Widths The information on the Overview page is displayed in four columns. The first column is used to display the names of the parameters that are being monitored (in the appropriate hierarchy). The other three are used to display status/current value/average value/error count etc. as appropriate. The four thumbwheels in the Properties control allow the widths of the four columns to be individually adjusted (either scroll the value up/down or type a new value using the numeric keypad). The column widths can also be adjusted by dragging with a mouse. Select Reset: Go to reset the column widths to their default values.

Resetting the display The second number given for some of parameters displayed in the Status View represent the number of errors that have been detected since the error counter was last reset.


To reset all of the error counts to zero:

Select the Reset option from the Button Bar

Notes: (i) This action resets the error counts both for the video channel and for any audio channels listed alongside. It also resets counters, averages and peak values reported in other displays, for example the peak percentage values shown in the Gamut view (see Section E.5). (ii) Error counts are automatically reset following loss of signal. A Postpone video loss protection option is included on the System page of the Config window which, when ticked, protects against error counts being lost as a result of very short-term outages.

Button Bar


Figure E-14: Status View

Properties.


E.7 Video Information Displayed

This section provides background information on the video parameters that appear in the various status displays. While the majority of these parameters are included in at least one of the Status Summary displays, the full range can be seen in the Status Overview. The category of the Status Summary on which any parameter is shown in brackets. Note: The levels at which an error is deemed to have occurred and the length of time the error condition has to persist before an error is reported are set on the Video Config page of the Config window. Note also that entries in the Status Overview that are marked with an arrow provide a shortcut that moves the crosshair cursor and related displays (see Section E.2) to the feature that is being referred to in the status.

Format (Video and AUX) The Format entry gives the video standard to which the incoming video is locked, together (where applicable) with the Composite Matrix type that is applied. Format (Auto) indicates that the video standard has been automatically determined by the OTM e.g. from SMPTE 352 packets within the video stream. Format (Manual) indicates that the video standard being used has been selected as part of the Video Configuration (see Section T.2). The SMPTE 352 (Luma) and SMPTE 352 (Chroma) entries interpret SMPTE 352 data (where detected). Where an analog reference signal is being fed into the OTM via the Reference Loop (see Section A.2), the Analog Reference entry shows the video standard of this reference.

Picture Content (Video) The Motion entry reports whether the image has been determined to be Active or Frozen, together with the number of frames for which the motion has been frozen since the last reset. The Luminance entry reports whether the image has been determined to be Active or Black, together with the number of frames for which the picture has been entirely black since the last reset. The Chrominance entry reports whether the image has been determined to be Active or Monochrome, together with the number of frames for which the picture has been monochrome since the last reset. The Average Picture Level gives the average signal level with respect to blanking over the active part of the frame. The Stuck Bits entries give indicate those bits of the Y, U and V values that are consistently either High (H) or Low (L) over the whole of the active frame. These entries can be useful in identifying issues with how the video is being transmitted. For example, if 10 bits are indicated but the last two are shown to be L, it suggests that you are actually working with 8-bit data.

Blanking Width This section gives the Width of the horizontal blanking in both pixels and μs, together with details of any Left/Right displacement (up to a maximum of 255pixels).


Picture Size This section gives the Height and the Width of the active area in lines, together with details of the displacement of this area Top+Bottom / Left+Right from the edges of the standard filed/frame area e.g. as a result of using a letterbox format to provide a widescreen image.

Gamut Errors (Video) The Gamut Range section of the Status display is divided into YCbCr, RGB and Composite data. In the Status Overview, it is further divided into two parts, the first providing details about the current frame and the second providing Session data (i.e. min, max etc. data recorded since the display was last reset). The YCbCr Range section gives the number of pixels for which the YCbCr data is in error as a percentage of the current frame, the total number of frames for which the error level recorded in the Video Config was exceeded since the last reset and a count of these error frames per second (EFPS). It also shows the maximum and minimum Y, Cb and Cr values experienced. (The minimum and maximum thresholds are set on the Video Config page of the Config window.) The RGB Range section gives the number of pixels for which the YCbCr data would be invalid if converted to RGB space as a percentage of the current frame, the total number of frames for which the error level recorded in the Video Config was exceeded since the last reset and a count of these error frames per second (EFPS). It also shows the maximum and minimum RGB values experienced. (The minimum and maximum thresholds are set on the Video Config page of the Config window.). The Composite Range section similarly gives the number of pixels for which the composite value determined from the YCbCr data would be invalid as a percentage of the current frame, the total number of frames for which the error level recorded in the Video Config was exceeded since the last reset and a count of these error frames per second (EFPS). It also shows the maximum and minimum values experienced. (The minimum and maximum thresholds are set on the Video Config page of the Config window.)

Physical Errors (Video) The entries in this section show parameters in error and give error counts for a range of standard features of the video data stream. For instance, the ANC entry counts invalid ANC checksums. The Frames in Error entry records the number of frames where any of the listed physical errors have occurred. The Line entry counts TRS packets where the line number specified does not agree with the line number calculated internally. Note: This entry is only applicable to HD and 3G video: Line numbers are not included in TRS packets in SD. To check CRC/EDH values, the OTM calculates a new CRC value (EDH in SD) from the incoming data, and compares this value with the CRC (EDH) value embedded in the data. If there is a difference, this is flagged as an error. The CRC/EDH values that have been calculated for the active area and for each full field/frame are also displayed.


3D/Rig Alignment (where included) Information is given here on:

Measurements of the percentage of pixels for which the disparity between the left-eye and right-eye images is less than / more negative than the specified minimum disparity, the corresponding percentage where the disparity is more than the specified maximum.

The difference in Sharpness between the left-eye and right-eye images.

Rig Alignment.

Channel Assignment i.e. the inputs from which the OTM is taking the Left and Right images

The Constants used in determining depths: Viewer Distance; Interocular Distance; and Screen Width

The Disparity Settings that determine both the range of disparities over which the OTM is searching for matches between the Right and Left images and the range of disparities that correspond to the desired Depth Budget, expressed in pixels, percentage screen width and metres on the screen.

The constants and minimum and maximum distances used in the calculations are recorded on the System page of the Config window; the levels at which an error is triggered are set on the Video Config page. For further information, see Sections I and T.

Quality Analysis (where included) The entries in this section report:

The current value of the various Picture Quality measurements (PQA option: detailed in Section S)

The audio and video delays determined by the ‘In-Service’ A/V Delay measurement facility (AV_ISD option; detailed in Section N)

Eye/Jitter Data – where supported (PHY) The entries in this section report:

The amount of Jitter (expressed in UI) for different filter settings.

The estimated cable length (based on the cable type selected on the System page of the Config window (see Section T.4)

The Eye amplitude (expressed in mV)

The Eye rise/fall times (expressed in ps)

The Eye Rise/Fall ‘Delta’ i.e. the difference between measured rise and fall times (expressed in ps)

The Eye Rise/Fall Overshoot (expressed as a percentage of the Eye amplitude).

Whether the Jitter measurement has successfully locked Note: The various Eye measurements (amplitude, rise/fall times etc.) are made using the Auto Measure feature and so are only valid when one of the tiles is showing an Eye display for the selected input and Auto Measure is enabled. Note also that Auto Measure can fail if the Eye diagram is ‘dirty’: the Eye status will then be cleared while the overlay in the window will show “---” for the rise and fall times.


Timecode Data (AUX) The OTM checks the data stream for timecode data. Where a timecode is present, it is displayed alongside the corresponding timecode type, together with details of the location at which the data was found. The OTM also monitors each timecode to ensure that it increments correctly from frame to frame, and a count is made of this discontinuity each time a timecode value is either duplicated in adjacent frames, or is discontinuous from frame to frame. Note: ATC is a timecode packet which can be loaded with either a LTC, VITC #1, or VITC #2 timecode. Note also that the timecodes are completely independent so you may see different values where one part of the display uses VITC #1 codes while another uses VITC #2.

Captions (AUX) This section reports on the presence of CEA-608, CEA-708 and Line 21 closed captions and/or PAL or OP-47 teletext in the data stream. Where any of these message types is present, details are given of the location at which the message has been found. For CEA-708 captions, the OTM also reports on the validity of the caption distribution packet and gives the service names of up to 6 services. For OP-47, it also reports on the validity of the subtitle distribution packet and the VBI packets it includes.

Wide Screen Signalling (AUX) The entries in this section report data determined from any ETS 300 294 or ARD Spec WSS codes detected in the video input.

Video Index (AUX) The entries in this section report data determined from ARD Spec or RP186 Video Index codes detected in the video input.

Active Format Description (AUX) Here the OTM 1000 reports the presence and validity of any AFD 2016 Active Format Description that is detected in the video input. Where such a description is detected, the line numbers and pixel numbers specified for the start and finish of the active frame area are displayed on the screen.

Audio Information (Audio & Audio (Ctrl)) For information about the audio data presented in the Status displays, see Section K.7.


OmniTek OTM 1000 User Guide, v3.1 F-1

F : Picture Display F.1 Basic Picture Display

The main role of the Picture display is to offer a high-resolution real-time representation of the video currently being analyzed. Various alternative picture displays may be shown where the OTM is being used to analyze Stereo 3D video (see Section I) ), to align cameras (also see Section I) or to assess Picture Quality (see Section S).

Figure F-1: Example Picture Display.

The video can either be shown full raster, limited to just the active picture or shown in a “pulse-cross” configuration that allows the contents of the H & V blanking areas to be viewed. Other facilities include “burn-in” windows for overlays such as timecodes, a crosshair marking the current point of interest for analysis (and an exploded view of the image at that point), selection of a ‘Region of Interest’ and the option to set pixels that are out of gamut to flash. Where the Allow 3D Monitoring option is ticked, the Picture display also includes some ‘3D’ options: for further information, see Section I. The aspect ratio used for the display can either be set manually or determined directly from the image (assuming square pixels) or taken from Video Index, Wide Screen Signalling or Active Format Description data embedded in the video. The video images can be shown either on the standard analyzer display or on a separate monitor. The technology used is capable of supporting a 1:1-size full-motion display of input images at up to 1080p60 resolution including all the blanking and ANC data areas. Note: (i) To see a larger version of the picture than is possible on the OTM’s integral screen, attach a suitable monitor to the OTM’s Video Out port as described in Section A.2. (ii) If you find pictures are being slow to load, it is worth checking if 3D Monitoring is enabled on the System page of the Config window and disabling this if it is not being used.

Selection The Picture display is a member of the PICTURE category.


To show the Picture display:

Press the PICT tile button Select Picture from the PICTURE section of the View Tile Browser.



Configuration Issues The following Configuration settings affect the Picture display:

Pixel Flashing Alongside the settings specifying the acceptable RGB range on the Video Config page of the Config window is the option to ‘Show on UI Picture’. A similar option appears in the section of this page that deals with the acceptable YCbCr range. Both options are tick box selections. Where Show on UI Picture is ticked, any pixels with colour components that lie outside the required range are automatically keyed out and replaced by a flashing black and white signal on the Picture display.

Aspect Ratio Also on the Video Config page of the Config window is a group of options concerned with the Picture Aspect Ratio. The Type option selects the source for the aspect ratio used in displaying the Picture view, from a choice of ‘None’, ‘Manual’ and various WSS, Video Index and Active Format Descriptor formats. The ‘None’ option causes the aspect ratio to be set by the number of lines and the number of pixels per line in the Active frame, while the WSS, Video Index and AFD options tell the OTM 1000 to take the aspect ratio from the associated embedded data. Alternatively, a specific aspect ratio can be set by selecting the Manual option and then setting the required X and Y components of this aspect ratio as the Manual X Aspect Ratio and Manual Y Aspect Ratio values. Note: Additional settings are required where Stereo 3D video is being processed. For information, see Section I.

Display Properties Other aspects of the Picture display are determined by the tile’s properties, a complete read-out of which is given in the Properties control (displayed by pressing the PROPS button). Shortcuts to the most-commonly required settings are provided through the Button Bar. (Control Panel: press GENERAL or OTHER; Mouse/Keyboard: click on the tile to display.). Note: The Properties control and the Button Bar shown in PQA Mode are slightly different. For details, see Section S.3.

Button Bar


Figure F-2: Picture Properties.


Size The Size option offers a choice of having the picture size automatically Stretched (scaled) to fit the tile or being displayed at 1:1 size (half width, half height), regardless of the size of the tile in which it is displayed (Unity). The Button Bar Size option switches between these two settings.

Mode The Mode option offers a choice of picture display mode:

Active Picture: Shows the active image area. Pulse Cross: The Pulse Cross mode delays the video by half a frame both horizontally and vertically, to emulate the HV delay mode of CRTs. This can give a clearer view of the data adjacent to blanking. Full Raster: Shows both the active image area and the blanking area. The display also covers both fields of interlaced video.

Where the Allow 3D Monitoring option is ticked, the range of modes also includes a 3D mode. For information on this, see Section I.3. The Button Bar Mode option cycles through these display modes.

Picture Source (where included) This section is included when the OTM is operating in PQA Mode and allows you to select from the various picture display options offered in that mode. For further information, see Section S.3.

Timecode The Timecode options in the Properties control enable the display of timecode data embedded in the video and define the text style and the position for their display. The Timecode button on the Button Bar switches this display on and off. The display of timecodes is described further in Section F.2.

Closed Captions The Closed Captions options in the Properties control enable the display of captions embedded in the video. The Captions button on the Button Bar switches this display on and off. The display of captions is described further in Section F.2.

Enable ROI/Modify ROI These options enable the definition of a Region of Interest on the Picture View as described in Section F.4. When enabled, Waveform, Vectorscope and Histogram analysis is only applied to the selected Region of Interest.

Zoom The Zoom View option adds a sub-window containing a 15x or 31x image of the pixels around the current position of the crosshair cursor (see Section F.5).

Crosshair The Crosshair options in the Properties control enable the display of the crosshair cursor, while the Show Crosshair option on the Button Bar switches this display on and off (see Section F.2).

Show Cage The Show Cage option in the Properties control switches the display of Safe Action and Safe Title cages (see Section F.3).


F.2 Picture Overlays

Where the video being analysed includes timecodes, closed captions or teletext subtitles, these can be overlaid on the Picture display. Another possible overlay is the crosshair cursor that marks the current focus for analyses such as the Waveform View and the Data View.

Crosshair The crosshair cursor that marks the focus for displays such as the Waveform View and the Data View can be both shown and moved on the Picture display. The display of this crosshair is principally controlled by the Crosshair section of the Picture properties, where the Crosshair options control whether the crosshair is displayed or hidden and whether it is shown as a short cross or full height. The crosshair is also turned on and off by the Show Crosshair option included in the Picture View’s Button Bar. The crosshair is also affected by settings within the Inputs section of the View window’s Properties control. These include settings for the x,y coordinates for the crosshair’s current position. The Properties control also includes a Show option that controls whether the crosshair is displayed or hidden.

Figure F-3: Crosshair properties



To show the crosshair on the Picture display: Either take the Show Crosshair option offered on the Button Bar (when this option is

highlighted, the crosshair is shown on the Picture display).

Or tick the Show option within either the ‘Input’ Crosshair or the ‘Picture’ Crosshair section of the Properties control.

To switch between a short cross and a full height/full width cursor: Toggle the Full Size tick box in the ‘Picture’ Crosshair section of the Properties control.

To position the crosshair on the Picture display: Either check that the Modify ROI option on the Button Bar is not selected, then ‘drag’ the

crosshair to a new position on the Picture display using a mouse or by twisting the HORIZ and VERT knobs.

Or type the required coordinates in the ‘Input’ crosshair section of the Properties control (for example, using the numeric keypad).

Timecodes Timecodes detected within the incoming video may be overlaid on the Picture display. The OTM 1000 is able to read both VITC timecodes in SD format video and ATC timecodes in HD or 3G/s video. It is also possible to read LTC timecodes in SD video (with the extra LTC_READER option).

Figure F-4: Example timecode overlay.


Displaying Timecodes The option to display the timecode is offered as part of the Picture properties, along with various choices about the size and position of the timecode on the display.

Figure F-5: Timecode overlay properties.


To select the type of timecode displayed:

1. Call up the Properties control (e.g. by pressing the PROPS button) 2. Open the Picture tile section of the Properties control far enough to display the Timecode

details. 3. Select the Type entry and use the drop-down menu to select the type of timecode that is

included in the video stream. Note: ATC timecodes are divided into separate ATC-VITC1, ATC-VITC2 and ATC_LTC types, according to the type of timecode they contain.

To start/stop displaying timecodes:

Setting the timecode type automatically results in the timecode being displayed. Once displayed, it can then be switched on and off using the Timecode option on the Button Bar.


Timecode size and position The other entries in the Timecode section of the Properties control set how and where the timecode is displayed. The choices are as follows: Size: Offers a choice of Small or Large. Row: Selects between positioning the timecode at the top, at the bottom or along the middle of the display. Column: Selects between positioning the timecode to the left, to the right or in the centre of the display. Opacity: Sets how transparent the display is – between fully transparent (0%) and fully opaque (100%). Inverted: Switches between white lettering on a black background (when unticked) and black lettering on a white background (when ticked).

Closed Captions & Teletext Subtitles The video under test may include closed captions or teletext subtitles.

Figure F-6: Picture View with Captions

The OTM is able to automatically detect and decode ‘Line 21’, CEA-608 and CEA-708 captions (the latter from up to six services provided within the video stream), and overlay the decoded text on the Picture display. The only additional information that is required is the type of caption that is to be displayed. The OTM can also display PAL and OP-47 teletext subtitles in very much the same way as closed captions but, in this case, the page on which the subtitles are to be found also needs to be specified. The caption is displayed at the position and using the style specified in the caption code. Only one type of caption can be displayed on any Picture tile at a time but if the video under test includes captions in different formats e.g. both CEA-608 and CEA-708 closed captions, these can be viewed by setting up multiple Picture tiles, each displaying a different type of caption. There is also the option of recording captions in an XML log file – see Section J.4.


Configuration Issues The display of 608, 708 and Line 21 closed captions are not affected by any configuration settings. The display of PAL and OP-47 teletext subtitles, however, requires the user to set the number of the Page on which teletext subtitles are to be found. This page number is set on the Video Config page of the Config window (see Section T.2). The same setting applies to both PAL Teletext and OP-47 teletext. There is also an optional Page Cache available for PAL and OP-47 teletext to support fast text (also offered on the Video Config page).

Displaying Captions/Subtitles The option to display captions/teletext subtitles is offered as part of the Picture properties.


To select the type of captions/subtitles displayed:

1. Call up the Properties control (e.g. by pressing the PROPS button) 2. Open the Picture tile section of the Properties control far enough to display the Closed

Captions section. 3. Select the Caption Type entry and use the drop-down menu to select the type of caption that

is included in the video stream. 4. For CEA-708-B captions, also select the required Service. 5. For CEA-608-B captions, also select the Channel associated with the required caption set.

Note: If you don’t know what type of caption is included in the video stream, you can find this out by examining the information displayed in either the Status Overview or the AUX Status Summary (see Section E.6).

To start/stop displaying captions:

Setting the caption type automatically results in the captions being displayed. Once displayed, they can then be switched on and off using the Closed Caption option on the Button Bar.

Figure F-7: Caption overlay properties.


F.3 Safe Action/Safe Title Cages

The OTM allows ‘cages’ representing safe-action and safe-title areas to be marked out on the Picture View (as described here) and included on the SDI output when the OTM is used in Pass-Through mode (see Section P.4). It is also possible to save the cages you define as a ‘Cage Preset’, for re-use on a subsequent occasion.

Figure F-8: Picture View showing cages.

For both cages, you are offered a choice of opting for a ‘Fixed’ cage or an ‘Adjustable’ one.

The ‘Fixed’ cage option offers a range of pre-defined cages, always centrally positioned, the area of which is given as a percentage of the display.

The ‘Adjustable’ cage option allows you to specify the dimensions you require. Opting for an adjustable safe title cage also allows you to choose where this cage is positioned.

The cages are defined as properties of the Input and can be enabled either individually or together as required. Their display over the Picture (and their inclusion on the SDI Output) are controlled by separate ‘Show Cage’ options. The default is for both cages to be marked out by a solid white line but, to allow them to be distinguished when shown together, the safe title cage can optionally be marked out using a dashed line (as illustrated above).


Set-Up The cages that are required are associated with the video input rather than the Picture View, so the details of these cages are set in the Inputs section of the Properties control.

Source Aspect Ratio Select from 4:3 Analog; 4:3 Digital; 16:9 Analog; 16:9 Digital.

Safe title cage Examine the options offered by the ‘Fixed’ setting, then select between making this cage Fixed and Adjustable (or Disabled). Now use the other settings within this subsection to set the position and the dimensions of the required Safe title cage. Fixed: Select the required pre-defined size from the associated drop-down list. Adjustable: Use the X and Y settings to position the top left-hand corner of the required cage (relative to the top left-hand corner of the active frame). Then use the CX and CY settings to set the width and height of the required cage. Dashed: Tick this option to distinguish the Safe title cage from the Safe action cage when displayed together.

Safe action cage Examine the options offered by the ‘Fixed’ and ‘Adjustable’ settings, then select between making this cage Fixed and Adjustable (or Disabled). Now use the other settings within this subsection to set the width and height of the required Safe action cage. Note: This cage is always positioned centrally. Fixed: Select the required pre-defined size from the associated drop-down list. Adjustable: Either pick from the drop-down menu or select Variable and use the CX and CY settings to set the width and height of the required cage as a percentage of the active frame.

Figure F-9: Cage properties included in View window Properties control,

together with associated Picture tile ’Show Cage’ option.


Displaying the cages Once the required cages have been defined (as described above), ticking the Show Cage option within the Picture properties displays the cages that have been defined on the Picture view. Note: Ticking the Show Cage option displays whatever cages are currently defined for the appropriate input in the Inputs section of the Properties control. To switch the combination of cages that are displayed, you need to switch the individual cages between Fixed/Adjustable and Disabled in the Input Properties as required.

Saving and Re-loading Cage definitions may be saved as ‘Cage Presets’, ready to be re-loaded when required.


To save the current set of cage definitions:

1. Select the Save Cage option in the Inputs section of the View window Properties control. 2. Enter a name for the Cage Preset in the dialogue that appears then take the Save option.

Note: If you don’t have a keyboard attached to the OTM, press the GENERAL knob. A keyboard similar to the one used in saving files (see Section B.6) is then displayed.

Figure F-10: Dialogue used to record Cage Preset.

To re-load a set of cage definitions:

1. Select the Load Cage option in the Inputs section of the View window Properties control. 2. Select the required Cage from the list of Cage Presets that is shown.


F.4 Region of Interest (ROI)

Some of the image analyses offered by the OTM 1000 may either be carried out over the whole frame or limited to a specific area referred to as the ‘Region of Interest’ or ROI.

Figure F-11: Region of Interest as shown on the Picture display.

The Region of Interest applies across a number of analyses of the same video source, so it is treated as a property of the video input i.e. detailed in the Inputs section of the Properties control. However, the area picked out as the Region of Interest is shown on the Picture display (when enabled) and can be both enabled/disabled and modified via the Picture display.


Figure F-12: Picture Button Bar with Enable ROI and Modify ROI selected.

Enabling/Disabling the ROI Analyses are limited to just the Region of Interest by enabling the ROI, and returned to full frame by disabling the ROI.


To enable the ROI

Either: Select the Enable ROI option on the Picture display’s Button Bar. Or: Tick Enable ROI among the Properties of the selected input.

To disable the ROI

Either: Toggle the Enable ROI option on the Picture display’s Button Bar. Or: Clear the Enable ROI option offered among the Properties of the selected input.


Setting the Size and Position of the ROI The size and position of the Region of Interest can either be set directly within the Properties control (as described in Section E.2) or modified on the Picture display as follows:


1. Select ‘Modify ROI’ – for example by taking the Modify ROI option offered on the Picture display’s Button Bar. If Enable ROI is not already selected, it will also become selected at this point.

2. Adjust Left and Right edges – using HORIZ knob Press and twist the HORIZ knob. Pressing the HORIZ knob cycles its action round: Moving the left-hand edge of the ROI Moving the right-hand edge of the ROI Moving both edges in parallel

3. Adjust Top and Bottom edges – using VERT knob Press and twist the VERT knob, in a similar way to the actions described above. Pressing the VERT knob cycles its action round: Moving the top edge of the ROI Moving the bottom edge of the ROI Moving both edges in parallel

2. Draw an initial ROI’ – by right-clicking at one corner and then dragging the mouse to mark out an area.

3. Move the Edges With the Region of Interest enabled and shown on the Picture display, any edge of this region may be dragged to new position using standard mouse techniques.

Re-positioning The Region of Interest can be moved without changing its size by moving the cursor to a part of the region that is away from the edge and then using the mouse to drag the region to its chosen new position.

4. Finish by clearing Modify ROI – to avoid accidentally making further changes to the Region of Interest you have set.


F.5 Picture Zoom

It is possible to zoom in on the Picture display for closer examination. The scaled-up image is shown in a small window positioned towards the bottom right-hand corner of the display, and the part of the frame that is shown is the area under the crosshair cursor.

Figure F-13: Picture display with Zoom selected.

This option is controlled through the Zoom View setting included among the Picture display’s properties and also accessed through the Zoom View option included in the Picture display’s Button Bar.


Figure F-14: Picture Button Bar with Zoom View selected.

The Zoom View entry in the Properties control for the Picture display offers the choice of three settings: Off, Level One and Level Two. The Zoom View option on the Button Bar cycles round these three options. Selecting Level One displays a representation of a 31x31-pixel segment of the image under the crosshair. Selecting Level Two displays a 15x15-pixel segment.

OmniTek OTM 1000 User Guide, v3.1 G-1

G : Data View Adding the VIEW_DATA option adds the Data View displays, which show pixel data from the image that is currently being processed by the built-in analyser.

Figure G-1: Example ‘Standard’ Data View display.

G.1 Overview of Display

The Data View is offered in two forms a Standard view which simply displays the pixel values, and an Extended view in which this data is interpreted. In particular, the Extended view offers interpretation of ANC packets transmitted within the blanking where it has descriptors for these. (Some XML-format descriptor files are supplied with the VIEW_DATA option. Users can also set up additional descriptor files – for example, for decoding custom ANC packets. This is described in Appendix I.) In both the Standard view and the Extended view, data is shown for a specified sample (pixel pair), together with samples earlier and later in the same line. The focus for the display is the current position of the crosshair cursor (as shown for example on the Picture display). Moving the crosshair cursor, for example on the Picture display, changes the focus of the Data View to a different pixel pair. Equally, moving the focus within the Data View moves the crosshair cursor. The display is scrollable, so you can check video data over a large portion of a video line without moving the focus. You can also check data within the blanking area. The same general steps are involved in working with this display as are used with other Views (see Section E.1). Note: Especially in Extended View, the information shown can often extend beyond the right-hand edge of the normal display. To see information displayed beyond the edge of the tile, press the HORIZ button then twist to scroll the display from left to right. Press HORIZ again to return to normal operation.


Selection The Data View is a member of the STATUS category, alongside the Status View.


To display the Data View:

Press the STATUS tile button until the Data View appears

Select Data View from the STATUS section of the View Tile Browser.


Display Properties How the Data View is displayed is determined by the tile’s properties, a complete read-out of which is given in the Properties control (Control Panel: press PROPS to display) Shortcuts to these settings are provided through the Button Bar (Control Panel: press GENERAL or OTHER; Mouse/Keyboard: click on tile to display), alongside some positioning options (described in the section on ‘Setting the focus for the display’).

Properties Control

Button Bar


Figure G-2: Data View Properties.


Extended Views At any one time extended analysis may be given on up to four separate channels, corresponding to the components of a maximum of two data streams. The number and type of channels for which extra interpretation is given depends on the type of video that is being analysed. The Properties control offers a set of tick boxes through which to select the required extra information, however it is generally much easier to use the Buttons 5 – 8 of the Button Bar to select the required information as these are automatically labelled appropriately for the type of video that is being analysed.

Format The Format setting principally selects between displaying the data in hexadecimal, decimal or binary. It further offers the option of interpreting 10bit data as 8 bits + 2 bits (and expressing the result either in hex or in decimal). This has the advantage of making standard groupings such as those associated with SAV and EAV easier to pick out.

Font Size The Font Size option allows control over the size of text used in the DataView. The options are: Auto; Small; Medium; or Large. Auto leaves the selection of the text size to the OTM software, which then switches the text size that used between Multi View and Full View versions of the display. The other three options cause the chosen text size to be used for both Multi View and Full View versions of the display.

Setting the focus for the display As stated above, the focus for the pixel data displayed by the Data View is the current position of the crosshair cursor associated with the selected input stream. The position of this cursor may be set in a number of ways.


Using the Picture display to set the focus.

The HORIZ and VERT knobs may be used to approximately position the crosshair.

Clicking on the Picture display may be used to approximately position the crosshair.

Using the Properties control to set the focus.

Selecting the Pix/Ln/Fld option on the Button Bar calls up the Properties with the cursor on the Crosshair details shown for the selected input stream. These both give the current location of the crosshair and allow this to be changed.

Moving the focus within the Data View.

Twisting the HORIZ knob moves the focus sample by sample along the current line. Twisting the VERT knob moves the focus line by line.

Scrolling up the display moves the focus of the display first to the left along the selected image line, then to the very end of the line above (i.e. the end of the blanking), while scrolling down moves the focus first to the right, then to the start of the following line.

In addition, options on the Data View’s Button Bar provide moves to certain specific locations as follows:

Go To EAV centres the display on the next EAV.

Go To SAV centres the display on the next SAV.


G.2 Standard View

When the ‘Standard’ version of the Data View is shown, it simply displays the pixel values.

Figure G-3: Standard version of the Data View.

Overview of Display Features The data is displayed as a number of columns. The first two columns indicate where the location of sampled pixel in the image (the ‘Sample’ number corresponds to the position along the line at which the data is being read). The other columns report the Y, Cb and Cr values associated with the selected pixel. The background against which the data is displayed is colour coded as follows: Green indicates that the pixel is within active video Blue indicates that the pixel is within a TRS packet Purple indicates that the pixel is within an ANC packet Light grey indicates that the pixel is within horizontal blanking Black indicates that the pixel is within vertical blanking for field 1 Dark grey indicates that the pixel is within vertical blanking for field 2 Red indicates a data range error (i.e. video data outside the configured desired range,

as set on the Video Configuration page of the Config window).


G.3 Extended View

Where an Extended View is selected, the standard pixel value display is enhanced through the addition of pixel colour data and interpretations of identifiable structures such as ANC packets in the video signal.

Figure G-4: Extended View version of the Data View.

Overview of Display Features The way the columns are arranged and the additional information that can be displayed depends on the type of video signal that is being analysed. For instance, combined Y/C information is displayed for SD signals, but separate Y-type and C-type information is displayed for HD signals. Within the active video, both a value and a set of pixel data are shown for each pixel. In dual-link input formats, the RGB and XYZ colour space data is assembled into full pixel values. EAV and SAV markers are both named and interpreted in terms of the FVH etc. information they contain. The interpretation given of ANC packets within the blanking area depends on the associated descriptor file (where supplied) but will typically show at least an identifying name.


OmniTek OTM 1000 User Guide, v3.1 H-1

H : DCI Support This section describes the additional image analysis displays that become available when the VIEW_XR_DCI option is installed. Adding this option also adds support for the XYZ colour space and for 12-bit pixel data.

H.1 CIE Colour Chart (Not available in PQA Mode) The CIE Colour Chart is an x,y plot of the chrominance of each pixel as represented in XYZ colour space, presented as a trace drawn over a standard background. The enclosed area within this background indicates the full range of X,Y values that correspond to colours which are visible to the human eye. In one version of the display, this area is also coloured to indicate the colours represented by the different X,Y values.

Figure H-1: CIE Colour Chart

The chart has some special properties compared to other measures such as gamut charts, histograms or the vectorscope. In particular:

Each colour that the eye can see is represented by a single point on the chart.

The point representing a colour is independent of the colour primaries that will be used to display the colour.

It is also independent of the luminance.

The colours that can be reproduced by any set of three display primaries all lie within the triangle formed by linking the points representing the colours of the individual primaries.

The CIE Colour Chart is of particular value in assessing the effect on the colour depth of video generated for transmission in SD or HD from Digital Cinema source material, because the RGB primaries specified for the DCI Reference Projector define a noticeably wider colour range than can be produced with the display primaries specified for SD and HD. (There are also differences between the colour ranges supported by the display primaries defined for PAL, NTSC and HD but these differences are significantly smaller than those between these primaries and those defined for Digital Cinema.)


Another major application for the Colour Chart is in assessing the effect on the colour depth of displaying the video on a particular projection system. To this end, the OTM 1000 has the facility to overlay the chart with triangles representing both the colour gamut for which the video has been prepared (as defined by the ‘Input’ primaries) and the colour gamut associated with the user’s choice of ‘User’ primaries. This second triangle might for example be used to indicate the colour gamut of the system on which the video is to be displayed. Triangles representing standard sets of display primaries such as those associated with PAL, NTSC, HD and Digital Cinema are available for selection from a menu. CIE Charts can be displayed for the whole frame or for individual lines as required, and filters can be applied in the same way as for Waveform displays. Another option is to display a ‘Luma Masked’ version of the CIE Chart, covering just those pixels with the luma value within a specified range (selected by the user). Labels showing the selections that have been made can optionally be shown in the corners of the display. The same general steps are involved in working with this display as are used with other Views. (See Section E.1)

Selection The CIE Colour Chart Display is one of the displays offered within the GAMUT category.


To display the CIE Colour Chart:

Press the GAMUT tile button until the CIE Chart appears

Select CIE Chart from the GAMUT section of the View Tile Browser.

(For more detailed instructions, see Section E.1.) Note: No more than four waveforms, vectorscopes or CIE Charts can be displayed at the same time.

Configuration Issues The following Configuration settings affect the display of the CIE Colour Chart:

Input Primaries Where the video being analysed is in YCbCr format, the OTM 1000 automatically selects the Input primaries associated with the video standard that is detected. But where the input is in RGB or XYZ format, it is not possible to determine the appropriate set of primaries automatically. The primaries to apply in each case need to be set on the Video Config page of the Config window.


Display Properties Other aspects of the CIE Colour Chart are determined by the tile’s properties, a complete read-out of which is given in the Properties control (Control Panel: press PROPS to display). . Shortcuts to some settings are provided through the Button Bar (Control Panel: press GENERAL or OTHER; Mouse/Keyboard: click on tile to display).

Properties Control

Figure H-2: CIE Colour Chart Properties.

Button Bar


Filter Control The Filter control selects how the incoming data is sampled. The choice offered is between a Flat filter, a Low Pass filter or No Interpolation. The Button Bar option cycles round these three options. When Labels are shown (see Show Labels below), the type of filtering that is being applied is shown in the bottom right-hand corner of the display. Interpolation is usually enabled but users should be aware that it can occasionally produce out of range results. Where these occur, you may prefer to turn the interpolator off.


Line Mode The Line Mode control selects between displaying a Colour Chart based on a single line (picked out by the crosshair cursor) or multiple lines. The Button Bar option switches between these two settings. Where Single line is selected, the line being analysed is shown in the bottom left-hand corner of the display. (For details of the lines selected, see Section E.2 ‘Focus of Analysis’.)

Luma Mask When Luma Mask is selected, the display becomes limited to those pixels whose luma value lies between the associated Minimum and Maximum settings. The Luma Mask option on the Button Bar toggles this selection.

Dither Mode This option offers a choice of Dither Mode between 8bit, 10bit and 12bit.

Visualisation The Gain control adjusts the intensity of the displayed waveform (as a percentage of the received signal level). The Persistence setting sets the rate at which the displayed data decays. Larger values have the effect of smoothing out time variations. The Gamma option allows the application (or removal) of gamma correction. (Note: A gamma correction of γ is removed by setting the Gamma option to 100/ γ.) The Colour setting selects the required combination of trace and background colours as follows. The Button Bar option cycles through the possible settings.

Option Trace Background

Colour Chart Appropriate colour (Dull version of) Appropriate colour

Cyan Cyan Black

Green Green Black

White White Black

The CRT Emulation option applies a special filter to the waveform data to emulate the look that is typical of analog CRT-based waveform monitors. The Show Graticule tick selection controls the display of the underlying x,y grid together with other standard markings. The Show User Primaries tick selection overlays the triangle associated with a user-selected set of RGB primaries (selected on a drop-down line of the display from a drop-down list of options). The Show User option on the Button Bar toggles this selection. The Show Source Primaries tick selection overlays a triangle corresponding to the source video standard (identified automatically for YCbCr sources, otherwise taken from the Configuration setting –see ‘Configuration Issues’ above). The Show Source option on the Button Bar toggles this selection. The Show Labels option controls the display of labels and other additional information.


H.2 Histogram

The Histogram display presents colour histograms of the video that is currently being analysed. Parts of the signal that lie outside the required gamut are shown in red. The analysis is applied either to full frames of active video or just to the Region of Interest where this is enabled (see Section E.2). Where the VIEW_3D or the ALIGNMENT option is installed, the Histogram display may also be used to compare the luma and chroma levels in two versions of the same image, e.g. the left-eye and right-eye images of Stereo 3D video: see Section I.9. The histogram displays provide a detailed and accurate method of assessing colour gamut. Unlike traditional displays that simply indicate that a signal is out of gamut, these histograms allow you to see to how far out of gamut the signal goes. The histograms for the different colour components may be displayed overlaid, stacked or in a parade format, while the scale against which they are shown can be either linear or logarithmic. A cursor may optionally be added to the display, along with a read-out of the value for each colour component at the current cursor position. The same general steps are involved in working with this display as are used with other Views. (See Section E.1)

Figure H-3: Example Histogram display

Selection The Histogram display is one of the Views offered within the GAMUT category.


To display the Histogram:

Press the GAMUT tile button until the Histogram display appears

Select Histogram from the GAMUT section of the View Tile Browser.



Configuration Issues The following Configuration setting affects the display of the Histogram . Note: Further settings are required where 3D images are analysed: these are described in Section I.8.

Amplitude Measurement Units The units in which the amplitude axis is measured is set by the Amplitude Measurement Units setting on the System page of the Config window.

Display Properties How the histograms are displayed is determined by the tile’s properties, a complete read-out of which is given in the Properties control (Control Panel: press PROPS to display). . Shortcuts to some settings are provided through the Button Bar (Control Panel: press GENERAL or OTHER; Mouse/Keyboard: click on tile to display).

Properties Control

Figure H-4: Histogram View Properties.

Button Bar



Colour Mode The Colour Mode control selects between YRGB, YCbCr etc. histograms, while the following tick selections control the components that are actually displayed. The Button Bar option cycles through the available settings.

Display Mode The Display Mode control allows a choice between Overlay; Parade; and Stacked presentation of the component histograms. The Button Bar option cycles through these arrangements.

Scale Options The Logarithmic tick box selects between using a logarithmic scaling for the histogram magnitude (when ticked) and using a linear scale when clear. The Button Bar option toggles between these options. The Maximum value shown may be set, either by adjusting the slider control (e.g. by twisting the GENERAL knob) or by directly changing the associated value. Alternatively, pressing the GENERAL knob on the Auto Range option adjusts the maximum to fit the image that is being processed.

Visualisation The Show Graticule option controls the display of the underlying grid and associated information.

Cursor A cursor may be added to the display, together with a read-out of the value for each component colour at the intensity selected by the cursor. The Show Cursors option controls the display of this cursor (also turned On and Off by the Cursors option on the Button Bar). The Cursor Position sets the position of the cursor, which can also be moved to different positions by turning the HORIZ knob or by dragging with a mouse.

Show Labels The Show Labels option controls the display of labels and other additional information.

Colour The Colour setting selects the colour used for the histogram, out of Cyan, Green, White or ‘Match Component’ (which makes each trace the appropriate colour for the component represented).

3D View (For information about the 3D View option that may be offered, see Section I.9.)


OmniTek OTM 1000 User Guide, v3.1 I-1

I : Stereo 3D Analysis and Camera Alignment

This section describes the tools for analysing Stereo 3D (S3D) video that become available where the VIEW_3D option is installed and enabled, and the assistance that the OTM can offer towards camera alignment when either the VIEW_3D option or the ALIGNMENT option is installed and enabled. All video formats are supported including 3G Level A and 3G Level B (with the appropriate VIDEO_xx options: see Section V). The Analysis tools described in this section allow:

Visual comparison of the left and right images Depth mapping and analysis Assessment of luma and chroma differences between the left and right images

The additional Camera Alignment tools comprise a set of meters that compare camera set-up details such as rotation, zoom and colour gain either between the cameras providing the left-eye and right-eye images or between a single camera and a reference image. These tools are described in Sections I.8 and I.9. Camera Alignment data is also included in the Status displays described in Section E.6 (see also Section I.10). The steps used to enable Stereo 3D Analysis and Camera Alignment are given in Section I.2. The S3D video may be delivered either as separate Left and Right image streams or in Side-By-Side (SbS) or Top + Bottom (TaB) formats. The OTM also includes various flip options for handling S3D video taken from a mirror rig. Notes: (i) The 3D facilities described here also require the VIEW_2 (Simultaneous Monitoring) option to be installed. However, this should never be an issue as any sale of the VIEW_3D option will also include the VIEW_2 option if this is not already licensed. (ii) Where the GEN_2 option is installed, the OTM can also be used to generate S3D video – see Section Q.12. (iii) A white paper on 3D Monitoring and Correction is available on our website at www.omnitek.tv/3D_White_Paper.pdf (iv) Many of the facilities described in this section aren’t available when the OTM is in PQA Mode (described in Section S). However, the single camera alignment facilities described in Section I.8 do remain available.

Stereo 3D Analysis Terminology Disparity The amount by which the location of an image feature in the Right-eye (test)

image is displaced relative to the location of the same image feature in the Left-eye (reference) image. Vertical disparity is measured in lines: horizontal disparity can be measured either in pixels, or in metres on the screen on which the image is displayed or as a percentage of the screen width. Where disparity is mentioned in relation to perceived depth, it is referring to horizontal disparity, positive values of which correspond to positions behind the screen, while negative values correspond to positions in front of the screen.

http://www.omnitek.tv/3D_White_Paper.pdf


Depth The distance a 3D object appears to be from the screen plane. Positive values correspond to positions behind the screen; negative values correspond to positions in front of the screen.

Depth Budget The desired range of depths within which all 3D objects should appear, expressed either in terms of a maximum (most positive) and a minimum (most negative) disparity or a maximum (most positive) and a minimum (most negative) depth.

I.1 Stereo 3D Overview

Stereo 3D video produces the effect of 3D by deploying the brain’s capacity to interpret parallax between right- and left-eye images of the same object as a single object at a distance from the viewer. For the viewer’s brain to merge two images into one 3D image:

1. The ‘disparity’ (see above) must lie between the value representing the closest object (typically no less than about 1m in front of the viewer) and the value representing the farthest object (usually taken to be at infinity)

2. The colorimetry of the two images must match. The OTM offers a variety of ways to display the depth information that can be deduced from the two signals, together with a range of ways to compare the colour information in the two component video signals. It also offers a choice of Picture modes through which to see the effect of combining the images. Other facilities include automatic read-out of the coordinates in the viewer’s world of any point you pick with the crosshair cursor (i.e. the x, y, and z coordinates that the selected item will appear to have relative to the viewer) and the ability to limit the area being analysed to a specified Region of Interest. The crosshair cursor and/or its coordinates in the viewer’s world are shown on many of the displays described in this section. This information also appears in the Properties control. Any change in the position of the crosshair cursor in any of these displays automatically causes all references to this cursor to be updated to reflect the new position in the viewer’s world coordinates. The Regions of Interest shown on the left- and right-eye images are similarly linked by an offset corresponding to the measured disparity. The right- and left-eye images are typically provided as separate inputs to the OTM, but may also be delivered Side-by-Side (SbS) or Top + Bottom (TaB) or taken from 3G Level B Dual-Stream video. Where separate inputs are used, the user specifies which input is providing the left-eye image and which the right-eye image. The thumbnails on the Status Bar automatically switch to show the left-eye image to the left and the right-eye image to the right. Where the video is taken from a mirror rig, the user specifies – for both Left and Right image streams – whether the image is in the normal orientation, flipped horizontally or flipped vertically. The use of a mirror rig typically also means that the colours are generally less bright in the image that has been through the mirror. Such differences in colour adversely affect the OTM’s ability to match objects across the left-eye and right-eye images. The process of matching objects is also adversely affected by any vertical disparity between the images. However, the OTM is able to determine the corrections that need to be applied in each case, and ‘Auto gain control’ and ‘Auto correct vertical disparity’ options are offered. When selected, these options can significantly improve both the quality of the 3D depth analysis and the OTM’s assessment of camera set-up issues such as differences in zoom and camera roll. Important: Processing Stereo 3D video takes significant resources. In particular, it is not possible to both analyse Stereo 3D and to capture images at the same time. The OTM therefore allows you to enable and disable 3D monitoring as required: this is described in Section I.2.


I.2 Enabling 3D Monitoring and Camera Alignment

Before any of the 3D or Camera Alignment facilities described in this guide can be made available:

3D Monitoring and Camera Alignment need to be enabled for the machine as a whole, and

The format in which the S3D video is delivered needs to be defined. These actions use the 3D Settings section of the System page of the Config window (the other settings of which are described in Section T.4).

Figure I-1: 3D Settings section of the System page of the Config window.

While 3D Monitoring and Camera Alignment are enabled, the OTM’s Capture facilities are disabled. However, the live input received on either input can still be passed through to the SDI outputs (as described in Section P.4). There is also the option to pass-through the signals on both inputs. The steps used to enable 3D Monitoring and Camera Alignment are given below, along with the steps used to disable these facilities (and re-enable the Capture facilities).


To enable 3D Monitoring and/or Camera Alignment:

1. Call up the System page of the Config window. 2. Tick Allow 3D Monitoring within the set of 3D Settings on that page.

To disable 3D Monitoring and Camera Alignment:

1. Call up the System page of the Config window. 2. Clear the tick beside Allow 3D Monitoring within the set of 3D Settings on that page.


Defining the 3D Video Format (Stereo 3D video only) The OTM also needs to be configured for the format in which the Stereo 3D video is delivered. Stereo 3D video can be delivered in any of the following formats

As separate Left and Right image streams, one delivered to Input 1 and the other to Input 2

With the Left and Right images delivered Side-by-Side either to Input 1 or Input 2

With the Left and Right images delivered Top + Bottom either to Input 1 or Input 2

As taken from a mirror rig, leaving either the Left images or the Right images flipped either horizontally or vertically.


To set the 3D video format:

1. Call up the System page of the Config window. 2. Select Channel Sources within the set of 3D Settings on that page, and select the source

option appropriate to the video that is to be processed from the drop-down menu. 3. Set the Left Camera Flip Mode option within the set of 3D Settings according to the

orientation of the left-eye images that are to be processed – Off (normal orientation), H(orizontal) Flip, or V(ertical) Flip.

4. Set the Right Camera Flip Mode option within the set of 3D Settings according to the orientation of the right-eye images that are to be processed – Off (normal orientation), H(orizontal) Flip, or V(ertical) Flip.

Applying Auto-correction Differences in colour gain and vertical disparity between the left-eye and right-eye images significantly diminish the OTM’s ability to match items across the left-eye and right-eye images. However, the matching algorithms that the OTM applies are generally able to determine corrections that improve the number of matches that can be made and Auto Gain Control and Auto correct Vertical Disparity options are offered that apply these corrections. Switching between enabling and disabling these options will show how effective they are being. The Auto correct Vertical Disparity option can also be helpful in making luma/chroma comparisons between different versions of the same image.


To enable Auto Gain Control/Auto correct Vertical Disparity:

1. Call up the System page of the Config window. 2. Tick the Auto Gain Control / Auto correct Vertical Disparity option within the set of 3D

Settings on that page.

To disable Auto Gain Control/Auto correct Vertical Disparity:

Clear the tick beside the Auto Gain Control / Auto correct Vertical Disparity option within the set of 3D Settings on the System page of the Config window.


I.3 Visual Comparison of S3D Left/Right Images

When the Allow 3D Monitoring option is ticked, the Picture display (described in Section F) is extended to offer a set of variants in which the two inputs are combined in different ways to form a single image. The ways the inputs may be combined are as follows:

As a checkerboard of alternate sections from the two images. Where there are no luma or chroma differences between the images, single colour areas of the resulting image will look completely smooth.

As the sum of the two signals. This option is most useful when analyzing Stereo 3D images. Items in the combined display typically have blurred edges, corresponding to the disparity between the positions of these edges in the two signals. The width of the blurred edge gives a visual impression of the item’s distance in front of or behind the screen. (The blurring is zero for items located in the screen plane.)

As the difference signal. Where Stereo 3D images are being compared, the difference signal also picks out the disparity between the edges of items within the image.

As an anaglyph. This option allows Stereo 3D video to be viewed in 3D through red/cyan glasses. The left-eye image is rendered in shades of red, the right-eye image is rendered in shades of cyan, then the two images are overlaid.

Alternating between the Left and Right images. Differences in vertical alignment appear as movement up and down the screen, while differences in luma and chroma levels give rise to a flashing effect. The size of the disparities between left and right Stereo 3D images is reflected in the amount of movement seen.

Figure I-2: Checkerboard view showing luma/chroma differences between

the images being compared.


Figure I-3: Difference view.

Figure I-4: Anaglyph representation.


The steps used to display these forms of the images are given below.

Selection Control Panel Mouse & Keyboard

To set up a tile for Image Comparison:

1. Feed the images being compared into the ports corresponding to Inputs 1 and 2 (see Section C.3).

2. Use the PICT tile button to call up the Picture display. (For more detailed instructions, see Section E.1.)

3. Press PROPS to call up the Properties control.

2. Select Picture from the View Tile Browser. (For more detailed instructions, see Section E.1)

3. Select Properties from the Right-click menu.

4. Set the Mode setting within the Picture tile properties to 3D View. (The Mode option is towards the top of the Picture tile properties).

5. Select the required 3D View Type within the 3D View section of these properties (towards the bottom of the Picture tile properties). Where the Checkered option is selected, also set the Checkerboard Size to the required value.

Configuration Issues The following settings are required on the System page of the Config window:

Allow 3D Monitoring Allow 3D Monitoring must be ticked within the set of 3D Settings.

Analyser Source The port or ports on the OTM into which the images are to be fed need to be set as the sources for Analyser 1 and/or Analyser 2 as appropriate. For details, see Section T.4.

Channel Sources and Flip Mode (Stereo 3D only) Use the Channel Sources option to specify:

the format of S3D video that is being used (separate Left and Right image streams, Side-by-Side or Top+Bottom)

where the Left and Right images are to be taken from Use the Camera Flip options to specify whether either image is flipped either horizontally or vertically. (For further details, see Section I.2.) Note: The easiest way to check that the correct settings have been made is to look at one of the Depth displays described in Sections I.5 – I.7.


Display Properties What a Picture tile displays is set by the tile’s Properties. The properties that affect the ‘3D View’ displays are described below. The other more general settings are described in Section F.1. Note: The ‘3D View’ settings can only be accessed through the Properties control. There are no shortcuts for any of these settings on the Button Bar.

Mode The Mode needs to be set to 3D View in order to enable the other 3D View settings within the Picture tile’s properties.

3D View Settings The 3D View Type setting within the 3D View settings selects the image comparison tool used in the current Picture tile, from a choice of:

Checkered – Selects a checkerboard pattern of alternating segments from Signal Input 1 and Signal Input 2. The number of elements across the width of the pattern is set from a choice of 16, 32, 48, 64, 128 or 256 through the accompanying Checkerboard Size setting. The height of the checkerboard lines is set to match the width to give a square pattern.

Difference – Left/Input 1 image minus Right/Input 2 image.

Sum – Left/Input 1 image plus Right/Input 2 image.

Anaglyph – Left/Input 1 image displayed as tones of red; Right/Input 1 image displayed as tones of cyan. (When viewed using red/cyan glasses, the image resulting from Stereo 3D video appears as a three-dimensional image in shades of grey.)

Alternate Left & Right – Images from the signal inputs are displayed alternately. The number of frames for which each image is displayed is set as the Left/Right Toggle Interval.

Figure I-5: 3D View section of

the Picture Properties.


I.4 Depth Analysis (Stereo 3D video only)

The OTM offers a range of displays analysing the depth information determined from the left and right image streams. These displays are presented through three additions to the Picture category of tile views:

Depth Map: This can be set to display all the pixels in the image for which the depth was calculated. Alternatively, the display can be limited to just those pixels for which the calculated depth is outside the specified Depth Budget.

Depth Plan: This can be set to show the distribution of objects from front to back as seen from above or as seen from one side. Another option is to display the disparity values that were determined as a plot across the width of the screen.

Depth Map Histogram: This displays a histogram, showing the distribution of disparity values across the whole image and to what degree these are within the desired Depth Budget.

These displays are described in Sections I.5, I.6 and I.7, respectively. The displays all use a colour ramp to indicate position relative to the specified Depth Budget. All points nearer to the viewer than the minimum distance are coloured red; all points beyond the maximum distance are coloured violet. The colour ramp is used to colour points located between these two distances.

Background The distance from the screen that an object in a Stereo 3D video will appear to be to the viewer is readily calculated by simple geometry. All the calculation requires is knowledge of the width of the screen, the viewer’s distance in front of the screen, how far apart their eyes are (the ‘Interocular distance) – and knowledge of the ‘disparity’ between the position of an identifiable point on the object – in the Left-eye image and its position on the same line of the Right-eye image. The result of the calculation for any point gives the ‘z’ component for this point in a set of ‘Viewer World Coordinates’, the ‘x’ and ‘y’ components of which are calculated assuming that the viewer is sitting centrally with their eye level half way up the screen. (The (0, 0, 0) point for these viewer coordinates is the centre of the screen.) The width of the screen, the viewer’s distance in front of the screen and the Interocular distance remain the same throughout the video and are recorded as part of the System settings (see Configuration, below). In analysing each frame of the video, the OTM searches along each line of the video for features that can be matched between the left-eye image and the right-eye image. The range of the right-eye image that is searched for a matching feature is given by the values for the Search Minimum and the Search Maximum recorded in the System settings. These minimum and maximum values set the limits on the range of disparity values that will be determined. They also correspond to the nearest to the viewer and the farthest behind the screen that the OTM will pick out items to report. Any objects with disparities outside this range in the video will not be reported.


Also recorded in the System settings are values for the Minimum Budget and the Maximum Budget. These need to be set to define the depth range in which items of interest should appear, commonly referred to as the Depth Budget. Disparities outside this range are regarded as being in error. The range of disparities recorded as the Search Minimum and the Search Maximum should be very much wider than that recorded as Minimum Budget and the Maximum Budget in order to allow attention to be drawn to objects that appear outside the Depth Budget.

Minimum Budget

(negative)

Maximum Budget (positive)

Minimum Search (negative)

Maximum Search (positive)

Depth Budget

Range of Disparities scanned by the OTM

In Front of Screen Behind Screen

Figure I-6: Depth Analysis Parameters.

Configuration Issues The 3D Depth Analysis described in this section needs the following parameters to be set correctly in the 3D Settings section of the System page of the Config window:

Allow 3D Monitoring Allow 3D Monitoring must be ticked within the set of 3D Settings.

Analyser Source The port or ports on the OTM into which the S3D video is to be fed need to be set as the sources for Analyser 1 and/or Analyser 2 as appropriate. For details, see Section T.4.

Channel Sources and Flip Mode Use the Channel Sources option to specify:

the format of S3D video that is being used (separate Left and Right image streams, Side-by-Side or Top+Bottom)

where the Left and Right images are to be taken from Use the Camera Flip options to specify whether either image is flipped either horizontally or vertically. (For further details, see Section I.2.) Note: If the Left and Right images have been wrongly assigned, items that you expect to appear in front of the screen will appear to be in the far distance, and items that you expected to be in the distance, appear to be very close.


Auto-Correction Options The OTM offers auto-correction of differences in colour gain and vertical disparity between the left-eye and right-eye images, which in many cases can significantly improve the OTM’s ability to match items across the two images. Select these facilities by ticking the Auto Gain Control and Auto correct Vertical Disparity options within the 3D Settings section on the System page of the Config window. (For further details, see Section I.2.)

Viewer and Screen Parameters For the depths (and other values in the viewer’s world coordinates) that are calculated to be meaningful, the Viewer Distance (in front of the screen), the Interocular Distance (between the viewer’s eyes) and the Screen Width need to be set correctly. The units for these measurements are metres. Note: In accordance with SMPTE recommendations, the defaults for these values are: Viewer Distance 1.75m; Screen Width 0.93m; Interocular distance 0.064m.

Disparity/Crosshair units Disparity values can be expressed either in pixels, or as a distance across the screen, or as a percentage of the screen width. While 3D is selected, these units are also used in the Input section of the Properties control to express the location of the crosshair cursor (see Section E.2).

Maximum/Minimum Search These values, together with the Depth Map Increment (see Section T.4), set the scope for the OTM’s search for matching features in the left- and right-eye images (see ‘Background’ above). These values can be expressed either as disparities or as the equivalent distance in the viewer’s world coordinates.

Maximum/Minimum Budget These values define the Depth Budget (see ‘Background’ above). These values can also be expressed either as disparities or as the equivalent distance in the viewer’s world coordinates. Note: Infinity is expressed by setting the disparity to the interocular distance.


I.5 Depth Map (Stereo 3D video only)

The Depth Map uses colour to show how far the various features in the current Stereo 3D image are away from the viewer. The map is created by colouring each pixel for which the OTM determined the disparity. Points at which the disparity was found to be less than or equal to the Minimum Budget disparity are coloured red; points with disparities greater than or equal to the Maximum Budget disparity are coloured violet; and points between are coloured using the standard colour ramp. The proportion of points for which the disparity was outside the specified limits is listed in the Status display (see Section E.6). Two versions of the Depth Map may be shown: one in which all the points for which disparities were determined are displayed; and another – the Depth Error Map –which just displays the points that were outside the specified Depth Budget. A further option is to display the scene for which the disparities were determined as a greyscale image behind the Depth Map.

Figure I-7: Depth Map.

Figure I-8: Depth Error Map.


Selection The Depth Map is one of the views offered within the Picture category.


To display the Depth Map :

Press the PICT tile button until the Depth Map appears

Select 3D Depth Map from the Picture section of the View Tile Browser.


Configuration Issues See Section I.4.

Display Properties Other aspects of the display are determined by the Depth Map tile’s properties, as displayed in the Properties control. Shortcuts to some settings are provided through the Button Bar.

Size The Size option is identical to the one offered for the Picture display (see Section F) and offers the same choice of having the map Stretched (scaled) to fit the tile or simply displayed as a half-width, half-height image regardless of the size of the tile in which it is displayed (the Unity option). The Button Bar Size option switches between these two settings.

Display Type This option offers the choice between:

showing all the points in the current image whose Depth has been determined

just showing the points where the depth falls outside the Depth Budget (Depth Errors),

showing any edges identified in one of the images but not the other (Unmatched Edges)

The Button Bar Display Type option switches between these displays.

Show Image When this option is ticked, a greyscale version of the image is shown underneath the Depth Map. The Button Bar Show Image option switches this image on and off.

Show Coordinates When this option is ticked, the coordinates of the item at the current position of the crosshair cursor in viewer’s coordinates are listed in the top right-hand corner of the screen. The Button Bar Show Coordinates option switches the display of this list on and off.

Button Bar


Figure I-9: 3D Depth Map Properties.


I.6 Depth Plan (Stereo 3D video only)

The Depth Plan provides various views of the depths determined from the Stereo 3D right- and left-eye images. These include views as if you were looking down on the scene from above or from the side and a projection that can be viewed from all different angles. All the positions are determined as for the viewer i.e. in Viewer World coordinates. The view from above is referred to as the Viewer World (Plan); the view from the side is referred to as the Viewer World (Elevation). The third display is referred to as the Real World Projection. The Depth Plan can also be set to show a ‘Disparity View’ in which the disparity values determined from the images are mapped across the width of the screen. Superimposed on all four plots are lines/planes representing the screen plane and the limits of the specified Depth Budget. On three of the displays, there is also the option of a read-out of the Viewer World coordinates of the point at or nearest to the current crosshair position.

Viewer World (Plan) view

Figure I-10: Viewer World (Plan) view.

The Viewer World (Plan) view is an x,z plot of the positions determined for the current image. This presents the depth information as if looked at from above. The range of depths displayed can be adjusted by setting the Zoom level in the Properties control (see ‘Display Properties’ below.) Note: The display is limited to items within the field of view captured in the image. As a result, the points shown all fall within a cone spreading out from the viewer’s position at the tip of the cone. Note also that clicking on the display with a mouse will normally select the nearest point at which the disparity has been determined. However, if required, you can select a point on the x,z plane (x, 0, z) by clicking (or clicking and dragging) while holding down the Ctrl key.


Viewer World (Elevation) view

Figure I-11: Viewer World (Elevation) view.

The Viewer World (Elevation) view is a similar z,y plot of the positions determined for the current image. This presents the depth information as if looked at from the right hand side. Again, the data is all contained within a cone spreading out from the viewer’s position at the tip of the cone.

Disparity view

Figure I-12: Disparity View.

The Disparity view is a plot of disparity values against position across the width of the screen (x coordinate). It is scaled in the same way as a Picture view of the same width to make it easy to compare the Disparity plot against a Picture view of the same size. The disparity is measured in the units selected on the System page of the Config window (see Section T.4).


Real World Projection

Figure I-13: Example Real World Projection.

The Real World Projection allows the current scene to be seen from all different angles. The framework for the display comprises four lines emanating from a point representing the viewer’s position, plus a set of planes representing the Depth Budget minimum (in red), the screen plane (outlined in white) and the Depth Budget maximum (in violet). The pixels for which depths have been calculated are slotted into this framework, giving the required Real World Projection. The basic framework can be rotated both left to right and up & down, thereby allowing the scene to be seen from all possible angles. You can also move in and out on the images. For details, see ‘Rotate/Zoom’ below. The OTM also offers a sequence of standard views which can be viewed in turn by taking the Next View option on the Button Bar (or in the Properties control).

Selection The Depth Plan is one of the views offered within the Picture category.


To display the Depth Plan :

1. Press the PICT tile button until the Depth Plan appears

2. Select 3D Depth Plan from the Picture section of the View Tile Browser.


3. Use the Display Type button on the Button Bar to select the required form of Depth Plan.



Display Properties Other aspects of the display are determined by the Depth Plan tile’s properties, as displayed in the Properties control. Shortcuts to some settings are provided through the Button Bar.

Display Type This option offers the choice between showing the Viewer World (Plan), the Viewer World (Elevation), the Disparity View or the Real World Projection. The Button Bar Display Type option cycles through the different displays.

Viewer World and Disparity View Options:

World View Zoom This setting within the Properties display scales the Viewer World (Plan) and Viewer World (Elevation) views. It can be set either by dragging the slider or by changing the value shown. Smaller values focus in on distances close to the viewer; larger values extend the display to larger distances away from the viewer.

Show Coordinates When this option is ticked, the coordinates of the item at the current position of the crosshair cursor in viewer’s coordinates are listed in the top right-hand corner of the screen. The Button Bar Show Coordinates option switches the display of this list on and off.

Real World Projection Options:

Rotate/Zoom The basic framework can be rotated both left to right and up & down using either a mouse (where fitted) or the HORIZ and VERT knobs on the control panel. You can also move in and out on the images using either the mouse’s scroll wheel or the Control Panel GENERAL knob. The ‘Rotate/ Zoom’ entry in the Properties control is provided as a reminder.

Reset View; Next View Reset View resets the Projection to a standard, zero rotation position. Next View cycles the display through a predefined sequence of views. (Included both on the Button Bar and in the Properties control.)

Button Bar


Note: Reset View and Next View options only apply to the Real World Projection.

Figure I-14: 3D Depth Plan Properties.

(Viewer World and Disparity View)

Figure I-15: 3D Depth Plan Properties.

(Real World Projection)


I.7 Depth Map Histogram (Stereo 3D video only)

The Depth Map Histogram plots the distribution of disparity values determined within a Stereo 3D image. As in the other Depth analyses, the data is coloured according to its position inside or outside the specified Depth Budget.

Figure I-16: Depth Map Histogram.

The x-axis of the display can be used to show either disparity values or the corresponding depths (in metres) in Viewer World coordinates. Note: The scale in metres is non-linear and includes a marker at the point corresponding to infinity. The disparity is measured in the units selected on the System page of the Config window (see Section T.4). The mean disparity value is displayed in the top right-hand corner of the Histogram window. There is also a marker at the corresponding point on the x-axis. The cursor indicates the depth/disparity value at the current position of the crosshair. The facilities offered include an Auto Range setting that automatically adjusts the height of the histogram.

Selection The Depth Map Histogram is one of the views offered within the Picture category.


To display the Depth Map Histogram :

Press the PICT tile button until the Depth Plan appears

Select 3D Depth Map Histogram from the Picture section of the View Tile Browser.




Display Properties Other aspects of the display are determined by the Depth Map Histogram tile’s properties, as displayed in the Properties control. Shortcuts to some settings are provided through the Button Bar.

Properties Control

Figure I-17: 3D Depth Map Histogram Properties.

Button Bar


Auto Range Selecting the Auto Range option either in the Properties control or on the Button Bar adjusts the height of the histogram to suit the current data.

Maximum The Maximum setting included in the Properties control allows manual adjustment of the histogram height.

X Axis The X Axis option may be used to set the labelling on the x-axis to either disparity values or Viewer World depth values (expressed in metres). The equivalent option on the Button Bar toggles between these two options.


I.8 Camera Rig Alignment

Assistance with camera rig alignment is available on any OTM on which either the VIEW_3D or the ALIGNMENT option is installed. The principal tool is the ‘3D Meters’ display described below. Additional colour gain and lift information is provided by the ‘3D Chroma Sabres’ display, described alongside other Luma/Chroma Comparisons in Section I.9. Two set-ups are supported:

A pair of cameras, set-up either to focus on a test chart or to capture a 3D scene A single camera, set-up to focus on a test chart (or some other reference scene) which has

previously been captured by the camera you are using as a reference. For single camera alignment, the output from the camera under test (and previously from the reference camera) needs to be fed into SDI Input 1 or Eye Input 1, depending on how the Analyser source is set. When aligning a pair of cameras, the output from one camera is typically fed into either SDI Input 1 or Eye Input 1 (again depending on how the Analyser source is set) and the output from the other similarly fed into SDI/Eye Input 2. This arrangement is always used on systems without the VIEW_3D option or where 3D Monitoring is switched off, but if both VIEW_3D is installed and 3D Monitoring is enabled, the Channel Source and Flip settings on the System page of the Config window become important as the OTM will pick out a Left and Right image to compare based on these settings.

3D Meters Display This display comprises a set of meters that measure differences between two images. Depending on the set-up, the meters either compare:

A Right-eye image from Stereo 3D video against the corresponding Left-eye image; or Input 2 against Input 1 (where either VIEW_3D is not installed or 3D Monitoring is not

enabled); or Input 1 against a previously captured Reference image.

Figure I-18: 3D Meters display

The meters show:

What range of depths are covered (Stereo 3D video only). Whether the cameras are vertically aligned, and if not, how far out they are (in lines).


Whether there are signs of camera rotation (roll). Whether the cameras are using the same or different zooms. How sharp the images are, with the bottom half of this meter showing the sharpness of

the image being compared and the top half showing the sharpness of the image against which it is being compared. Ideally the markers should one above the other, indicating that the images are equally sharp.

The difference in colour gain and lift between the image under test and the one against which it is being compared, shown separately for the individual colour components.

The meters are marked to show the difference between acceptable values and values outside the limits specified on the Video Config page of the Config window, while ‘traffic lights’ to the left of each meter indicate whether the current status is Good (green), Warning (yellow) or In Error (Red). Whether the display is used to compare two live images or to compare one live input against a reference image is controlled through options on the Button Bar. Other buttons on the Button Bar capture the reference against which input from a single camera may be compared, and select the type of image to be analysed because different point matching algorithms need to be applied depending on whether the image of a test chart or a 3D scene is analysed. Note: The values shown in this display are independent of any corrections made as a result of the Auto Gain Control and Auto correct Vertical Disparity options being selected, except that when the comparison is being made between the Right-eye and Left-eye images of a general scene, having these options selected increases the number of points available for use in the calculation of the other parameters and hence the accuracy of these measurements.

Selection The 3D Meters display is a member of the STATUS category.


To display the 3D Meters:

Press the STATUS tile button until the 3D Meters appear.

Select 3D Meters from the STATUS section of the View Tile Browser.


Configuration

Error Limits Acceptable limits need to be recorded for each of the parameters in the 3D Settings section of the Video Config page of the Config window, together with your choice of whether exceeding these limits should be reported as an error or simply cause a warning to be given. See Section T.4 for further details.

Note: Other settings are required for 3D Camera Alignment: see below.


Display Properties

Details of the comparison made are set through options offered both on the Button Bar and in the Properties control (Control Panel: press PROPS to display).

Properties Control

Figure I-19: Properties Control for 3D Meters display.

Button Bar


Capture Reference (See ‘Single Camera Alignment, below)

Alignment Sources Where VIEW_3D is installed and 3D Monitoring is enabled, this option selects between comparing a Right-eye image against the corresponding Left-eye image (Right vs Left) and between comparing the image on Input 1 against a previously captured reference image (In1 vs Ref). When either VIEW_3D is not installed or 3D Monitoring is not enabled, the choice is between the image on Input 2 against the image on Input 1 (In2 vs In1) and the image on Input 1 against the reference image (In1 vs Ref). Note: The In1 vs Ref option requires Analyser 1 to take its source from SDI Input 1 (or Eye Input 1 if installed) and Analyser 2 to take its source from the built-in generator. If necessary, the OTM will automatically re-assign the Analyser sources. Where this happens, the views displayed in other tiles will also reflect the inputs that are now selected.

Scene Type This option selects the point matching algorithm to use from between the algorithm appropriate to a 3D Scene and one appropriate to a Test Chart.


Single Camera Alignment

The alignment of a single camera against a reference comprises first the capture the chosen test chart/scene by the camera to which you want to match other cameras, followed by the capture of the same scene by the camera(s) under test.

1. Capturing the Reference Image The reference image may be captured using the Capture Reference option on the Button Bar of the 3D Meters display. This captures the current frame from Input 1 and adds it to the Gen window. Note: The reference image can be saved and restored to the Generator window in the same way as any other captured frame: it is only the name that is special.


To capture a Reference image:

1. Set up your ‘Reference’ camera in required fashion and focus on the Reference Test Chart 2. Feed the input from the Reference camera into the port currently selected as Input 1. 3. Call up either the 3D Meters display (as described above) or the Chroma Sabres display (see

Section I.9). 4. Select Capture Reference button on Button Bar. The current frame image is then captured and displayed on the Generator window as the pattern Reference.yuv.

To save the image for subsequent use:

Use the Save option from the Generator window’s Session menu to save the Reference.yuv pattern to your chosen location. Do NOT change the filename. (See Section Q.3 for further details.)

2. Aligning the Test Camera The following steps may be used to determine differences in set-up between a single ‘Test’ camera and the camera used when capturing the Reference image.


To align single camera:

1. Either: Capture a reference image as described above Or: (i) Call up the System page of the Config window and set the Analyser 2 Source to either the main Generator or Generator 2 (if fitted). (ii) Use the Generator window’s Load image option to load the saved Reference.yuv (if needed), then run this on the selected Generator (See Sections Q.1, Q.5 and Q.12 for details.)

2. Focus the ‘Test’ camera on the scene used when capturing the reference image. 3. Feed the input from the Test camera into SDI Input 1. 4. Call up the 3D Meters display. 5. Set the Scene Type option to Test chart or 3D scene as required. 6. Set the Alignment Source to In1 vs Ref.

The displays in the window will then show how the input from the Test camera compares against the selected Reference image.

7. Adjust the set-up of the test camera to bring the values shown to zero or 1 as appropriate.


Camera Pair Alignment

Basic Alignment (3D not enabled)


To align two cameras :

1. Feed the input from one camera into Input 1, and the input from the other camera into Input 2.

2. Set up the camera(s) to focus on a Test Chart. 3. Call up the 3D Meters display. 4. Set the Scene Type option to Test chart 5. Set the Alignment Source to In2 vs In1. 6. Adjust the set-up of the cameras to bring the values shown to zero or 1 as appropriate.

Aligning 3D Cameras


To align cameras producing Stereo 3D video:

1. Call up the System page of the Config window and check the set-up details recorded in the 3D Settings section. (For further information, see Section I.2)

2. Check that the Auto Gain Control and Auto correct Vertical Disparity options are ticked. Note: The Colour Gain and the Vertical Disparity reported within the 3D Meters display show the values prior to any correction that is applied to enhance point-matching between the images.

3. Feed the input from the ‘Left-eye’ camera into the port selected for Left-eye input, and the input from the ‘Right-eye’ camera into the port selected for Right-eye input.

4. Set up the camera(s) to capture the selected scene. 5. Call up the 3D Meters display. 7. Set the Scene Type option to 3D Scene 8. Set the Alignment Source to Right vs Left 9. Adjust the set-up of the cameras to bring the values shown to zero or 1 as appropriate.


I.9 Luma/Chroma Comparisons

The toolsets provided for 3D analysis and camera alignment both include a ‘3D Chroma Sabres’ display that assesses, for each colour component, differences in gain and lift either between two live images or between a live image and a saved reference image. In addition, when the Allow 3D Monitoring option is ticked, extra settings are available on the Waveform, Vectorscope and Histogram displays that allow the comparison of the luma and chroma content either of Left + Right images (Stereo 3D video) or the images from Inputs 1 and 2. These displays all feature a red trace for the left-hand signal and a cyan trace for the right-hand signal. Differences between these traces provide a measure of the difference in luma/chroma levels between the two component signals, and hence indicate the size of adjustment that needs to be applied either to the signals themselves or to the cameras capturing the images. All the traces are displayed in real time, allowing you to see immediately the effect of any chroma adjustments you make to the incoming video. Note: The displays described in this section work with the raw pixel data. They are not changed by the selection of the Auto Gain Control option but selecting this option and the associated Auto correct Vertical Disparity option may improve the accuracy of the Chroma Sabres display through increasing the number of points that are matched.

1. 3D Chroma Sabres The focus of the 3D Chroma Sabres display is on differences in the Gain and Lift suggested by comparing the RGB values of points that can be matched across the two images.

Figure I-20: Example 3D Chroma Sabres display


The display comprises a set of diamond-shaped plots, one for each colour component, comparing the colour values at each pixel in the ‘test’ image i.e. the image being compared (the Right-eye image in the case of Stereo 3D video) against those of the corresponding pixel in the reference image (the Left-eye image in the case of Stereo 3D video). Figures are given below each sabre for the average percentage difference in Gain and Lift (as determined by comparing the right-eye image against the left-eye image). If the Gain and Lift applied to the two images were identical, each of the three plots would comprise a single vertical line running from the bottom of the diamond to the top. But in practice, the plots tend to feature a mass of points scattered around the vertical but biased either to the left or the right. To interpret these distributions, a best-fit line is drawn through the points, the features of which are interpreted as a difference in Gain and Lift between the test image and the reference image. Where the line leans to the right, the Gain is greater in the test image (i.e. the Right-eye image in the case of Stereo 3D video) and less in the reference image (i.e. the Left-eye image in Stereo 3D video): this is shown as a positive value. Where it leans to the left, the Gain is greater in the reference image: this is shown as a negative value. The Lift is given by the offset from the origin at the bottom of the plot – again positive when in the right half of the plot and negative when in the left half. Adjustments made to the set-up of the cameras from which the images are being taken are immediately reflected in the Chroma Sabres display, making this display useful in Camera Rig Alignment (see Section I.8).

Selection The 3D Chroma Sabres View is a member of the GAMUT category.


To display the 3D Chroma Sabres View:

Press the GAMUT tile button until the 3D Chroma Sabres View appears.

Select 3D Chroma Sabres from the GAMUT section of the View Tile Browser.


Configuration Issues Where 3D images are compared, 3D Monitoring needs to be enabled and the 3D Video Format defined as described in Section I.2.


Display Properties

Details of the comparison made are set through options offered both on the Button Bar and in the Properties control (Control Panel: press PROPS to display).

Properties Control

Figure I-21: Chroma Sabre Properties.

Button Bar


Capture Reference (See Section I.8 ‘Single Camera Alignment’, above)

Alignment Sources (not offered in PQA mode) Where the VIEW_3D option is installed and 3D Monitoring is enabled, this option selects between comparing a Right-eye image against the corresponding Left-eye image (Right vs Left) and between comparing the image on Input 1 against a previously captured reference image (In1 vs Ref). When the VIEW_3D option is not installed or 3D Monitoring is not enabled, the choice is between the image on Input 2 against the image on Input 1 (In2 vs In1) and the image on Input 1 against the reference image (In1 vs Ref). Note: The In1 vs Ref option requires Analyser 1 to take its source from SDI Input 1 (or Eye Input 1 if installed) and Analyser 2 to take its source from the built-in generator. If necessary, the OTM will automatically re-assign the Analyser sources. Where this happens, the views displayed in other tiles will also reflect the inputs that are now selected.

Scene Type (not offered in PQA mode) This option selects the point matching algorithm to use from between the algorithm appropriate to a 3D Scene and one appropriate to a Test Chart.


2. Colour Comparison on Waveform Display The comparison here uses the checkerboard approach described above to generate waveforms made up of alternating segments from the Left/Input 1 image and the Right/Input 2 image.

Figure I-22: Example 3D Waveform display.

The number of divisions into which each waveform displayed is divided (and hence the width of each segment) is set by the Checkerboard option within the Waveform Properties (see Display Properties below). The number of divisions can be set to a selection of values between 16 and 256.

Selection Control Panel Mouse & Keyboard

To set up a Waveform tile for Level Comparison:

1. Feed the components of the images to be compared into the ports corresponding to Inputs 1 and 2 (see Section C.3).

2. Use the WFM tile button to call up a Waveform display. (For more detailed instructions, see Section E.1)

3. Press PROPS to call up the Properties

2. Select Waveform from the View Tile Browser. (for more detailed instructions, see Section E.1)

3. Select Properties from the Right-click menu.

4. Tick 3D View (see below) within the Waveform tile properties and set the Checkerboard Size option to the required value.


Configuration Issues The following settings are needed on the System page of the Config window:

Allow 3D Monitoring should be ticked

The port or ports on the OTM into which the images are to be fed need to be set as the sources for Analyser 1 and/or Analyser 2 as appropriate. For details, see Section T.4.

For Stereo 3D video, the Channel Sources should be set to show how the Left-eye and Right-eye images are provided (see Section I.2).

Also for Stereo 3D video, the Camera Flip options should be set to specify whether either image is flipped either horizontally or vertically.

For further information, see Section I.4. Note: The easiest way to check the Channel Assignment is to look at one of the Depth displays described in Sections I.5 –I.7.

Display Properties The characteristics of the Waveform tile display are set by the tile’s Properties (shown right). The properties that specifically apply to its ‘3D View’ are described below. The other more general settings are described in Section E.3. Note: The following ‘3D View’ settings may only be accessed through the Properties control. There are no shortcuts for these settings on the Button Bar.

3D View Tick this option to show the combined waveform. Clear the selection to return to the single-input version of the display.

Checkerboard Size Use this option to set the number of elements to each waveform from a choice of 16, 32, 48, 64, 128 or 256.

Figure I-23: Waveform Properties

for Stereo 3D.


3. Colour Comparison on the Vectorscope Display The basic Vectorscope display (see Section E.4) is a vector representation of the incoming waveform, in which the distance of any point from the centre of the display reflects the luma value of the corresponding pixel while the pixel colour is represented by the orientation of the point with respect to the centre of the display. To allow colour comparison between images, the OTM Vectorscope display has a 3D View mode in which the vector representation of the waveform from the Left/Input 1 image (shown in red) is overlaid by the vector representation of the waveform from the Right/Input 2 image (shown in cyan).

Figure I-24: Example 3D Vectorscope display.

The vector displays resulting from Left and Right images are typically similar in shape but displaced from each other where there are differences in the colour composition.

Selection The Vectorscope is the main display offered within the VECTOR category.


To set up the Vectorscope for colour comparison:

1. Feed the images to be compared into the ports corresponding to Inputs 1 and 2 (see Section C.3).

2. Use the VECTOR tile button to display the Vectorscope. (For more detailed instructions, see Section E.1.)

2. Select Vectorscope from the VECTOR section of the View Tile Browser. (For more detailed instructions, see Section E.1.)

3. Either: Select 3D View from the Button Bar. Or: Tick the 3D View option in the Properties control.







For further information, see Section I.4. Note: The easiest way to check the Channel Assignment is to look at one of the Depth displays described in Sections I.5 –I.7.

Display Properties The characteristics of the Vectorscope tile display are set by the tile’s Properties (shown right). The setting that is relevant to the ‘3D View’ is described below. The other more general settings are described in Section E.4.

3D View Tick this option to select the 3D version of the Vectorscope display. Clear this option to return to the single-input version of the display. The 3D View option on the Button Bar toggles between these two options.

Button Bar


Figure I-25: Vectorscope Properties for Stereo 3D.


4. Colour Comparison using Histogram Display Note: This option is only available where the VIDEO_XR_DCI software option is installed. The Histogram display presents colour histograms of the video that is currently being analysed (see Section H.2). When the Allow 3D Monitoring option is ticked, the Histogram display offers two possible ways of showing the differences between the colour components in the Left/Input 1 image and those in the Right/Input 2 image. One option is to overlay the colour histograms from the two images, showing the Left/Input 1 image in red and the Right/Input 2 image in cyan.

Figure I-26: 3D Histogram in Overlay mode.

The other is to display histograms constructed from the differences between the two images.

Figure I-27: 3D Histogram in Difference Mode.


Selection The Histogram is one of the displays offered within the GAMUT category.


To set up the Histogram for colour comparison:

1. Feed the images into the ports corresponding to Inputs 1 and 2 (see Section C.3).

2. Use the GAMUT tile button to display the Histogram. (For more detailed instructions, see Section E.1.)

3. Select Histogram from the GAMUT section of the View Tile Browser (For more detailed instructions, see Section E.1.)

4. Either: Select 3D View from the Button Bar. Or: Tick the 3D View option in the Properties control.






For further information, see Section I.4. Note: The easiest way to check that the Channel Assignment is correct is to look at one of the Depth displays described in Sections I.5 –I.7.

Display Properties The details of how the results from the two images are shown in the Histogram display are determined by the tile’s properties, a complete read-out of which is given in the Properties control. The properties that are relevant to comparing images are described below. The other more general settings are described in Section H.2. Shortcuts to some settings are provided through the Button Bar (Control Panel: press GENERAL or OTHER; Mouse/Keyboard: click on the tile to display).


Figure I-28: Histogram Properties for Stereo 3D.

3D View Tick this option to select the 3D version of the Histogram display. Clear the selection to return to the single-input version of the display. The 3D View option on the Button Bar toggles between these two options.

3D View Type The 3D View Type option within the Properties control selects between Overlaying the histogram data from the two images, and showing histograms of Difference values. Where the Overlay option is taken, the display shows histograms for each of the colour components in which the Left/Input 1 image (shown in red) overlaid by the histogram data from the Right/ Input 2 image (shown in cyan). Sections where the histograms overlap are shown in white. Where the Difference option is taken, the display comprises histograms for the separate colour components comprising the values for the Right/Input 2 image subtracted from those for the Left/Input 1 image. Where the Left/Input 1 image dominates, the difference histogram is above the zero line; where the Right/Input 1 image dominates, the difference histogram goes below the zero line.

Button Bar



I.10 Error Reporting

Limits can be placed on aspects of 3D video such as the range of depths covered and on the extent to which the Right-eye image differs from the Left-eye one (reflecting differences in camera setup). Similar differences between a non-3D image and a chosen reference image also provide camera setup information. As with other aspects of video status and error reporting, current values are reported through the Status Overview (called up as described in Section E.6) while the circumstances under which these values are reported as being in error are set within the 3D settings section of the Video Config page of the Config window (called up as described in Section T.2). The status details are also displayed in the form of a Status Summary (available via the Video button on the Status View Button Bar).

Figure I-29: 3D settings section of the Video Config page.

Figure I-30: 3D and Camera setup data shown in the Status Overview.


Figure I-31: 3D and camera setup data shown on the Video Status Summary pages.

The data is also shown graphically in the 3D Meters display, which is described in Section I.8.

Picture Analysis: Measurements (Stereo 3D video only) The Near error points and Far error points values give the number of the pixels for which the horizontal disparity was either less than (or more negative than) the Budget minimum or greater than the Budget maximum, respectively, as a percentage of the total number of pixels for which the horizontal disparity was determined. The Points not matched value gives the number of pixels for which the horizontal disparity could not be determined as a percentage of the total number of pixels in the screen display. Use the Video Config page of the Config window to specify the limit on acceptable maximum values for each of these parameters and whether instances should be reported as errors or just a warning given. Note: The OTM only looks for disparities in the range set by the Search minimum and maximum set on the System page of the Config window. Items in the image for which the disparity lies outside of the Search range will be missed and will not be recorded as errors. It is therefore important to ensure that the Search minimum and maximum are set appropriately.

Picture Analysis: Image Sharpness (Stereo 3D video only) The OTM determines image sharpness on a scale between 0 (very soft) and 1000 (very sharp) from the gradient of the edges it detects within the image. These values are reported in the Status Overview as Left picture sharpness and Right picture sharpness. (Where a single image is being compared against a Reference image, the Left picture sharpness reports the value for the Reference image, while the Right picture sharpness reports the value for the test image.) The difference between these sharpness values is reported as the Sharpness delta. The Sharpness delta limit setting on the Video page of the Config window allows you to specify acceptable limits on this difference and whether an error is reported or just a warning given when this difference is exceeded. Typically a Sharpness delta of more than 100 gives rise to a noticeable difference between the images.


Rig Alignment Camera set-up parameters determined when either the input from one camera is compared against a reference image or when the Right-eye image of a Stereo 3D pair is compared against the Left-eye image (selected through the 3D Meters display described in Section I.8):

Camera rotation (roll), expressed in degrees. The percentage difference in the zoom levels. Any horizontal offset between the images (expressed in the current disparity units, as set

on the System page of the Config window). Gives meaningful results where a test chart is used.

Any vertical offset between the images (expressed in lines). Use the Video Config page of the Config window to specify the limit on acceptable deviations and whether larger deviations should be reported as errors or just a warning given.

Picture Levels Another comparison that the OTM makes is of the colour components at matching points, from which it is able to deduce any differences between the colour gain and lift that has been applied to the test (Right-eye) image over those that have been applied to the reference (Left-eye) image. Acceptable limits and whether larger deviations should be reported as errors are specified through the Maximum <colour> Gain and Lift settings on the Video Config page of the Config window.

Set-Up and Disparity Constants (Stereo 3D video only) Both the Status Overview and the Status Summary display basic information about the 3D set-up, covering:

The sources that have been defined for the Left and Right channels

The dimensions defining the Viewer’s World (in metres)

The limits that have been defined for the Disparity Search and the Depth Budget (expressed in pixels, as a percentage of the screen width, and as the physical distance on the defined screen)

These values are set on the System page of the Config window.

Selected Point (Stereo 3D video only) For Stereo 3D video, values are also displayed for:

The Viewer’s World Coordinates at the point currently selected by the crosshair cursor

The horizontal disparity at that point (expressed in pixels, as a percentage of the screen width, and as the physical distance on the defined screen).

Where necessary, these values are extrapolated from nearby measured points.


Configuration Issues The following Configuration settings affect how the 3D/Camera Alignment status information is displayed:

Configure for Analysis The following settings are needed on the System page of the Config window:





Apply Automatic Corrections Also on the System page, Auto Gain Control and Auto correct Vertical Disparity should be ticked to maximise the number of matches that can be made.

3D Viewing Geometry (Stereo 3D video only) Details of the viewing geometry need to be recorded on the System page of the Config window. See Section I.4 for details.

Error Limits Acceptable limits need to be recorded for each of the parameters in the 3D Settings section of the Video Config page of the Config window, together with your choice of whether exceeding these limits should be reported as an error or simply cause a warning to be given. See Section T.4 for further details.

Display Properties See Section E.6

OmniTek OTM 1000 User Guide, v3.1 J-1

J : Event Handling The OTM 1000 offers a range of responses to specific conditions or transitions within the video stream that is being analysed. One response is to generate a list of these conditions and transitions as they occur, known as an ‘Event Log’. The OTM 1000 offers both a listing of such events as they happen (a ‘Live’ log) and the opportunity to save sequences of these events for further analysis and/or recording in an XML file. The OTM 1000 can also respond to events by generating an alarm and/or transmitting an SNMP alert. These functions all work independently. In addition, separate logs can be created of Momentary & Short-Term Loudness values (see Section J.2), and of captions embedded in the text and associated settings (see Section J.3). Both log entries and SNMP alerts can be marked with the machine time and/or VITC, ATC or LTC timecodes where present.

J.1 Event Logs

Overview The entries in an Event Log are all triggered by ‘events’. These events may correspond to a marker such as timecode or a closed caption being detected within the input video stream but they are most commonly associated with the detection of an error condition or the transition of the video stream into or out of a particular state. The conditions under which an error is reported are set through the Video Config and Audio Config pages of the Configuration window. These pages list the parameters of the video that your OTM system is able to monitor, and allows you to specify for each parameter:

1. The conditions under which the OTM should report an error 2. The level of error that should be reported – from ‘OK’ through ‘Warning’ to ‘Error’ 3. Whether the error should be logged in the ‘Event Log’ and/or cause an Alarm to be

generated and/or generate an SNMP alert. The following sections describe the different ways in which the OTM 1000 may respond to events. They also describe the options that are available for recording sections of the Live log on disk as ‘Session logs’ and for analysing these logs.

Event Log Display The Event Log is one of the analyses offered under the STATUS category. The Event Log automatically offers a ‘Live’ log, listing events as they happen on the currently selected input video stream. It can also display the results of one or more ‘logging sessions’, which may be started and stopped either manually or at specific points in the video being analysed. These logging sessions are started and stopped independently and may run concurrently. The resulting ‘Session logs’ can also be saved as XML files and analysed to show the frequency of the different types of event.


Figure J-1: Sample Event Log display.

The display is divided into two areas. The upper area of the display is given over to a ‘Session List’ of the logs that are currently available for inspection, together with any logging sessions that have been set up but not yet completed. The lower area is used to display details of the log that is selected in the upper part of the screen. This lower display may comprise either:

an historical ‘Event List’ (as shown above) or

a ‘Event Frequency tree’, giving an analysis of the frequency at which particular types of event have occurred, or

a snapshot of the status at the start of the logging session, or

a snapshot of the status at the end of the logging session. Further details of these displays are given below. Note: If a scroll bar is shown at the bottom of the display, there are further columns of information to be displayed. These can be brought into view with a mouse.

Selection The Event Log is a member of the STATUS category.


To display the Event Log:

Press the STATUS tile button until the Event Log display appears.

Select Event Log from the STATUS section of the View Tile Browser.



Upper Part of the Event Log

Figure J-2: Sample Session List

The upper part of the Event Log display comprises the Session List. The top entry in this list is always the Live log, which is automatically triggered to start running when the Event Log is selected for display. The other entries refer either to logging sessions that have been set-up since the OTM 1000 was last turned on (or reset) or to Session logs that have been loaded from disk. To make the Live log easy to pick out, its entry is shown against a white background. The information that may be displayed about any logging session includes:

The name of the log;

Its state (‘Pending’ (i.e. waiting to start), ‘Triggered’ (i.e. started), ‘Completed’ etc.);

The type of trigger used for the session (where applicable); and

Which input was analysed; In the first column of each entry is a coloured icon that indicates its error state as follows:

Green Free from error or, at least, no errors reported so far. (Note: Whether a user-defined session contained any errors is only reported once the session has been completed.)

Red One or more error events have occurred

The coloured icons provide a simple ‘green = good’; red = ‘not good’ indication in analogy to traffic lights. Guided by these markers, and the information shown in the Event List (see below), it should be straightforward to determine both what errors have occurred and where these occurred.


To pick out a particular log for further investigation:

Twist the HORIZ knob to move the focus to the required session in the Session List, then push the HORIZ knob.

Simply click on the entry in the Session List.

The lower part of the Event Log then switches to showing information about the selected log. Note: Snapshot start and end information about a session can only be displayed once the session has completed, while the Error Frequency tree shows an analysis of the errors up to the point that this view was selected.


Lower Part of the Event Log Note: To switch between the following displays: Take the View option on the Button Bar. (This cycles through the available displays.)

Event List

Figure J-3: Sample Event List

The Event List is a simple historical listing of the events that have been detected. To scroll through the list, twist the VERT knob or drag the scroll bar with a mouse. The events that are listed are all ones for which the Show in Log option is ticked on the Video Config and Audio Config pages of the Config window at the time the log is recorded. To minimise the number of entries shown, events are shown as starting on one particular frame then stopping on another, rather than each occurrence getting an individual entry. The information that may be displayed includes:

The type of transition: Start The named event started and continued for every frame End The named event had been occurring on every frame, but stopped at this point. Change The named event only occurred on this frame.

Details of the service being analysed (Service ID and Subchannel Index)

The name and ID of the Status parameter giving rise to the event

Additional descriptive information (where applicable), such as the number of frames between the start and the end of the named event

Timing information – taken either from embedded timecodes (where available) or from the system’s own clock

A maximum of 500 events can be scrolled through at any one time. This limits the Live log to the most recent 500 entries. Session logs can however be longer than this. Where the Session log contains more than 500 entries, the Event List is divided into pages of 500 entries which can be stepped between using the Next page and Previous page options on the Button Bar.


Event Frequency Tree

Figure J-4: Sample Event Frequency display

An alternative use for the lower part of the Event Log is to display Event Frequency Tree. This takes the form of a simple table, listing the different types of event that have been detected in the selected logging session and giving the number of each type of event that have been recorded. This type of summary can also be shown for the events currently listed in the Live log.

Snapshots of Start/End Status

Figure J-5: Sample Snapshot End display. (The Snapshot Start display is similar.)

For any completed logging session, the lower part of the Event Log may also be used to display a snapshot of the video status when the selected logging session was started and a similar snapshot of the video status when the logging session was stopped. The information is presented hierarchically in exactly the same way as it is presented in the Status Overview (see Section E.6). Sections of this hierarchy can also be scrolled through, opened or hidden using the HORIZ and VERT knobs in the same way as in the Status Overview.


Configuration Issues The events that may be recorded in the Event Log are the ones for which the Show in Log option is ticked on the Video Config and Audio Config pages of the Config window at the time the log is recorded.

Display Properties The various displays that make up the Event Log comprise information shown either as a table or as a tree. Which columns of information are included in the table and the widths of these columns may be set through the Properties control. Where a mouse is fitted, the widths of the columns can also be adjusted by dragging the appropriate column divide.

Properties Control The controls offered chiefly comprise separate Visible and Width controls (such as those shown above) for each column that may be displayed. The columns that make up the Session List and Event List tables are identified by their headings. Within the Event Frequency, Snapshot Start and Snapshot Stop trees, the columns are simply identified by number (counting from the left). The Properties control also includes a Reset columns option that makes all the columns visible at their default widths.

Figure J-6: Event Log Properties


Button Bar


Figure J-7: Event Log Button Bar.

The following is a summary of the options offered by the Button Bar (Control Panel: press GENERAL or OTHER; Mouse/Keyboard: click on tile to display). Session Calls up a menu of actions that apply to Session logging (see below) Start Starts a manual logging session (where a manual session has been defined) Stop Completes the selected manual logging session Clear Clears the current Live log listing View Cycles through the lower-screen displays that are available for the currently

selected log Open XML Available where the current log has been saved to disk to open the associated

XML file for inspection. Previous page Displays the previous 500 entries of a Session log (where these exist) Next page Displays the next 500 entries of a Session log (where these exist)

Event Log: Live Log The Live log is a rolling list of events which is automatically added to from the time the Event Log is displayed. Up to 500 events can be displayed. The Live log is always the first entry in the Session List. It is also always shown against a white background. It cannot be either saved to disk or deleted, but it can be analysed with regard to the frequency of events and existing entries can be cleared from the list.


To clear the current Live log and start afresh:

Take the Clear option from the Button Bar.


Event Log: Session Logs Sequences of events may be picked out for separate analysis. The resulting Session logs (together with time and date information) may be stored on disk, from where they can be reloaded if required.

Defining the Session The first step in recording a Session log is to define whether the logging session is to be started and stopped manually, or automatically triggered by timecodes or PC time. In the later case, you also need to specify the triggers to be used.


To define a Session Log:

1. Take the New option from the Session menu (called up from the Button Bar). 2. Set the details of the session in the dialogue that is displayed. 3. Take the OK option from the dialogue’s Button Bar.

Figure J-8: New Session dialogue

Note: The details of the session can be changed right up to the point at which the session is started. To make any changes, call up the Session menu as above and take the Edit option. The required changes can then be made in the dialogue that is displayed.

Starting/Stopping the log Sessions that are set to be triggered by timecodes or by the system clock are started and stopped under the control of the OTM 1000. The steps used to start/stop a manual log are as follows.


To start a manual log:

1. Check that the focus is on the required session in the Session List. 2. Select the ‘Start’ option on the Button Bar. To stop a manual log:

1. Check that the focus is on the required session in the Session List. 2. Select the ‘Stop’ option on the Button Bar.


Saving to Disk The log entries associated with any logging session are initially written to a temporary file. The Event List can subsequently be saved to your Log Files Folder (see Section U.2) as an XML file, together with the start and finish Status snapshots.


To save the log to your Log Files Folder:

1. Check that the focus is on the required session in the Session List.

2. Take the Save option from the Session menu (called up from the Button Bar).

3. Set the name for the file in the File Selector that is displayed (or accept the default ddmmyy_hhmmss name).

The contents of this file can be inspected by taking the Open XML file option that is included on the Button Bar. If required, it can be exported from this location using the Manage Disk open included in the Session menu – as described in Section U.

Recalling from Disk Logs from previous sessions that have been saved as described above can be loaded back into memory for further inspection.


To recall a log saved to disk:

1. Take the Load option from the Session menu (called up from the Button Bar).

2. Use the File Selector that is displayed to pick out the required XML file.

The saved Session Log is then added to the Session List, where it can be selected and the details from it displayed in the same way as for the other entries in the Session List.

Deleting


To remove a session log from the Session List:

1. Move the focus to the session in the Session List. 2. Take the Delete option from the Session menu (called up from

the Button Bar).

Note: The Live log cannot be deleted but it can be cleared by selecting the Clear option from the Button Bar. You should also note that the above delete procedure just removes the Session Log from the list shown on the screen. It doesn’t delete any associated log file that has been saved on disk.


J.2 Loudness Logs

Loudness Log Display

Figure J-9: Example Loudness Log display

The Loudness Log display provides a way of recording Momentary and Short-Term Loudness values on disk for analysis outside the OTM application. Several such logs can be recorded at the same time. These logs can either be recorded manually or they can be created to a defined schedule that caters both for one-off logs and for logs created as part of a continuous sequence. The start-point of a scheduled log or log sequence is defined either by a specified time on the OTM’s built-in clock or by a specified timecode embedded in the video. The end-point can be defined similarly: alternatively you can define the duration of an individual log e.g. within a continuous sequence. The display comprises a list of Loudness logs that have been defined since the display was called up. Each entry in the list shows whether the log is pending i.e. waiting to start (hourglass symbol), recording (red blob) or recorded (file symbol) – together with whether it was a ‘Single’ (i.e. one-off) log or part of a ‘Continuous’ sequence, the triggers for the start and stop, and, once it has completed, the file name under which it is stored. The logs comprise Momentary,‘Sliding’ (Short-Term) and ‘Integrated’ Loudness and Loudness Range values as measured every second and calculated for each possible interpretation of the input audio stream (as defined on the Audio Inputs page of the Config window). These values are recorded along with the PC time and any timecodes embedded in the video. The data that is collected is written as a CSV file to a Loudness Logs folder either within your User area on the OTM or within your chosen Log Files Folder (see Section U.2). The filename it is given records the date and PC time at which the log finished. The Manage Disk facility described in Section U can then be used to copy this and other Loudness Logs, for example to a USB stick, for analysis outside the OTM application.

Selection The Loudness Log display is a member of the STATUS category


To call up the Loudness Log display:

Press the STATUS tile button until the Loudness Log is displayed.

Select Loudness Log from the STATUS section of the View Tile Browser.



Button Bar The following is a summary of the options offered by the Button Bar.


Record Starts a manual log. Add Calls up a dialogue through which logs triggered by PC Time or Timecodes

may be scheduled. Edit May be used while the log is pending to call up the definition of the selected

log and make any required changes. Remove May be used while the log is pending to remove it from the list. Start May be used to start a pending log ahead of schedule. Pause (When shown) May be used to pause a log that is being recorded. The

button is then renamed Restart. Stop Used to complete a manual log. May also be used to end a log ahead of

schedule. The data is then recorded in a file and the display updated with the details of this file.

Manage Disk Provides access to the Manage User Files dialogue through which Loudness Logs and other ‘User’ items can be transferred between systems (see Section U).

Note: Some Loudness data is also recorded in the Event Log (see Section J.1).

Recording Loudness Logs The following steps may be used within the Loudness Log display to generate .CSV files containing the measured Loudness values. These logs may be either started and stopped manually or created to a defined schedule. Initially the logs are placed in a Loudness Logs folder within either your User Area or a pre-defined Log Files Folder (see Section U.2). The Manage Disk facility described in Section U may be used to transfer the files from there for analysis outside the OTM. The number of logs that can be recorded is limited solely by the capacity of the disk.


Recording a log manually


1. At the point you want to start the log, select Record from the Button Bar. 2. Should you want to pause the recording, select Pause from the Button Bar, then select

Restart to continue. 3. To stop recording, select Stop from the Button Bar.

The log is then saved under a default name which includes the date and time the recording finished.

Scheduling a One-off Log


1. Press the GENERAL knob to display the Button Bar.

1. Click on the tile to display the Button Bar.

2. Take the Add option from the Button Bar. 3. Set the name under which the log is to be stored (or accept the offered name).

The log will be stored as <name>_<date>_<time>_<n>.csv where <date>_<time> records the finish time of the log and <n> is the number of the input from which the data is taken.

4. Set the Start Trigger to Time (or PC Time) or Timecode as appropriate, and set the details in the following ‘Time’ slot.

5. Set the End Time/Timecode in the equivalent Time slot associated with the End Trigger. (If you are working with PC Times, you can alternatively use this slot to set the Duration of the log. This can be up to 24 hours)

6. Take the OK option. The log is then added to the display as pending, to be started and stopped in accordance with the specified triggers.

Scheduling a Continuous Sequence of Logs



1. Click on the tile to display the Button Bar.


The logs will be stored as <name>_<date>_<time>_<n>.csv where <date>_<time> records the finish time of each log and <n> is the number of the input from which the data is taken.

4. Set the Start Trigger to Continuous, and set the start-time in the following ‘Time’ slot. 5. Under the End Trigger, set the Duration of the individual logs (which can be up to 24 hours). 6. Take the OK option.

The log is then added to the display as pending, to be started at the start time. At the end of the given duration, the current log is closed and a new log is started – and this is repeated until either the sequence is stopped or there is no more room on the disk.


Editing/Removing Scheduled Logs Note: The steps described here edit or remove the details of a log that is waiting to be recorded. Use the steps described in Section U.5 to remove logs that have been completed.


To edit the details of a Scheduled Log:


2. Select the log that you want to edit e.g. by twisting the VERT knob.

1. Click on the tile to display the Button Bar. 2. Click on the log that you want to edit.

3. Take the Edit option from the Button Bar, and make whatever changes you require. Note: The Edit option is only offered where the selected log is ‘pending’.

To remove a log from the schedule:


2. Select the log that you want to remove e.g. by twisting the VERT knob.

1. Click on the tile to display the Button Bar. 2. Click on the log that you want to remove.

3. Take the Remove option from the Button Bar. Note: The Remove option is only offered where the selected log is ‘pending’.


J.3 Closed Caption Log

Figure J-10: Example Closed Caption Log

The Closed Caption Log provides a record of the closed captions delivered in the video data stream, together with sequence information, timecode data (where available) and a record of the PC clock time. Options include displaying a Live log of the Closed Captions contained in the video data stream, ‘freezing’ the Live log and saving sections of the log on disk as XML files for inspection on a subsequent occasion. As with the Loudness Logs described above, these saved logs can either be recorded manually or they can be created to a defined schedule covering both one-off logs and logs generated in a continuous sequence. The Closed Caption Log display is divided into two parts. The upper part is used for a ‘Log List’ of the logs that have been scheduled or recorded so far. The lower part of the display is chiefly used to display the Live log. A different Button Bar is associated with each part. The Live Log comprises a list of the latest captions to be detected in the video data stream, together with associated timing information (embedded timecodes and PC clock time). Up to 100 entries can be displayed. The data is arranged in columns. The widths of the columns can be readily adjusted to suit the needs of the data being displayed (see ‘Adjusting the Column Widths’, below). The Log List comprises a list of the Closed Caption logs that have been defined since the display was called up. Each entry in the list shows whether the log is pending i.e. waiting to start (hourglass symbol), recording (red blob) or recorded (file symbol) – together with whether it was a ‘Single’ (i.e. one-off) log or part of a ‘Continuous’ sequence, the triggers for the start and stop, and, once it has completed, the file name under which it is stored. Any one log records captions of a particular caption type. For the Live Log, this is selected either in the Properties control or by using the Caption Type option on the Button Bar to cycle through the options. For scheduled logs, the Caption Type is set when the log is being defined. For most types of caption, there is also the option of recording the raw data from which the caption has been taken while for CEA-708 captions, there is the additional option of displaying service information. Note: Some details of closed captions are also recorded in the Event Log (see Section J.1).

Selection The Closed Caption Log display is a member of the STATUS category


To call up the Closed Caption Log display:

Press the STATUS tile button until the Closed Caption Log is displayed.

Select Closed Caption Log from the STATUS section of the View Tile Browser.



Configuration Issues

Log Type Different logs can be recorded depending on whether you want to record just the captions or whether you want to record the raw packet data as well. With CEA-708 captions, you also have the option of showing the embedded windowing commands. The selection of the information to be displayed is set individually for each type of caption on the Video Config page of the Config window.

Teletext Page Where either PAL or OP-47 teletext is logged, the page on which the captions are supplied also needs to be recorded on the Video Config page of the Config window.

Display Properties Other aspects of the Closed Caption Log are determined by the tile’s properties, a complete read-out of which is given in the Properties control (Control Panel: press PROPS to display). Shortcuts to some of the settings are provided through the Button Bar (Control Panel: press GENERAL; Mouse/Keyboard: click on tile to display)

Properties Control

Figure J-11: Closed Caption Log Properties

Caption Type The Caption Type option in the Properties control selects the message type that is displayed in the Live Log from a list of the supported types. The corresponding option on the Button Bar cycles through the available message types. (If you don’t know what type of caption is included in the video stream, you can find this out from the Status Overview or the AUX Status Summary (see Section E.6).

Show Timecode The tick boxes within the Show Timecode section of the Properties control allow selection of the timestamps displayed as part of the Live Log.


Live Log Button Bar


The following is a summary of the options offered by the Button Bar when the Live Log is selected. Schedule Switches from the Live Log to the Log List. Clear Clears the current Live Log listing Freeze/Unfreeze see ‘Freezing the Display’ below. Caption Type Cycles round the supported caption types, refreshing the Live Log on each

selection. Record Selecting Record starts the manual recording of the caption data to an XML

file and switches the focus to the Log List. Selecting Stop from the replacement Button Bar completes the recording. The recording is then added to the Log List at the top of the screen.

Manage Disk Provides access to the Manage User Files dialogue through which Closed Caption Logs and other ‘User’ items can be transferred between systems (see Section U).

Log List Button Bar


The following is a summary of the options offered by the Button Bar when the Log List is selected. Live Switches from the Log List to the Live Log. Add Calls up a dialogue through which logs triggered by PC Time or Timecodes

may be scheduled. Edit May be used with a pending log to call up the definition of the selected log

and make any required changes. Remove May be used to remove a pending log from the schedule. Start May be used to start a pending log ahead of schedule. Pause (When shown) May be used to pause a log that is being recorded. The

button is then renamed Restart. Stop Used to complete a manual log. May also be used to end a scheduled log

before its scheduled end-point. The data is then recorded in a file and the display updated with the details of this file.

Open File Opens the Closed Caption Log currently selected in the Log List. Close File (When shown) Closes the Closed Caption Log that is currently open. Manage Disk Provides access to the Manage User Files dialogue through which Closed

Caption Logs and other ‘User’ items can be transferred between systems (see Section U).


The Live Log The following three actions are associated with the Live Log.

Freezing the Live Log Selecting the Live Log and taking the Freeze option on the Button Bar freezes the live caption log display. It is then possible to inspect up to 100 captions displayed prior to that point, together with sequence information and any raw data and timecodes that have been selected for display. Twisting the VERT knob scrolls through the caption items. The live caption log continues when Unfreeze is selected.

Adjusting the Column Widths It is possible to adjust the widths of the columns of the Live Log, both with and without using a mouse.


To adjust the column widths:

1. Either: Twist the VERT knob until the cursor moves up from the top of the list to the line of headings. Or: Press the VERT knob either once or twice to move the cursor to this line of headings.

2. Twist the HORIZ knob to select the column whose width you want to change.

3. Press the HORIZ knob, then either turn it clockwise to increase the width of the column or turn it anticlockwise to decrease this width.

4. Press the HORIZ knob again, then twist to move on to the next heading you want to adjust.

5. Finish by either twisting the VERT knob to move to the first line of the listing or pressing the VERT knob to move to the last line of the current list.

Simply drag the divisions between the columns.

Clearing the Live Log Selecting the Clear option on the Button Bar clears the current entries from the Live Log.


Recording Closed Caption Logs The following steps may be used within the Closed Caption Log display to save closed caption data for further examination both within the OTM application and by an external application. The data is saved as an XML file. Files containing raw data (where requested) are indicated by _bin in their filename. These logs may be either started and stopped manually or created to a defined schedule. Initially the logs are placed in a Closed Caption Logs folder within either your User Area or a pre-defined Log Files Folder (see Section U.2). The Manage Disk facility described in Section U may be used to transfer the files from there for analysis outside the OTM. The number of logs that can be recorded is limited solely by the capacity of the disk.

Figure J-12: Example of the recorded log

Saving a Closed Caption Log Manually


1. Move the focus to the Live Log e.g. by selecting Live from the Button Bar (if offered). 2. Start the recording by selecting the Record option on the Button Bar.

As well as starting the recording, the focus switches to the Log List shown at the top of the display.

3. When the point is reached when you want to stop the recording, select the Stop recording option offered on the Button Bar.

The recorded log is then both added to the Log List and saved as a .XML file .

To return to the Live Log:

1. Select the Live option offered on the Button Bar.


Scheduling a One-off (‘Single’) Log


1. Move the focus to the Log List and press the GENERAL knob to display the Button Bar.

1. Click on the Log List to both move the focus to this list and display the Button Bar.


The log will be stored as <name>_<date>_<time>_<n>.xml where <date>_<time> records the finish time of the log and <n> is the number of the input from which the data is taken.

4. Set the type of Caption to be recorded. 5. Set the Start Trigger to Time (or PC Time) or Timecode as appropriate, and set the details

in the following ‘Time’ slot. 6. Set the End Time/Timecode in the equivalent Time slot associated with the End Trigger.

(If you are working with PC Times, you can alternatively use this slot to set the Duration of the log. This can be up to 24 hours)

7. Take the OK option.

The log is then added to the display as ‘pending’, to be started and stopped in accordance with the specified triggers.

Scheduling a Continuous Sequence of Logs




2. Take the Add option from the Button Bar. 3. Set the name under which the logs are to be stored (or accept the offered name).

The files will be stored as <name>_<date>_<time>_<n>.csv where <date>_<time> records the finish time of each log and <n> is the number of the input from which the data is taken.

4. Set the type of Caption to be recorded. 5. Set the Start Trigger to Continuous, and set the start-time in the following ‘Time’ slot. 6. Under the End Trigger set the Duration of any individual log (which can be up to 24 hours). 7. Take the OK option.

The log is then added to the display as ‘pending’, to be started at the start time. At the end of the given duration, the current log is closed and a new log is started – and this is repeated until either the sequence is stopped or there is no more room on the disk.


Editing/Removing Scheduled Logs Note: The details of a scheduled log can only be edited or removed while its status is ‘pending’. Use the steps described in Section U.5 to remove logs that have been recorded.


To edit the details of a Scheduled Log:


2. Select the log that you want to edit by twisting the VERT knob.


2. Click on the log you want to edit.

3. Take the Edit option from the Button Bar, and make whatever changes you require. Note: The Edit option is only offered where the selected log is ‘pending’.

To remove a log from the schedule:


2. Select the log that you want to remove by twisting the VERT knob.


2. Click on the log you want to remove.

3. Take the Remove option from the Button Bar. Note: The Remove option is only offered where the selected log is ‘pending’.

Inspecting Saved Logs The contents of a Closed Caption Log can be inspected from within the Closed Caption Log display as follows:



2. Select the log that you want to inspect by twisting the VERT knob.


2. Click on the log you want to inspect.

3. Select the Open File option offered on the Button Bar. 4. When you have finished inspecting the log, take the Close File option that’s offered on the

Button Bar.


J.4 SNMP

The OTM 1000 supports remote control using the SNMP protocol. SNMP stands for Simple Network Management Protocol and it is commonly used in production line testing both to run the required test sequence and to monitor the instrument under test for conditions that warrant attention from the controlling PC. The protocol is based around SNMP commands sent by the controlling PC to the instrument under test, and SNMP trap signals generated by the instrument when selected conditions occur. The commands that are supported are detailed in a MIB file. The conditions detected within the video stream that generate SNMP trap signals are defined by the user as part of the OTM 1000’s Video Configuration and Audio Configuration (see Section T). Each item that is ticked in the SNMP Trap column of the control window will cause an SNMP trap to be sent each time the specified error condition occurs, or clears. For example, if the SNMP Trap option is ticked for the Luminance parameter, the OTM 1000 will transmit an SNMP trap when the luminance drops below the specified threshold, and again when the luminance rises above this threshold. Further information about setting up and using the OTM 1000 under SNMP control is given in Appendix II.


OmniTek OTM 1000 User Guide, v3.1a K-1

K : Audio Monitoring Each analyser within the OTM 1000 is able to analyse up to 16 audio channels alongside the video images it processes. This section describes the possible sources for this audio and describes the different analyses that may be applied. It also describes how the audio may be played back. The facilities described here are mainly provided as standard but the AUDIO_LOUD option is required to display True Peak data and the various Loudness data described in Section K.4. Note: The AUDIO_LOUD option is automatically installed for anyone who purchased the earlier AUDIO option.

K.1 Audio Input

There are a number of possible sources for the audio analysed by the OTM 1000:

Embedded audio

AES/EBU audio (8 channels max.)

Dolby-encoded audio, delivered alongside embedded audio In addition, the OTM 1000 is able to interpret embedded audio and AES/EBU audio either as simple stereo pairs or as surround sound. (With Dolby-encoded audio, the way in which the channels are interpreted is defined within the Dolby metadata.) These options result in a range of possible ‘Audio Inputs’ for each analyser to work with: Embedded pairs; Embedded Surround sound; AES pairs; AES surround sound and SDI Dolby. The OTM is also able to present the results of selected stereo mix-downs. Which of these options are offered on any system depend on which software options are installed. The OTM’s basic audio facilities allow embedded audio delivered via either SDI port to be interpreted either as Pairs or as Surround sound. Analysing AES/EBU audio requires the AUDIO_AES option to be installed. Analysing Dolby audio requires the appropriate AUDIO_DOLBY options to be installed. The range of Audio Inputs that are available for processing by the built-in analyser/analysers is shown on the Audio Inputs page of the Config window (described in Section T.6). This page also allows the user to specify how the different channels of the physical audio input are used. The OTM 1000 offers a choice of analyses that can be applied to audio data, from PPMs to Lissajous figures showing the phase relationship between different channels. These are described in the following sections. The Audio Status display lists data for all the audio inputs available to be analysed alongside the selected video input. An Audio Input option is offered with other displays to allow the display to be switched to the required audio source. The selected input is named in the title of the display and is retained (along with the selected channel pair) as you cycle through the different Audio displays. Note: The special features of working with AES/EBU audio are described in Section K.8, while the special features of working with Dolby audio are described in Section L.


K.2 PPMs Display

The PPM View comprises PPM meters displaying the audio levels on the selected audio channel pairs, together with simple phase meters that indicate the phase difference between the components of each channel pair. These phase meters provide a quick visual report of the correlation between the audio data in the two channels that make up the stereo pair.

Figure K-1: Example PPMs display (Embedded audio).

Where the audio input is configured to be handled as pairs, the display comprises up to eight PPM pairs (as shown above). For any surround sound displays, the number of PPM pairs is reduced to four or five representing the L+R, C + LFE, Ls + Rs, Bsl + Bsr (where defined) and the selected Stereo Mix Down components of a 5.1 or 7.1 Surround Sound arrangement. (For further information, see Section K.3.) The display is created by comparing in real time the audio levels in the data stream against the thresholds set as part of the OTM’s Audio Configuration (see Section T.3). Channels that contain Dolby audio rather than embedded audio are marked Dolby E or Dolby D as appropriate. Channels that don’t contain any audio are shown as grey. Where a channel exceeds the specified ‘Over’ level, it is marked ‘OVER’; where it falls below the specified ‘Silence’ level, it is marked ‘SILENCE’. Where a channel is consistently sampled all-high over a specified number of fields/frames, it is marked ‘CLIP’. Similarly, where it is consistently sampled zero over the specified number of fields/frames, it is marked ‘MUTE’. The channels are similarly marked to show when audio CRC errors are detected and when the Z-bits are found to be incorrectly spaced. The pair of channels currently selected for play back is indicated by a grey line over the channels (which changes to orange while the selected channels are being played) - or alternatively by a red line when these channels are being played out but are muted. The PPMs can be set to mimic a particular type of audio meter, both in the graticule that is used and the meter ballistics, or, where the AUDIO_LOUD option is installed, they can be set to show ‘True Peak’ values (calculated using a 4x oversample of the audio signal). Figure K-1 shows the Audio Meter version of the display, the Red, Yellow, Green colouration of which shows in traditional fashion how the output compares with the selected Permitted


Maximum and Alignment reference levels. The choice of metering ballistics and graticules to use for these PPMs is made through the Audio Config page of the Config window. The type of metering being used is shown alongside the type of audio in the window title. The alternative True Peak version of the display is shown in Figure K-2. Values here are compared against the Maximum True Peak level recorded on the Audio Config page of the Config window (see Section T.2).

Figure K-2: Example True Peak display.

Peak Hold lines may optionally be added to the display as the input data stream is processed. These may be configured to show either the maximum value attained over a period of 1 second or over the whole test (see below). The same general steps are involved in working with this display as are used with other Views. (See Section E.1)

Selection The PPMs View is a member of the AUDIO category.


To display Audio PPMs:

Press the AUDIO tile button until the PPMs display appears.

Select PPM from the AUDIO section of the View Tile Browser.



Configuration Issues The following Configuration settings affect how PPMs are displayed:

Channel Allocation The stereo pairs displayed and the order in which these appear is set by editing the details for the selected audio service on the Audio Inputs page of the Config window (see Section T.6).

Graticule + Ballistics The OTM supports a wide range of metering types, each with its own graticule and meter ballistics. The type of meter that is imitated is selected on the Audio Config page of the Config window (see Section T.3).

Reference, Clip Level etc. Settings The levels at which the bars of the displays are coloured red/yellow/green (as appropriate) are determined by the Reference Level settings on the Audio Config page of the Config window. Other levels set on that page control when the bars become marked OVER etc. (see Section T.3)

Display Properties Other aspects of how the audio PPMs are displayed are determined by the tile’s properties, a complete read-out of which is given in the Properties control (Control Panel: press PROPS to display). However, the Button Bar provides useful shortcuts (Control Panel: press GENERAL or OTHER; Mouse/Keyboard: click on tile to display).

Properties Control

Figure K-3: Audio PPM Properties.

Button Bar



Audio Input The Audio Input option in the Properties control selects between the available audio inputs (see Section K.1). The Button Bar Audio Input option cycles through the possible sources for the display.

Meter Type The Meter Type option in the Properties control selects between the Audio Meter version of the PPMs display and the True Peak version. The Button Bar Meter Type option toggles between these two options.

Show Hold Peak Hold lines may be shown on the PPM display. These lines are configurable to show either the maximum value attained over a period of 1 second or over the whole test. The Show Hold setting in the Properties control offers three options: On or Off or Infinite. Selecting On configures the Hold lines to mark the maximum value attained over periods of 1 second, while selecting Infinite configures the lines to mark the maximum value attained over the whole test. The Button Bar Show Hold option cycles through the three possible settings for the Hold lines.

Reset The Button Bar Reset option resets the calculation of the Peak Hold value.

Mute The Button Bar Mute option refers to the sound level when the audio is played back (see Section K.9).

Error Reporting Errors are typically reported both by colouring or overwriting the relevant part of the display and through the Status Display (see Section K.7). In the True Peak version of the display, values that exceed the Maximum True Peak value are displayed in red. In the Audio Meter version of the display, channels that exceed the levels defined in the Audio Configuration (see Section T.3) are additionally marked CLIP, OVER, SILENCE or MUTE. If the output exceeds the Over level defined in the Audio Configuration, this is recorded by showing the word ‘OVER’ as an in-bar message on the appropriate channel of the display. Similarly if the output falls below the specified Silence level, the word ‘SILENCE’ is added to the appropriate channel. Clip and Mute states are determined differently. A channel will be marked ‘CLIP’ if it is consistently sampled all-high over the number of fields/frames specified in the Audio Configuration. Similarly, where a channel is consistently sampled zero over the specified number of fields/frames, it will be marked ‘MUTE’. The detection of audio CRC errors and errors in the spacing of Z-bits are also reported both on the relevant bar of the display and in the Status Display.


K.3 Surround Sound

Audio intended for use in a Surround Sound configuration may be analysed either:

As 5.1 or 7.1 ‘Surround Sound’ versions of the audio input that are analysed in the same way as other audio but with individual channels selected and labelled as L, R, C etc. according to their intended use (as defined on the Audio Inputs page of the Config window or, in the case of Dolby audio, as defined by the associated Dolby metadata)

Through special ‘Surround Sound’ displays such as the Surround Sound View described below that present 5.1 data in a form that is particularly appropriate to the use of the channels to provide Surround Sound.

The OTM can also display data relating to the Stereo Downmix generated from the Surround Sound channels following one of the standard formulae – as described below.

Stereo Mix Down The channels of 5:1 Surround Sound are typically mixed down either to a conventional stereo pair or to a ‘matrix surround encoded’ stereo pair. The way in which this mixing is done is specified in the ATSC Digital Audio Compression Standard (AC-3), which defines formulae for calculating and then scaling the Lo and Ro components of a conventional stereo pair and the Lt and Rt components of a matrix surround encoded stereo pair from the L, C, R, Ls and Rs channels, together with formulae for optionally including the LFE channel in the final L and R stereo pair. The OTM uses the Dolby Prologic version of Lt + Rt, together with a Dolby ProLogic II-compatible version (referred to here as Lt/Rt II). A similar approach taken with 7.1 Surround Sound. The only difference is that the Ls used in the formulae is a 50:50 mix of the Ls and Bsl channels (each reduced by 6dB) while the Rs used in the formulae is a similar 50:50 mix of the Rs and Bsr channels. The OTM gives the option of showing Lo/Ro, Lt/Rt or Lt/Rt II alongside L, C, R, Ls and Rs in displays showing either ‘Surround Sound’ or ‘Dolby’ audio inputs. Information about these signals also appears in the Status Display, where the derived signals are treated as Channels 17 and 18. The way in which these signals are determined depends on whether the audio input is embedded, AES or Dolby. When working with Embedded or AES audio, the formulae used are: Lo = L + cmixlev * C + surmixlev * Ls (cmixlev, surmixlev are fields within the bsi data) Ro = R + cmixlev * C + surmixlev * Rs Lt = L + C * (-3dB) – Ls * (-3dB) – Rs * (-3dB) for ‘Lt/Rt’ Rt = R + C * (-3dB) + Ls * (-3dB) + Rs * (-3dB) Lt = L + C * (-3dB) – Ls * (-1.2dB) – Rs * (-6.2dB) for ‘Lt/Rt II’ Rt = R + C * (-3dB) + Ls * (-6.2dB) + Rs * (-1.2dB) Where the option to include the LFE channel is taken, LFE * lfemixlev * (-4.5dB) is added prior to scaling. The type of downmix that is shown is selected through the Stereo Mix Down/Mode option on the Audio Config page of the Config window.


Surround Sound View The display illustrated below provides an alternative presentation of surround sound.

Figure K-4: Example Surround Sound display.

This comprises PPMs showing the levels of the five main surround-sound channels, orientated according to their ultimate location in space (L, R, C etc.), together with a ‘Loudness’ meter (if supported: see Section K.4 below). The LFE channel, which would ideally be shown perpendicular to the centre of the display, is shown as a separate horizontal meter bar at the bottom of the display. As in other PPM displays (see Section K.2), the PPMs can be set to mimic a particular type of audio meter or, where the AUDIO_LOUD option is installed, they can be set to show ‘True Peak’ values. Overlaid on each PPM is a loudness scale, used to indicate the momentary loudness on each channel (where supported). The blue outline joins the momentary loudness values on the L, R, C, Ls and Rs channels. The ‘ball’ in the central area of the display represents the Center of Sound. (Again, further information is given in Section K.4 below.) The individual PPMs of the display are created in the same way as the PPMs of the standard PPM View, and are both coloured and marked (and configured) in the same way as the standard Audio PPMs (see above). As in the standard PPM display, channels that don’t contain any audio are shown as grey and Peak Hold lines may optionally be added to the display. The same general steps are involved in working with this display as are used with other Views. (See Section E.1)


Note: The default allocation of the input audio channels to surround-sound components is as follows:

L Channel 1 Ls Channel 5 R Channel 2 Rs Channel 6 C Channel 3 Bsl Channel 7

LFE Channel 4 Bsr Channel 8

Table K-1: Standard allocation of Surround Sound channels.

The allocation of channels to surround-sound components can be changed channel by channel through the Audio Inputs page of the Config window.

Selection The Surround Sound View is a member of the AUDIO category.


To display the Surround Sound View:

Press the AUDIO tile button until the Surround Sound display appears

Select Surround Sound from the AUDIO section of the View Tile Browser.


Configuration Issues The following Configuration settings affect the Surround Sound display:

Channel Allocation The allocation of channels to L, R, C etc. is predefined for Dolby audio. For embedded or AES audio, it is set by editing the details for the selected audio service on the Audio Inputs page of the Config window (see Section T.6).

Graticule + Ballistics The OTM 1000 supports a wide range of metering types, each with its own graticule and meter ballistics. The metering type to be applied is selected on the Audio Config page of the Config window (see Section T.3).

Reference Level etc. Settings The levels at which the bars of the displays are coloured red/yellow/green (as appropriate) are determined by the Reference Level settings on the Audio Config page of the Config window (see Section T.3).

Display Properties Other aspects of the Surround Sound display are determined by the tile’s properties, a complete read-out of which is given in the Properties control (Control Panel: press PROPS to display). However, the Button Bar provides useful shortcuts (Control Panel: press GENERAL or OTHER; Mouse/Keyboard: click on the tile to display).


Properties Control

Figure K-5: Surround Sound Audio PPM Properties.

Button Bar



Meter Type The Meter Type option in the Properties control selects between the Audio Meter version of the PPMs display and the True Peak version. The Button Bar Meter Type option toggles between these two options.

Loudness Scale The Loudness Scale option selects the graticule used for Program Loudness meter shown to the right of the Surround Sound display. For further information, see Section K.4 below.

Loudness Units The Loudness Units option selects the units in which the Loudness target and the Program loudness (shown below the Program Loudness meter) are expressed. Further information is given in Section K.4.

Show Hold and Reset These options control the display of Peak Hold lines in exactly the same way as on the Audio PPMs display. In particular, the Button Bar Show Hold option cycles through the three possible settings for the Hold lines while the Reset option resets the calculation of the Peak Hold value.



K.4 Loudness

Note: The displays described in this section require the AUDIO_LOUD option to be installed. How loud the audio associated with a video seems to any listener is essentially a subjective assessment but one for which objective measures have recently be defined for the United States in ATSC recommendation A/85 and for Europe in ITU-R BS.1770. The OTM 1000 assesses loudness in accordance with the recommendations made in BS.1770-2 and EBU R128. Three measures are made on any channel pair:

Momentary Loudness, which is a weighted average over a short period (set by default to 400ms)

Short-term Loudness, which is the same weighted average but calculated over a ‘window’ spanning the last n seconds (with n set by default to 3.000s)

Integrated Loudness, which is a similarly weighted average but determined in this case over the whole time from when this average was last reset (typically at the start of the current programme) and only taking into account those occasions when the loudness was above a certain ‘gating’ level known as the Relative Gate. The target figure for this average is known as the Target Loudness.

In addition: (i) The OTM also calculates Loudness Range values in accordance with the EBU –

TECH 3342 supplement to EBU R128. Note: The way in which this range is calculated is specifically chosen to prevent silence or fade-out at one extreme or e.g. gunshots at the other extreme dominating the resulting figure.

(ii) Where Surround Sound inputs are selected, a set of Program values for Momentary, Short-term and Integrated Loudness are calculated which combine the Loudness levels measured for the individual L, C, R, Ls and Rs Surround Sound channels, again in accordance with BS.1770-2.

With the exception of Loudness Range which is required to be expressed in LU, these values may be expressed in any of the following units:

LU: Loudness Units above/below the desired target loudness. (1LU is approximately 1dB)

LUFS: Loudness Units relative to Full Scale (This is the unit used by the EBU)

LKFS: Unit equivalent to LUFS that is used in United States. Any of these units may be selected both for graticules and for displaying the Target value and the Integrated Loudness values, and are automatically used across the various different Loudness displays. As well as working with a Relative Gate (see above), the OTM also employs a Safety gate (set by default to –70LUFS/LKFS) that ensures that loudness measurement only starts when the audio signal starts. The Momentary, Short-Term and Integrated Loudness values obtained are reported for individual channel pairs in the Loudness View, while an overall ‘Program’ assessment is shown both on Surround Sound versions of the Loudness View and alongside the Surround Sound version of the PPM display. In addition, this Surround Sound View includes an outline between the component PPMs that gives a visual representation of the distribution of the loudness, together with a ‘Centre of Sound’ marker.


The OTM also offers plots of Loudness Range (LRA) and Loudness History, the latter being displayed either as an historical trace or as a histogram (see below). The option is also offered to display the current value of the Integrated Loudness, together with Short-term Loudness and the Loudness Range where space allows, alongside details of the maximum Short-term Loudness and the maximum Loudness Range that have been experienced since the display was last reset. The values that are calculated are also included among the information shown in the Audio Status Summary and in the Audio section of the Status Overview (see Section E.6). These views include a Reset option which may be used to reset the calculation of the Integrated Loudness. It is also possible to log Integrated, Momentary and Short-Term Loudness values to a CSV file for analysis outside of the OTM application. How this is done is described in Section J.3.

Configuration The desired Target value, the periods over which the Momentary and Short-term values are calculated and the levels of the Relative and Safety gates are all user-configurable. The required values may be set on the Audio Config page of the Config window, alongside the values of the Integrated, Short-term and LRA measures outside which an error should be reported.

Figure K-6: Loudness Calculation Parameters within the Audio Config.

See Section T.3 for details of how to call up the Audio Config page.


Loudness View The Loudness View comprises a set of bar graphs, each showing the loudness levels calculated for the specified pairs of audio channels. A display similar to the one illustrated below can be shown for each of the available audio inputs. The selected audio input is named in the title of the display.

Figure K-7: Example Loudness View for a set of embedded audio channels.

The main bar of each graph shows the current ‘Short-term’ Loudness value for the specified pair of channels, while the white line shows the current ‘Momentary’ Loudness value. The figure at the bottom of the graph and the two markers up the side and the figure at the bottom of the column give the Integrated loudness since the display was last reset. Where bar graphs are shown for Surround Sound, the display also includes a comparable bar graph showing these values calculated over the five channels that contribute to the 5.1 Surround Sound. The graphs coloured from blue (too quiet) to red (too loud) with green at the target level (set on the Audio Config page of the Config window and shown in the title of the display). In addition, if the Short-term Loudness exceeds the level specified in the Audio Config, a red block will appear at the top of the affected bar (and stay illuminated for 5 seconds after the error has cleared). If the Integrated Loudness exceeds the specified level, not only will the red block appear as above but the Integrated value shown at the bottom of the bar and the corresponding markers on the bar will both turn red (as shown here). The graticules on the graphs may be set to show the measurement in units of LU, LUFS or LKFS, and scaled according to the selected Loudness Scale (see Display Properties, below). The Target Loudness and the calculated Integrated Loudness values are expressed in the same units. The Button Bar also offers a Pause option which pauses both the display and the calculation of the Integrated Loudness until the Pause option is selected again. Note: The values shown for the C+LFE and Ls+Rs channel pairs on a Surround Sound Loudness display differ from those shown for these channels on the equivalent ‘Embedded’ display because the values shown in the Surround Sound display are weighted to show their contribution to the overall Programme Loudness (as defined in BS.1770-2).


Selection The Loudness display is one of the additional displays offered within the AUDIO category.


To show the Loudness display:

Press the AUDIO tile button until the Loudness display appears.

Select Loudness from the AUDIO section of the View Tile Browser.


Display Properties The details of how the Loudness bar graphs are displayed are determined by the tile’s properties, a complete read-out of which is given in the Properties control (Control Panel: press PROPS to display). However, the Button Bar provides useful shortcuts (Control Panel: press GENERAL or OTHER; Mouse/Keyboard: click on the tile to display).

Figure K-8: Loudness View Properties

Button Bar



Audio Input The Audio Input option in the Properties control selects between the available audio inputs (see Section K). The Button Bar Audio Input option cycles through the possible sources for the display.

Pause Selecting this option pauses both the display and the calculation of the Integrated Loudness until the Pause option is selected again.

Loudness Scale The Loudness Scale option selects the range for the graticule used for the various bars on the Loudness display between (the equivalent of) 0 LUFS to -60 LUFS (‘Full Range’); and the EBU +9 and EBU +18 scales defined in EBU Tech 3341 .

Loudness Units The Loudness Units option selects the units in which the Loudness target and the Integrated value (shown below the Loudness meters) are expressed. The choice of units is between LU, LUFS or LKFS.

Reset The Reset button included in the Button Bar restarts the calculation of the Integrated Loudness value and the maximum Short-term Loudness and LRA values across all Loudness displays.


Loudness History The OTM also offers a Loudness History display. This Loudness History can be displayed as a trace of loudness level, as a trace of loudness range or as a histogram of loudness level. All versions analyse one particular channel pair, selected through the display properties (or by using the Audio Input and Pair options included on the display’s Button Bar). Which form of Loudness History graph is shown is also part of the display properties. Where loudness level is displayed, either or both of the Short-term Loudness and the Momentary Loudness may be displayed (see Display Properties, below). The Integrated Loudness value, the maximum Short-term Loudness and the maximum Loudness Range (as determined since the Loudness calculation was last reset) may also be displayed (together with the current Short-term Loudness and Loudness Range values where space allows). The graticules on the Loudness trace and histogram graphs may be set to show the measurement in LU, LUFS or LKFS and scaled according to the selected Loudness Scale (see Display Properties, below). The Target Loudness and the Integrated Loudness are expressed in the same units. (Loudness Range is always expressed in LU.)


The History displays can be restarted at any time by taking the Clear option that is included both in the Button Bar and in the Properties display. The Button Bar also offers a Pause option which pauses both the Loudness History display and the calculation of the Integrated Loudness until the Pause option is selected again. Note: The Integrated Loudness, maximum Short-term Loudness and maximum Loudness Range may be reset from the Loudness View display described above.

Loudness History Trace The graph of Loudness History comprises a solid coloured section showing Short-term Loudness values going back over some defined period (chosen by the user), overlaid with a trace of the Momentary Loudness measured over the same period. The right-hand end of the graphs shows the values from the current frame. The calculated Integrated Loudness value is shown at the top of the screen. As in other Loudness displays, the Short-term Loudness graph is coloured from blue (too quiet) to red (too loud) with green at the target level (set on the Audio Config page of the Config window and shown in the title of the display). Details of the audio input and the channel pair that is being analysed are shown at the top of the graph (together with the Target Loudness). The period for which values are displayed is shown in the top left corner of the display.

Figure K-9: Example Loudness History Trace.

Loudness History Histogram The alternative version of the Loudness History display comprises a histogram showing the spread of Short-term Loudness and Momentary Loudness values over the same period, together with the calculated Integrated Loudness value. Details of the audio input, the channel pair being analysed and the period for which data is being displayed are shown above the histogram as described above for the Loudness History Graph.


Figure K-10: Example Loudness Histogram display.

Loudness Range The Loudness Range display comprises a graph of Loudness Range (measured in LU) against time for the specified pair of audio channels. Displays similar to the one illustrated below can be shown for each of the available audio inputs. The selected audio input and the selected channel pair are named in the title of the display.

Figure K-11: Example Loudness Range display for a pair of embedded audio channels.

The graphs are normally coloured green but become coloured red where the Loudness range exceeds the LRA value set on the Audio Config page of the Config window.


Note: The values shown for the C+LFE and Ls+Rs channel pairs on a Surround Sound Loudness display differ from those shown for these channels on the equivalent ‘Embedded’ display because the values shown in the Surround Sound display are weighted to show their contribution to the overall Programme Loudness (as defined in BS.1770-2).

Selection The Loudness History display is one of the additional displays offered within the AUDIO category.


To display Loudness History:

Press the AUDIO tile button until the Loudness History display appears.

Select Loudness History from the AUDIO section of the View Tile Browser.


Display Properties The details of how the Loudness bar graphs are displayed are determined by the tile’s properties, a complete read-out of which is given in the Properties control (Control Panel: press PROPS to display). However, the Button Bar provides useful shortcuts (Control Panel: press GENERAL or OTHER; Mouse/Keyboard: click on the tile to display).

Audio Input The Audio Input option in the Properties control selects between the available audio inputs (see Section K). The Button Bar Audio Input option cycles through the possible sources for the display. Note: From V2.0, the audio input selected in one of the Audio displays is maintained as you step from one Audio display to another by repeatedly pressing the AUDIO tile button.

Pair This option selects the stereo pair that is displayed in the two-channel version of the Lissajous display. (The Button Bar option cycles through the pairs that make up the selected audio input.)

Graph Type The Graph Type setting in the Properties control selects between the trace form of the History display, the alternative histogram and the Loudness Range display.

Pause Selecting this option pauses both the display of Loudness History and the calculation of the Integrated Loudness until the Pause option is selected again.

Figure K-12: Loudness History

Properties


Loudness Scale The Loudness Scale option selects the graticule used for the various bars on the Loudness History Trace and Histogram displays between (the equivalent of) 0 LUFS to -60 LUFS (‘Full Range’); and the EBU +9 and EBU +18 scales defined in EBU Tech 3341.

Loudness Units The Loudness Units option selects the units in which the Loudness target and the Integrated value (shown at the top of the display) are expressed. The choice of units is between LU, LUFS or LKFS.

History Range This option selects the period for which data is shown from a range of values between 1 minute and 24 hours. The Button Bar History Range option cycles through the offered values.

Clear Selecting Clear either from the Properties or from the Button Bar restarts the determination of the selected History display. Note: This action also resets the calculation of average Loudness values such as the Integrated Loudness across all the Loudness displays.

Show Short-term When this option is ticked, the History trace and histogram displays include Short-term Loudness values.

Show Momentary When this option is ticked, the History trace and histogram displays include Momentary Loudness values.

Show Graticule Ticking this option displays the underlying graticule.

Show Status The Show Status option controls the display of the current value of the Integrated Loudness and the maximum Short-term Loudness and Loudness Range values that have been experienced since the last Reset (together with their current values where there is space).


Button Bar



Loudness and the Surround Sound View Two features of the Surround Sound View described in Section K.3 are concerned with loudness. The first is the bar graph shown to the right of the main Surround Sound display, the other is the blue outline shown over the individual channel PPMs.

Figure K-13: Surround Sound View

The configuration of the loudness elements of this display is exactly as described above for the Loudness View.

Loudness Bar Graph The bar graph to the right of the PPM display is similar to the bar graphs shown in the Loudness View (described above) but rather than showing the Momentary, Short-term and Integrated Loudness values for a pair of channels, it shows ‘Program’ values of these measures (calculated using the BS-1770 weighting algorithm).

Loudness Outline The Momentary Loudness values determined for the L, R, C, Ls and Rs channels are also indicated on the corresponding PPM (using the same scale) and these points on the individual PPMs joined to give a visual representation both of how the loudness is distributed between these five channels and of how this is changing in time. The ‘ball’ in the middle of this area marks the current position of the centre of sound.


K.5 Lissajous Figures

The Lissajous display shows the phase relationship between a selected pair of audio channels as a Lissajous figure.

Figure K-14: Example Lissajous figure.

As on other audio displays, the Lissajous figure can be set to select channel pairs from any of the available audio inputs. The channel pair is then selected from among the channel pairs that contribute to that audio input. The same general steps are involved in working with this display as are used with other Views. (See Section E.1) An alternative version of the display is provided for Surround Sound inputs that shows the phase relationships between all the channels of those inputs (see below).

Selection The Lissajous display is a member of the AUDIO category.


To show the Lissajous display:

Press the AUDIO tile button until the Lissajous display appears.

Select Lissajous from the AUDIO section of the View Tile Browser.



Display Properties The Lissajous figure that is displayed is determined by the tile’s properties, a complete read-out of which is given in the Properties control (Control Panel: press PROPS to display). However, the Button Bar provides useful shortcuts (Control Panel: press GENERAL or OTHER; Mouse Keyboard: click on the tile to display).

Properties Control

Figure K-15: Lissajous Figure Properties.

Button Bar



Pair This option selects the stereo pair that is displayed in the two-channel version of the Lissajous display. (The Button Bar option cycles through the pairs that make up the selected audio input.)

Visualisation The Show Graticule option controls the display of the underlying grid and associated information. (The Button bar option toggles between the two possible settings.) Enable AGC selects automatic gain control on the display (also toggled from the Button Bar). When enabled, the trace is automatically scaled to fit the graticule. The Colour setting selects the colour used for the histogram, out of Cyan, Green or White.



K.6 Surround Sound Lissajous Display

The phase relationships between the channels of a surround sound set-up can alternatively be displayed through the Surround Sound Lissajous display.

Figure K-16: Surround Sound Lissajous display

This shows the phase relationships between the channels as a set of 6 Lissajous figures that compare adjacent channels (ignoring any Bsr or Bsl channels from 7.1 Surround Sound). The channels that are compared are indicated both by labels and by symbols showing their expected positions.

Selection The Surround Sound Lissajous display is a member of the AUDIO category.


To show the Surround Sound Lissajous display:

Press the AUDIO tile button until the Surround Sound Lissajous display appears.

Select Lissajous Surround Sound from the AUDIO section of the View Tile Browser.


Display Properties The options for configuring the Surround Sound Lissajous display are essentially the same as those used for the two-channel Lissajous display described above, except that there is no option to select any particular pair of channels.


K.7 Audio Status

Audio status information is displayed both alongside video status information in the Status Overview and on the AUDIO and AUDIO (Control) Status Summary pages (all described in Section E.6).

Status Overview Display In common with the video status, the audio status information is arranged in a collapsible hierarchy with [+] symbols alongside sections of the display that can be expanded to show further information and [-] alongside the headings of sections that are fully expanded. The top level of this hierarchy lists the audio services – simple PPMs, Surround Sound PPMs or Dolby PPMs (where supported) – that are associated with the selected video input. Below each of these headings are details of the channel pairs into which the audio is divided, the channels that make up those pairs, and beyond that, the status of the individual channels. Information about the details displayed is given below, in the section on Audio Information Displayed.

Status Summary Display Audio information is displayed on the Audio and Audio (Control) pages of the Status View (selected by taking the corresponding button from the Button Bar).

Figure K-17: Sample Audio Status Summary

The Audio pages detail the level and loudness of the different audio channels; the Audio (Control) pages give channel usage data. (To see further pages of information, keep selecting the Audio/Audio (Ctrl) button from the Button Bar.)


Information about the details displayed is given below, in the section on Audio Information Displayed.

Selection The Status View is one of the displays offered within the STATUS category.



Press the STATUS tile button until the Status display appears.

Select Status from the STATUS section of the View Tile Browser.


Configuration Issues The following Configuration settings affect the Audio Status display:

Clip Level etc. The conditions under which audio channels are reported as Clip, Over, Mute or Silence are set on the Audio Config page of the Config window. The Maximum True Peak level is also set on that page. (See Section T.3) Display Properties The controls available over the display of the audio status information are the same as those over the display of the video status information. The aspect of the display that can be set through the Properties control (Control Panel: press PROPS to display) is the width of the columns in which the Overview information is displayed. These widths can also be adjusted by dragging with a mouse (where fitted). Audio Information Displayed The information shown for Embedded, AES or Surround Sound audio comprises the following information. The category of Status Summary on which any parameter is shown in brackets. (The rather more complex metadata associated with Dolby audio is described in Section L.) The information shown is divided into information about channel pairs (including the currently-selected downmix pair), which are then subdivided into information about individual channels.

Loudness Information (Audio) Details are given for individual channels, channel pairs and surround sound groupings of Momentary, Short-Term and Integrated Loudness values and Loudness Range (see Section K.4 above), together with running counts of the numbers of fields/frames in which the various significant levels were exceeded. Loudness values for channel pairs and programme values (where shown) have been calculated by applying the appropriate weighting to the separate channel values.


Channel Status Information (Audio (Control)) Given individually for each channel. Note: Much of the data shown here is a direct transcription of data included in the source. Errors Counts of audio CRC and Z-bit position/spacing errors Channel Use Professional/Consumer. Data use Audio/Data Emphasis Not specified/50/15ms/CCITT J.17/Unknown Locking of Source Locked/Unlocked/Not indicated Sample Frequency 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, or unknown Channel Mode Not indicated/Dual/Single/"Primary/Secondary"/Stereo/Unknown Word Length Default/16 bits/18 bits/19 bits/20 bits/22 bits/23 bits/24 bits/user/unknown

Meter Information (Audio) Also given for individual channels are details of current and peak levels, together with running counts of the numbers of fields/frames in which the various significant values were exceeded. Both Meter Level and True Peak values are given.

Resetting the display The numbers given for some of parameters displayed in the Status View represent the number of errors that have been detected since the error counter was last reset.


To reset all of the error counts to zero:

Select the Reset option from the Button Bar.

Note: This action resets the error counts not just for all the audio channels but also for the associated video channel.

Button Bar



K.8 AES/EBU Audio

Analysis of AES/EBU standard audio is in many respects identical to the analysis of embedded audio. Where it differs is in the requirement for an AES card to be fitted to the OTM 1000 (to handle the audio input), a maximum of 8 channels and some additional configuration settings that are needed to work with this board. Note: To avoid digital errors, the whole of the AES card needs to be driven from the same clock source. To ensure that this happens, the OTM 1000 requires the card to be configured to work with a specific analyser. Where the OTM 1000 incorporates two analysers, the AES card can be used with either analyser but the analyser being used must be recorded as part of the system configuration (see ‘Configuration’ below).

Adding the AES card The AES card needed to analyse AES/EBU audio is provided as part of the AUDIO_AES option that is available for the OTM 1000. Where ordered with the OTM 1000, the OTM will be supplied with the AES card already fitted. When ordered subsequently, you may need to return the OTM either to OmniTek or to your dealer to have the card fitted. Your OmniTek dealer can advise you on this. Any additional steps you need to take will be advised when you purchase the AUDIO_AES option.

Cabling The AES card offers two ports referred to as I/O Ports A and B, and is provided together with a break-out cable suitable for connecting one of the ports to equipment with XLR connectors. (Additional cables can be ordered separately if required.) The cabling that is supported is shown in the following diagram.

Figure K-18: AES Card cabling

Note: Future versions of the OTM 1000 may be able to work with all these channels but for the moment, while output is provided across both ports, input can only be taken from I/O Port A.


Configuration Before any AES/EBU input can be analysed, the AES card needs to be configured to work with required analyser and, in particular, to use this analyser as its clock source. Where the AES card is to be used to playback audio, it additionally needs to be configured to play out either embedded audio or Dolby audio as required (see page K-30 below).


To set the AES card to work with the required analyser:

1. Display the System page of the Config window. 2. Set the AES Clock Source to the analyser with which you intend to use the AES card.

Analysing the Input With the AES card set up as described above, AES input may analysed on the selected analyser as AES PPMs or AES Surround Sound. Simply set the Audio Input on the required display to the required AES source and then use it as described elsewhere for embedded audio.


K.9 Audio Playback

With AUDIO option installed, the OTM 1000 has the ability to play back any stereo pair of PCM audio channels either over a pair of headphones or over the OTM’s internal speaker. Where the OTM 1000 also includes the AUDIO_AES option, up to 8 channels of audio can be played back over the outputs on the AES card. The audio played back via the AES card can be either embedded audio or extracted Dolby audio. The special features of working with Dolby audio are described in Section L.

Playing back over headphones or the internal speaker Any stereo pair of audio channels can be selected for play out over a pair of headphones attached to the headphone jack located either on the front panel or the rear panel of the OTM 1000. If no headphones are attached, the sound is played out using the internal speaker. To play out this audio, you simply need to select the required stereo pair (as described below). Steps are also given below for adjusting the volume at which the audio is played.

Selecting the Stereo Pair to be played The required stereo pair is selected on the appropriate Audio PPMs display, while the volume at which the audio is played is set through the Properties control.


To select the required channel:

1. Turn the HORIZ knob until the associated grey line is above the required pair of channels.

2. Then press the HORIZ knob to play this channel. The grey line then changes colour to orange (or red if audio playback is currently muted).

Left-click on the name of the required channel pair. A red or orange line is then shown above the selected channel pair to indicate that this channel pair is being played out. (Orange if the audio can be heard; red if it is currently muted.)

Figure K-19: PPMs display showing an orange line showing over the stereo pair that is currently playing (red if mute) and a grey line over an alternative pair which will be played if the HORIZ

knob is now pressed.


Setting the Speaker Volume The volume at which the audio is played out is set in the Audio Monitor section of the Properties control.

Speaker Volume The Speaker Volume sets the volume at which the audio is played back as a percentage of the selected monitor’s maximum level.


To set the required volume: General Method

Set the required level in the Properties control.

Alternative method when an AUDIO View is selected:

Twist the VERT knob. Scroll the scroll wheel on the mouse (where there is one).

On changing the volume in this way, the OTM automatically shows a Volume indicator which reacts to the changes you make. Note: If Mute is selected (see below), this indicator is shown overlaid with a ‘No Go’ symbol.

Speaker Mute Control Panel Mouse & Keyboard

To select Mute/toggle the current selection: General Method

Tick the Speaker Mute option in the Properties control. The output instantly becomes muted. The Volume indicator described above is also displayed temporarily.

Alternative methods when an AUDIO View is selected:

Either: Select the Mute option from the Button Bar. This toggles the Speaker Mute setting between ticked and clear i.e. between the sound being audible and being muted.

Or: Press the VERT knob to switch the Mute option.

Or: Press the scroll wheel on the mouse (where there is one) to switch the Mute option.


Figure K-21: Audio PPMs Button Bar.

Figure K-20: Audio Monitor Properties


Playing back over the AES card outputs Where the OTM 1000 includes an AES card, it is possible to play out a full 8 channels of audio over this card’s outputs.

Configuring for play-out To play out embedded or AES audio, the AES card needs to be set to use the correct clock source. The required type of output also needs to be set. Both settings are made on the System page of the Config window.


To configure the OTM for play-out over the AES card:

1. Display the System page of the Config window. 2. Set the AES Clk Source option to select the analyser that is being used to process the audio. 3. Set the AES Output option to Embedded, Embedded Surround Sound, AES or AES

Surround Sound as required. 4. Set AES Routing to Fixed to direct each input channel to the matching output channel – or

to Mapped to have the channels played out using the mapping that has been used in analysing the audio (recorded on the Audio Inputs page of the Config window).

Note: Playing out Dolby audio requires further configuration. This is described in Section L.

Cabling Simply attach the OTM 1000 to the required output system, for example using the break-out cables provided when the AUDIO_AES option was purchased. Note: The channel pairs that are used can be seen from the Audio PPMs display.

Speaker Volume If required, the OTM can be configured to allow the sound level of audio played out over the AES card to be respond to the Speaker Volume control included in the Properties control.


To make the AES output respond to the Speaker Volume setting:

Tick the Slave to Headphone Control option on the System page of the Config window.

To set the Speaker Volume:

1. Call up the Properties control for the View window. 2. Display the Audio Monitor section of this control. 3. Set the Speaker Volume to the required level.

Alternative method when an AUDIO View is selected:

Twist the VERT knob. Scroll the scroll wheel on the mouse (where there is one).

OmniTek OTM 1000 User Guide, v3.1 L-1

L : Dolby Audio Support With the appropriate software options installed, the OTM 1000 is able to extract Dolby-encoded metadata and Dolby-encoded audio directly from embedded audio and, in future versions, from audio delivered through the AES card (where fitted). The OTM is also able to play out the extracted audio through the AES card. The procedures followed have been qualified by Dolby. The software options concerned are:

The AUDIO option (required in all cases)

AUDIO_DOLBY_E for Dolby E audio

AUDIO_DOLBY_D for Dolby Digital audio With AUDIO and AUDIO_DOLBY_E or AUDIO_DOLBY_D, the OTM can display both a full listing of the Dolby metadata and display PPMs of the extracted audio. Where an AES card is also installed (the AUDIO_AES option), the OTM can also play-out the extracted Dolby audio. Note: Dolby audio can only be analysed on one input at a time. The input on which the decoding is active is always the one that was most recently configured for Dolby (as described in Section L.2 below).

L.1 Background

Dolby-encoded audio may be included in either embedded audio or AES/EBU audio. The Dolby-encoded audio is delivered as a sequence of frames, each corresponding to an individual video frame. The frame format used is defined by the SMPTE 337M standard, which caters for a range of different non-PCM data types to be added to the audio channels. For instance, each Dolby E Frame starts with synchronization segment followed by metadata, coded audio data and metering information. This gives rise to the following packet structure.

SMPT

E Pr

eam

ble

Dolby E Frame Dolby E Frame Dolby E Frame

Sync

. Seg

men

t

Audio Segment Audio Extension * Meter Segment

Met

adat

a Se

gmen

t

Met

adat

a Ex

tens

ion

*

* Low frame rates only Figure L-1: Basic Dolby E Packet Structure


This structure can be implemented at a bit depth of 16, 20 or 24 bits, depending on the total amount of data that is to be transferred. A key requirement on the transport of Dolby data is that it is transported synchronously with the video in order to provide exact synchronisation between Dolby frames and video frames. It is also necessary to be able to edit Dolby audio and to cross-fade between Dolby streams without introducing any glitches or other artefacts. Such switches and edits take a number of video lines to complete, so in order to prevent such edits and switches interfering with the Dolby data, the Dolby E standard defines a reference position within a video frame after which the Dolby frame should start. This provides a ‘guard band’ between successive Dolby Frames during which edits and switches can occur without affecting the integrity of the Dolby data. The width of this guard band is further extended by ensuring that there is a gap between the end of the Dolby frame and the end of the video frame.

Dolby E Frame Dolby E Frame Dolby E Frame

Video Frame Video Frame Video FrameG

uard

Ban

d

Gua

rd B

and

Gua

rd B

and

Line 512NTSC Line

513Line 512

Line 513

Line 525

Line 1

Line 10

Line 13

Line 14

Line 603PAL Line

604Line 603

Line 604

Line 625

Line 1

Line 6

Line 13

Line 14

Approx. end of Dolby E Frame

Dolby E Reference Position

Switching Area

Approx. end of Dolby E Frame

Figure L-2: Guard Band Position and Structure

For NTSC format video (frame rate 29.97Hz), the reference line is line 14, while for PAL (25Hz frame rate) the reference line is line 10. Current practice is for about 5% of the available data space to be used as a guard band.


L.2 Configuring the OTM 1000 for Dolby analysis

Both Dolby E data and Dolby Digital data is carried on a stereo pair of audio channels. Before any analysis of Dolby data can be carried out, the OTM 1000 needs to be configured to direct the built-in Dolby decoder to work with both the appropriate input and the appropriate stereo pair. The steps to do this are as follows:

1. Call up the System page of the Config window and set the appropriate Analyser Source to point to the input carrying the Dolby data (Analyser 1 if on either SDI Input 1 or AES I/O Port A; Analyser 2 if on either SDI Input 2 or AES I/O Port B).

Figure L-3: System page of Config window

Where the Dolby data to be analysed is in video being output from the built-in test signal generator, either analyser can be set to monitor this generator. (The process of setting the analyser source is described in Section T.4.)

2. Where the signal being analysed is provided via an AES card, ensure that the AES Clock Source setting on this page is set to follow the selected analyser.

3. If you are planning to play out the extracted Dolby audio through the AES card, ensure both that the AES Clock Source is set to follow the selected analyser (as described above) and that the AES Output is set to Dolby E.

4. Configure the Dolby input by calling up the Audio Inputs page of the Config window and editing the appropriate Dolby input. If you set Analyser 1 to point to the Dolby source, edit the Dolby 1 configuration. If you set Analyser 2 to point to the Dolby source, edit the Dolby 2 configuration.


Figure L-4: Audio Inputs page

To edit either configuration, highlight the configuration name with the cursor and take the Edit option offered on the Button Bar.

5. When the set of stereo pairs is displayed, tick the stereo pair on which the required Dolby data is delivered and confirm by taking the OK option from the Button Bar.

Figure L-5: Dolby data channel selection

Note: If you are unsure which stereo pair is used, you can check by displaying PPMs for the appropriate set of audio channel pairs (Embedded or AES) as one of the tiles on the View window (as described in Section K.1). A channel pair carrying Dolby Digital data will be marked ‘DOLBY D’; a channel pair carrying Dolby E data will be marked ‘DOLBY E’. Note: If necessary, use the Audio Inputs option offered on the PPMs Button Bar to select the Embedded or AES PPMs version of the Audio PPMs display.

Figure L-6: PPMs for Embedded audio with Dolby E data delivered on channels 3 & 4


L.3 Dolby PPMs

With the OTM configured for the appropriate input and the required stereo pair (as described above), PPMs can be displayed of the audio encoded within the Dolby data. These PPMs can be viewed in two arrangements – either as a simple bar chart or with the individual PPMs arranged to reflect the use of the audio channels for surround sound.

Figure L-7: The alternative PPM displays provided for Dolby audio by the PPM view (left) and

the Surround Sound view (right). Both these views are available for viewing embedded audio. The first is the arrangement offered by the PPMs view (described in Section K.2); the second is the arrangement offered by the Surround Sound view (described in Section K.3). The Dolby versions of these displays are simply variants of these views with the Audio input set to Dolby audio rather than embedded audio. The only special feature of the Dolby versions of these views is that the levels shown, the arrangement of the channels and the way they are labelled are all determined from the decoded Dolby data. Features such as the metering graticule and ballistics that are used and whether Peak Hold lines are displayed are under exactly the same controls as in the embedded audio versions of these displays.


L.4 Dolby Loudness

With the OTM configured for the appropriate input and the required stereo pair (as described above), the loudness of the Dolby audio can be displayed in exactly the same way as the loudness of other audio inputs (see Section K.4). There are three displays on which loudness may be seen: the dedicated Loudness View (described in Section K.4), the Loudness History (also described in Section K.4) and the Surround Sound view (described in Section K.3). The Dolby versions of these displays are simply variants of these views with the Audio input set to Dolby audio rather than embedded audio.

Figure L-8: Loudness displays provided for Dolby audio by the Loudness view (top left), the

Surround Sound view (top right) and two forms of Loudness History (bottom pair). The only special feature of the Dolby versions of these views is that the arrangement of the channels is determined from the decoded Dolby data.


L.5 Dolby Metadata

Dolby data is delivered in bursts of ‘Dolby frames’. A significant proportion of each Dolby frame comprises metadata detailing how the coded audio is to be handled and metering information. The range of metadata associated with Dolby Digital differs from that for Dolby E. This section introduces this metadata and describes how to view this data on an OTM 1000. Note: In the main, a minimum of two frames are needed in order to determine data about Dolby audio. As a result, the vast majority of the following data is only shown when the video sequence is running. If the video sequence is paused, the data displayed reduces to showing CRC and Frame Sync error counts.

Displaying Metadata With the OTM 1000 configured for the appropriate input and the required stereo pair (as described in Section L.1), the Status Overview display for this input includes a complete decode of the embedded metadata.

Figure L-9: Sample Dolby E Metadata display

In outline, the steps used to display the Dolby metadata are therefore as follows.


To display the Dolby metadata:

1. Select the View window and call up the Status View. 2. Use the buttons on the Button Bar to select the Overview version of the Status display. 3. Set the tile on which the Status Overview is displayed to analyse the input on which the

Dolby data is being delivered. 4. Move the cursor down to the Dolby section of the Status Overview and use the [+] and [-]

symbols associated both with this section heading and those of the various sub-sections it contains to display the parts of the decoded metadata that you require.



Dolby E Data The Dolby E data displayed in the Status Overview principally comprises the data within the Metadata segment of the Dolby E frame, together with information about loudness, CRC errors, guard band position and the bit depth that have been determined for the frame. The range of information transmitted as Dolby E Metadata is very extensive. However, the names used for the items follows the naming used in the Dolby specification, so detailed information about any individual element may obtained by studying the Dolby specification. The information displayed is divided into sections. The main sections are as follows:

Errors This section reports any CRC errors in the Dolby E data.

Program Loudness This section of the display shows the various Loudness values determined from the Dolby audio data. Alongside the Short-Term and Integrated values, the display also shows the number of frames in which the values determined fell outside the ranges specified on the Audio Config page of the Config window. Note: The Short-Term and Integrated values are determined over a number of frames. It should therefore not be surprising if the values calculated for the first few frames falls outside the boundaries that have been set.

Guard Band Position The video line at which the Dolby frame was found to start. This line number will be shown in red if any frame since the last reset has been found to start outside the Guard Band. The frame(s) with this error can be found by recording and studying an Error Log (see Section J.1) which will also show the total number of Guard Band Position errors since the last reset. Note: The Guard Band Position is also displayed in the AUX Status Summary (see Section E.6).

Bit Depth 16-, 20- or 24-bit

Metadata Segment The part of the Dolby frame that carries (the majority of) the Dolby metadata. The main items are:

Program configuration Program/Channel Counts plus details of the program and channel sequences specified for the audio data

Frame Rate Frame rate type and value Frame Count Value, coloured red if there has been a discontinuity SMPTE timecode Value where valid. Otherwise ‘Invalid’ and coloured red Program Descriptions The descriptive names that have been assigned to the

different programs delivered within the audio data

Subsegment Data Primary data Program/channel data covering such settings as the

data rate, the intended mix levels and the room type Extra Bitstream Info Covering such things as additional mix levels, the

preferred downmix type and the A/D Converter Technology used in creating the Dolby data

Timecode information (where included) Filter and Compression data Showing filters enabled, RF Compression Word 1 and

Line Compression Words 1 – 4 CRC and CRC errors Transmitted CRC and count of CRC errors


Audio segment This is the part of the Dolby frame that carries the coded audio. The Status just reports:

CRC and CRC errors Transmitted CRC and count of CRC errors

Metadata Extension and Audio Extension segments Optional extensions for the metadata and audio segments. The Status reports:

RF/Line compression words RF Compression Word 2; Line Compression Words 5–8


Meter Segment This and the following ‘Channels’ section (see below) carry the metering information for the audio encoded in the frame. This part of the display reports:

Peak and RMS values (for each encoded audio channel)


Dolby Digital Data The data displayed about Dolby Digital audio is as follows:

Program Loudness This section of the display shows the various Loudness values determined from the Dolby audio data. Alongside the Short-Term and Integrated values, the display also shows the number of frames in which the values determined fell outside the ranges specified on the Audio Config page of the Config window. Note: The Short-Term and Integrated values are determined over a number of frames. It should therefore not be surprising if the values calculated for the first few frames falls outside the boundaries that have been set.

Errors This section reports any CRC errors or Frame Sync Errors in the Dolby Digital data.

Frame Data This section gives the size of the Dolby D frame (in words) together with the bitrate and the sample rate.

Bitstream Data This section gives the Bit Stream ID and covers information such as the coding of the audio into surround sound channels, the Dial Norm loudness level, preferred downmix levels and the A/D Converter Technology used in creating the Dolby data.

Channel Data (Both Dolby E and Dolby D) This part of the display shows for each channel pair:

The various Loudness levels for the channel pair Then for each channel in the pair.

The level of the current frame

The number of frames since the display was last reset that have gone beyond the Clip, Over, Silence and Mute levels specified for the channel

The Momentary and Sliding Loudness level of the current frame


L.6 Playing out the Extracted Audio

Individual channels or channel pairs of the extracted audio can be played back either on the internal speaker or using the headphones in the same way as other audio (see Section K.9). Where the OTM 1000 includes an AES card, it is also possible to configure the OTM 1000 such that all channels of the extracted audio are output through this card.

Configuration for Multi-channel Dolby Playback Control Panel Mouse & Keyboard

To configure the OTM for Multi-channel Playback:

1. Call up the System page of the Config window and check that the AES Clock Source is set to the analyser that is being used to process the video from which the Dolby audio is taken.

2. Set the AES Output setting on the same page to Dolby.

Figure L-10: Settings for Dolby Playback on the System page of Config window

3. Ensure that the Dolby decoder is active on this analyser by selecting the Dolby service associated with this analyser on the Audio Inputs page of the Config window, taking the Edit option and making certain that the stereo pair on which the Dolby data is carried is ticked in the Audio Service window that is displayed.

Figure L-11: Selection of the stereo pair carrying Dolby data

Multi-Channel Playback Once the above configuration has been carried out, the audio that is extracted from the Dolby data automatically becomes played out over the outputs of I/O Ports A and B. A number of possible orderings may have been used in encoding the channels. The ordering used is encoded within the Dolby data. The OTM 1000 uses this data to arrange that the channel use after decoding is identical to that used prior to the channels being encoded. The level on each channel is taken from the level data included in the Dolby metadata.

OmniTek OTM 1000 User Guide, v3.1 M-1

M : Transport Layer Analysis This section describes the tools available for assessing video integrity for transmission and for locating sources of jitter. The facilities described here are added by installing the EYE_SD, EYE_HD or EYE_3G options. EYE_SD just supports SD video; EYE_HD supports SD and HD; while EYE_3G supports SD, HD and 3G.

M.1 Overview

The various measurements and assessment discussed in this section result from analysis of the data carrier signal. The characteristics of this analog signal are determined through time equivalent sampling. After an initial set-up period in which the sampling builds up sufficient data, it becomes possible to determine such parameters as the signal amplitude, unit interval, rise time, fall time of the signal, together with information about undershoot, overshoot, noise and jitter in the signal and an estimate of the cable length (see Section M.5). It is also possible to identify the waveband in which jitter occurs, which can help in identifying its source. These are all parameters that affect the integrity of any transmission and ultimately whether the receiver will be able to interpret the signal sufficiently accurately to display the desired images. Most of them are also subject to limits specified in transmission standards. The analysis of these parameters is carried out with the aid of a dedicated Eye/Jitter card which needs to be added the OTM 1000, along with supporting software. The data carrier signal for analysis is attached to a BNC input on this card.

Views Offered The following displays are offered:

1. Jitter Display – from which information about the waveband in which the timing jitter is occurring can be deduced. Note: A maximum of two Jitter displays can be shown at the same time, showing data for the same Eye input.

2. Eye Diagram for the same input. Note: It is not possible to display the Eye Diagram for one Eye input at the same time as the Jitter Display for the other Eye input.

A certain amount of information about the various traces is displayed on screen, particularly in Auto Measure mode (see Section M.5). Additional status information is to be found in the Status Overview and on the PHY Status Summary (see Section E.6). Note, however, that this data is not shown if the input associated with the Status tile is either not looking at the input that is selected on the Eye/Jitter card or if the associated analyzer is not set to work on an Eye input. Also the values shown in the Status displays for parameters that are determined in Auto Measure mode are only updated when the current selection of Views includes an Eye display and Auto Measure mode is selected. The same general steps are involved in working with these displays as are used with other Views (see Section E.1) except that changes of input are applied to the displays as a group. It is expected that the displays mainly used in monitoring performance will be the PHY Status Summary and the Eye Diagram (where available). The role of the Jitter Spectrum display is as an aid to engineers in tracking down sources of jitter with the aim of eliminating these.


Figure M-1: Eye Diagram display

Adding Transport Layer Measurement to the OTM 1000 As mentioned above, the addition of transport layer measurement facilities to the OTM 1000 requires not only the installation of particular software options, it also requires a dedicated Eye/Jitter card to be installed in the OTM 1000. Installing the Eye/Jitter card is NOT an operation that can be carried out by the user. If none of the EYE_xx options was included when the OTM 1000 was purchased, the OTM 1000 will need to be returned to your OmniTek dealer to have the appropriate Eye/Jitter card fitted.

Upgrading EYE_xx option Where the OTM 1000 includes one of the EYE_xx options, upgrading to another of the EYE_xx options (e.g. from EYE_SD to EYE_3G) is simply a matter of purchasing the appropriate option, though you also need to ensure that you have purchased the VIDEO_xx package(s) that are needed to work with the class of signal that you wish to analyse (see Section V). For example, to analyse a 3G carrier signal, you will need EYE_3G, VIDEO_3G and VIDEO_HD. If you just have VIDEO_HD, you will only be able to analyse SD or HD carrier signals.


M.2 Set-Up

There are two parts to setting up the OTM 1000 to carry out transport layer measurements. 1. Connecting up the data carrier signal to the OTM 1000 2. Configuring the OTM 1000 to work with signals processed by the Eye/Jitter card, rather

than with signals fed in via the standard SDI inputs Depending on the measurements you wish to make, the OTM may also need to be configured for such things as the type of cable that is being used and the filtering that is to be applied. These aspects of the configuration are described later in this section where the individual displays are discussed.

Cabling The connections on the Eye/Jitter card are shown in the following diagram.

Extracted Clock

Eye/Jitter Card Outputs

Eye/Jitter Card Inputs

EX CLK EYE OUT2 EYE OUT1 EYE IN2 EYE IN1 Figure M-2: Eye/Jitter Card Input/Output

The data carrier signal that is to be analysed needs to be fed into one of the Eye/Jitter card inputs. This signal is also mapped to the corresponding Eye/Jitter card output. The clock output provides access to the timing signal that is extracted from the analysis of the data carrier signal. This timing signal includes all the jitter information and is made available to allow further analysis of this data.

Configuration To configure the OTM 1000 to work with signals processed by the Eye/Jitter card, the analyzer within the OTM (or at least one of the analyzers where the OTM includes one of the VIEW_n options that add extra analyzers to the OTM’s capability) needs to be configured to take its source from the Eye/Jitter card.


To set the OTM to analyse Eye/Jitter Card Input:

1. Display the System page of the Config window. 2. Select the entry for the corresponding analyser (Analyser Source 1 for Eye Input 1;

Analyser Source 2 for Eye Input 2) and use the associated drop-down menu to select the input that you have used on the Eye/Jitter card as the source for this analyzer.

(For further information, see Section T.3.)


M.3 Jitter Display

Figure M-3: Jitter Display

The Jitter display comprises a trace of the timing jitter detected in the data carrier signal, shown as a graph of amplitude against time. The jitter displayed is the result of passing the signal through a selected high-pass filter. The pass frequency of this filter is selectable between 10Hz and 100kHz, with additional ‘Timing’ and ‘Alignment’ options that select the filters specified by SMPTE for Timing Jitter and Alignment Jitter measurements on the type of video that is being analysed (SD, HD or 3G). To aid measurement of the jitter, a pair of Time cursors (marking positions on the x-axis of the display) and a pair of Voltage cursors (marking positions on the y-axis of the display) may optionally be displayed. These cursors are selected through the Properties control, and turned on and off using the Cursors option on the Button Bar. They may be moved by twisting the HORIZ and VERT knobs or dragged to new positions with a mouse. The cursor that is moved is the one currently shown in yellow. Pushing the knob switches over control to the other cursor (bringing it back on screen if it was off screen), while pushing and holding the knob centres the current cursor. The distances between these pairs of cursors are automatically reported as dx and dy values in the top right-hand corner of the screen. The way to interpret the Jitter display is to work in sequence through the different filter frequencies that are available, comparing the distributions that are shown at each stage to determine the waveband(s) in which jitter energy is chiefly concentrated. (The location of jitter energy in a particular waveband is indicated by large changes in overall jitter energy and/or the appearance/ disappearance of periodic structures within the display as you move through the different filters.) Where you wish to study jitter within a particular waveband, this can be readily determined by setting one Jitter High-Pass Filter to the frequency at the bottom of this band and the other to top of the band and comparing the traces produced when the Jitter Display is set to work with one filter and when it is set to work with the other filter. The wavebands that are identified may provide a clue to the source of the jitter. Note: The jitter values displayed are only valid once the OTM has locked to the input. While the OTM is in the process of locking, the Jitter meter at the top of the display is greyed out. (The current Jitter Lock Status is displayed in the Status Overview: see Section E.6.)


Selection The Jitter Display is a member of the PHY category.


To show the Jitter Display:

Press the PHY tile button until the Jitter display appears.

Select Jitter from the PHY section of the View Tile Browser.


Display Properties Other aspects of the Jitter Display are determined by the tile’s properties, a complete read-out of which is given in the Properties control (Control Panel: press PROPS to display). Shortcuts to common settings are provided through the Button Bar (Control Panel: press GENERAL or OTHER knob on the tile; Mouse/Keyboard: click on the tile to display).

Properties Control

Figure M-4: Jitter Display Properties

Button Bar



High Pass Filter The High Pass Filter option in the Properties control offers a range of filters between 10Hz and 100kHz to be applied to the jitter, together with a Timing option that selects the filter specified by SMPTE for Timing Jitter measurements on the type of video that is being analysed and a corresponding Alignment option that selects the filter specified for Alignment Jitter measurements. The High Pass Filter option on the Button Bar cycles through the offered filters.

Vertical Gain The V Gain option in the Properties control selects between the different scalings that can be applied to the vertical axis of the display. Selecting the V Gain option on the Button Bar cycles through the available scalings.

Cursors The ‘Show’ options in the Properties control enable display of voltage and time cursors (and associated lines such as those marking the 20% and 80% levels), either separately or together. Selecting the Cursors option on the Button Bar switches between the selected cursors being displayed and these cursors being hidden.

Visualisation The Gain control adjusts the intensity of the displayed waveform (as a percentage of the received signal level). The Persistence setting sets the rate at which the displayed data decays. Larger values have the result of smoothing out time variations. The Gamma setting applies gamma encoding to the displayed waveform. A setting of 100 corresponds to a gamma value of 1. Values less than 100 emphasise differences in low signal intensities but reduce the visibility of differences in high signal intensities. Values greater than 100 emphasise differences in high signal intensities but reduce the visibility of differences in low signal intensities. The Colour setting in the Properties control selects the colour used for the waveform trace (out of Cyan, Green, White or ‘Temperature Ramp’). The Colour option in the Button Bar cycles through the available colours. Ticking the CRT Emulation option applies a special filter that makes the display emulate how the data would be displayed on a CRT-based waveform monitor. Selecting the CRT Emulation option on the Button Bar switches this option between On and Off. Ticking the Show Graticule option shows the underlying grid for the Jitter Display. The Jitter Meter option selects between the different options available in showing a Jitter meter at the top of the display.

Sweep The Sweep option in the Properties control selects between single-line, two-line, field and frame sweeps in the display. The Sweep option on the Button Bar cycles through the available sweep settings.


M.4 Eye Diagram

The Eye Diagram presents the data carrier signal in the way it might be displayed on an oscilloscope, though produced in a very different manner. While the oscilloscope is able to work directly with the data carrier signal, the Eye Diagram displayed on the OTM 1000 is built up through time equivalent sampling of this analog signal.

Figure M-5: Sample Eye Diagram display

(The above diagram shows a 2-Eye version of the display. Other numbers of eyes may be shown by adjusting the Eye Sample Rate.) There are a number of signal quality assessments that can be determined from an Eye Diagram. The main ones are the signal amplitude (eye height) and rise and fall times, but it is also possible to judge how well the signal is synchronized with the signal clock, whether the signal suffers from overshoot or undershoot and whether the signal is likely to be correctly interpreted by the receiver. (This last judgment can be made from how open the eye appears when compared against the eye diagrams associated with comparable transmission that have or haven’t been correctly interpreted.)

80%

20%

Signal Amplitude

Fall TimeRise Time Figure M-6: The principal Eye Diagram measurements


To aid measurements of amplitude, rise time and fall time of the display, the Eye Diagram has an Auto Measure mode in which it makes a series of measurements on a 2-Eye version of the Eye Diagram and displays the results in the top right-hand corner of the screen. This mode is selected either by ticking the Auto Measure option in the Properties control (see below) or by selecting the Auto Measure option included on the Button Bar.

Figure M-7: Eye Diagram in Auto Measure mode

In Auto Measure mode, a histogram is shown to the left of the Eye diagram. This histogram indicates the relative amount of time spent at each signal level. The peaks in this histogram are taken as marking the maximum and minimum signal levels. Having determined the signal amplitude from these peaks, the OTM 1000 then adds a couple of diagonal lines, going between the “Rise/Fall low amplitude” level and the “Rise/Fall high amplitude” level as shown in the above diagram. The rise and fall times are then given by the separation in time of the ends of these two lines. (The “Rise/Fall low amplitude” level and the “Rise/Fall high amplitude” level are defined on the Video Config page of the Config window – see Section T.2. Their default positions are at 20% and 80% of the signal amplitude.) Auto Measure mode is automatically selected when the Eye Diagram display is first selected. It should also be noted that control over parameters such as the vertical gain is disabled in Auto Measure mode. The screen also offers an optional pair of Time cursors (marking positions on the x-axis of the display) and a similarly optional pair of Voltage cursors (marking positions on the y-axis of the display), which can be used to make manual measurements of the display (see ‘Obtaining Measurements from the Eye Diagram’ below). The distances between these pairs of cursors is automatically reported as dx and dy values in the top right-hand corner of the screen.

Selection The Eye Diagram is a member of the PHY category.


To display the Eye Diagram:

Press the PHY tile button until the Eye diagram appears.

Select Eye Diagram from the PHY section of the View Tile Browser.



Display Properties Other aspects of the Eye Diagram are configured through the Properties control (Control Panel: press PROPS to display). Shortcuts to some settings are provided through the Button Bar displayed when the Eye Diagram is selected. (Control Panel: press GENERAL or OTHER knob on the tile; Mouse/Keyboard: click on the tile to display)

Button Bar


High Pass Filter The amount of jitter shown around the Eye cross-over depends on the frequency of the high-pass filter that is applied to the clock extraction loop. The High Pass Filter option in the Properties control offers a range of filters between 10Hz and 100kHz to be applied to the jitter, together with a Timing option that selects the filter specified by SMPTE for Timing Jitter measurements on the type of video that is being analysed (SD, HD or 3G) and a corresponding Alignment option that selects the filter specified for Alignment Jitter measurements. The High Pass Filter option on the Button Bar cycles through the offered filters.

Figure M-8: Eye Diagram Properties


Vertical Gain and Vertical Offset The V Gain and V Offset controls determine the vertical scaling and the positioning of the display. (The V Gain option on the Button Bar cycles through the available scalings.) Note: The V Gain control is disabled in Auto Measure mode.

Cursors The Cursor options control the cursor-pairs that can be used to measure time differences and voltage differences between any two points on the Eye Diagram. The Show Cursors option in the Properties control provides overall control of the display of any cursors over the display, while the Cursors option on the Button Bar switches between these cursors (and associated markers such as those marking the 20% and 80% level) being shown and being hidden. The Time Cursors and Voltage Cursors tick selections separately control the display of a pair of cursors providing difference measurements in the horizontal (time) direction and the vertical (voltage) direction. When the cursors are displayed, a read-out of the times and voltage differences measured is shown in the top right-hand corner of the screen as dx and dy values.

Visualisation The Gain control adjusts the intensity of the displayed signal (as a percentage of the received signal level). Note: This control is disabled in Auto Measure mode. The Persistence setting sets the rate at which the displayed data decays. Larger values have the result of smoothing out time variations. Note: This control is disabled in Auto Measure mode. The Gamma setting applies gamma encoding to the signal. A setting of 100 corresponds to a gamma value of 1. Values below 100 emphasise differences in low-level signal strengths, while values over 100 emphasise differences in high-level signal strengths. The Colour setting selects the colour used for the waveform trace (out of Cyan, Green, White or ‘Temperature Ramp’). The Colour option in the Button Bar cycles through the available colours. The CRT Emulation option applies a special filter to the waveform data to emulate how the Eye might be displayed on a CRT-based waveform monitors. Selecting the CRT Emulation option on the Button Bar switches this option between On and Off. Show Graticule controls the display of the underlying Graticule. The Jitter Meter option controls how the Jitter meter is displayed.

Equalisation The Equalised tick box sets whether the signal is viewed after it has passed through an internal cable equalizer that compensates for loss introduced by the cable. Ticking the Equalised option is normally only worth doing where the signal is otherwise approximately jitter free. The Button Bar option switches this setting between On and Off. Note: This control is disabled in Auto Measure mode.

Eye Sample Rate Sets the timebase for the pattern by selecting the number of eyes to be formed. The Button Bar option cycles through the available settings. Note: This control is disabled in Auto Measure mode.

Auto Measure Selects the OTM’s automatic measurement mode. The Button Bar option switches this setting between On and Off.


Obtaining Measurements from the Eye Diagram A range of signal parameters can be deduced from measurements made on the Eye Diagram. The OTM 1000’s Auto Measure mode provides an automated read-out of signal amplitude, rise time and fall time. These and other measurements can also be made using the pairs of voltage and time cursors that can optionally be overlaid on the Eye Diagram both inside and outside of Auto Measure mode.

Displaying the Cursors


To select which cursors are displayed:

Tick the required cursors in the Properties control.

To toggle between displaying and hiding these cursors:

Either: Select the Cursors option from the Button Bar (highlighted when the cursors are displayed)

Or: Tick/clear the Show Cursors option in the Properties control.

Moving the Cursors


To move the cursors:

Use the HORIZ and VERT knobs. The cursor moved is the one currently shown in yellow. Pushing the knob switches over control to the other cursor (bringing this cursor back onto the screen if it is currently off-screen). Pushing and holding the knob centres the current cursor.

Drag with the mouse.

Signal Amplitude


To measure the signal amplitude:

1. Use the Properties control to display the Voltage Cursors. 2. Position one Voltage cursor in line with the upper signal line and the other cursor in line with

the lower signal line. 3. The Voltage Difference (dy) reading in the top right corner of the screen gives the signal

amplitude.


Rise and Fall Times Rise and Fall Times measure the time taken to rise/fall between the 20% and 80% signal levels. Markers on the screen indicate these signal levels.


To measure the Rise time:

1. Use the Properties control to display both the Time Cursors and the Voltage Cursors (needed in order to display the 20% and 80% level markers).

2. Position one Time cursor where the 20% level marker crosses a rising trace and position the other Time cursor where the 80% level marker crosses the same rising part of the trace.

3. The rise time is given by the dx value quoted in the top right corner of the screen. Similar steps are used to measure the Fall time, positioning one cursor where the 80% level marker crosses a falling trace and the other where the 20% level marker crosses the same falling part of the trace.

Overshoot/Undershoot


To obtain a measure of the degree of overshoot:

1. Use the Properties control to display the Voltage Cursors. 2. Position one cursor in line with the peak of any overshoot. 3. Position the other cursor in line with the bottom of any ringing etc. associated with the upper

signal line. The difference between the cursors is the ‘thickness’ of the upper signal line. 4. The overshoot is given by the dy reading. Similar steps may be used to measure undershoot by using the cursors to determine the thickness of the lower signal line.

Transmission Integrity A measure of whether the signal can be expected to be correctly interpreted at the receiver is given by the degree to which the eye of the diagram appears open. In making this assessment, the user will typically judge the height and width of the eye at a ‘Decision point’ approximately half-way across the eye. There are, however, no hard and fast measures that can be applied. Determining the characteristics of the Eye diagram at the point at which reception stops being sufficiently error free is a matter of experience.


M.5 Cable Length

The signal amplitude where the signal is measured implies a certain degree of cable loss which in turn allows a rough estimate to be made of the cable length (for a given type of cable). This length is then displayed at the top of the Eye display (when in Auto Measure mode), in the Status Overview and in the PHY Status Summary (see Section E.6). The cable length deduced from the measurements made by the OTM is variously displayed:

among the Eye/Jitter information shown in the Status displays

among the auto-measure information shown on the Eye diagram (see Section M.4)

among the auto-measure information shown on the Jitter display (see Section M.3) Where the length that is estimated is significantly longer from the actual cable length, this suggests there are issues with how the cable has been installed. For example, the cable could be kinked somewhere along its length.

Configuration The estimates of cable length are only meaningful where the correct type of cable has been specified as the calculation is based on standard data on the loss per meter of the specified cable.


To set the type of cable:

1. Display the System page of the Config window. 2. Select appropriate type from drop-down list of standard cable types.

Figure M-9: Cable Type setting on System page of Config window


OmniTek OTM 1000 User Guide, v3.1 N-1

N : Timing Measurements This section describes the various timing measurements that can be made using the OTM 1000. The measurements that can be made are of two basic types:

1. Reference Timings – made either between one input and an analogue reference signal or between one input and the other.

2. AV Delay (or ‘Lip-Sync’) Timings In addition, the AV Delay measurements can be made in two ways:

1. Using dedicated Test sequences, provided with the OTM. 2. As an ‘In-Service’ measurement made using the video that is being transmitted.

The actions that can be carried out depend on the software options that are installed:

Reference Timing measurements of SD or HD video can be carried out with just the VIDEO_SD and VIDEO_HD options supplied as standard with the OTM.

AV Delay measurements can be carried out on SD or HD video using dedicated test sequences with just VIDEO_SD/VIDEO_HD and the AUDIO option which is also supplied as standard. These measurements also require a system on which you can play-out the supplied test sequences. This is explained in Section N.2, below.

Extending either of the above to Dual-Link or 3Gbps video requires the addition VIDEO_DL or VIDEO_3G as appropriate.

Extending AV Delay measurements using dedicated test sequences to Dolby E audio requires the addition of the AUDIO_DOLBY_E option.

‘In-Service’ AV Delay measurements require the appropriate VIDEO_xx and AUDIO_xx options as above plus the AV_ISD option.

The AV_ISD option also allows measurements to be made of the delays introduced to both the video and the audio by a particular signal path e.g. the signal path through a particular piece of equipment. Users of the PQA option should note that their system will automatically also include the AV_ISD option because In-Service AV Delay measurement is a necessary part of picture quality and auto quality analysis.


N.1 Reference Timing Measurements

With the appropriate VIDEO options installed (see above), the OTM 1000 is able to measure:

The delay on either an SDI or an Eye input compared to a supplied analog reference.

The delay on Input 1 relative to Input 2 (or vice versa) With the system appropriately set-up for the measurement that is to be made (see ‘Set-up’ below), the required timing may be displayed by calling up the Reference Timing View.

Figure N-1: Reference Timing View

This View comprises three ‘meters’: one comparing the timing of the Analog Reference and Input 1; the second comparing the timing of the Analog Reference and Input 2; and the third comparing the timing of Input 1 and Input 2. The upper line of each meter shows by how many lines the timing is advanced/delayed (up to a maximum of 1 field); the lower line refines this count by giving the additional number of pixels in the delay. Each meter typically shows the extent to which the source named below the meter is advanced or delayed relative to the source named above it (though the option is offered to invert the last of these three comparisons – see Display Properties below). Where the (‘lower’) source under test is advanced relative to the (‘upper’) reference source, bars indicating the extent of this difference are shown to the left of the centre line; where the source under test is delayed relative to the reference source, these bars appear to the right of the centre line. The display also offers the choice between ‘standard’ and ‘line-based’ forms of reporting, and of saving the current set of delays as a set of Offsets and displaying the timings relative to those Offsets rather than to the analog reference. Note: By default, the results displayed show the actual real-time delay between the reference input and the video input. These results may however differ from those shown by other measurement systems, many of which include the delay introduced by the D/A converter in their assessment of the delay. If it is important to you to match the results coming from the OTM to those produced by such a system, you can use the SMPTE RP168 analog reference timing option on the System page of the Config window (see Section T.4) to adjust the timings made on the OTM.


Set-up Ensure that the OTM’s analysers are set to analyse the inputs you want to compare (as described in Section T.4). If you want to compare either input against an analog reference signal, use the Ref Loop connectors on the rear of the OTM to provide the external analog reference to the system. Note: If the reference signal is not being continued onto other systems, terminate the other BNC on the REF loop with a 75Ω terminator.

Reference Loop


Figure N-2: Rear view of an OTM 1000 showing the Reference Loop connectors.

Note: By default, the results displayed show the actual real-time delay between the reference input and the video input. These results may however differ from those shown by other measurement systems, many of which include the delay introduced by the D/A converter in their assessment of the delay. If it is important to you to match the results coming from the OTM to those produced by such a system, you can use the SMPTE RP168 analog reference timing option on the System page of the Config window (see Section T.4) to adjust the timings made on the OTM.

Display The Reference Timing View is a member of the TIMING category.


To display the Reference Timing View:

Press the TIMING tile button until the Reference Timing View appears.

Select Reference Timing from the TIMING section of the View Tile Browser.



Display Properties Other aspects of the Reference Timing display are determined by the tile’s properties, a complete read-out of which is given in the Properties control (Control Panel: press PROPS to display). Shortcuts to common settings are provided through the Button Bar (Control Panel: press GENERAL or OTHER knob on the tile; Mouse/Keyboard: click on the tile to display).

Figure N-3: Reference Timing View Properties

Button Bar


Line-Based When the Line-Based option is cleared, both the line count shown on the upper line and the pixel count shown on the lower line point in the same direction and the total delay is the sum of the number of lines and the number of pixels. When Line-Based is ticked, the line count is given to the nearest whole number of lines and the pixel count should either be added to the line count if the two meters point in the same direction or subtracted from the line count if the meters point in opposite directions.

Detailed View When the Detailed View option is ticked, the display switches to additionally showing the total offset measured in seconds.


Figure N-4: Detailed version of the Reference Timing display

Invert option Switches the third comparison between showing how much the input listed below the graph is in advance/delayed relative to the one listed above and expressing this comparison the other way round.

Save Offset Saves the current delays as a set of reference values (until the system is reset/powered down).

Rel to Offset/Rel. to Analog Selecting Rel to Offset switches the display from showing timings relative to the analog reference to showing these timings relative to the currently saved offsets (see ‘Save Offset’ above). Selecting Rel to Analog switches the display back to showing timings relative to the analog reference.


N.2 AV Delay (Lip-Sync Delay) Measurements

Where the OTM includes the AUDIO option, the relative delay between the audio and video components of the signal can be measured. Depending on which other software options are installed, the measurement can be made either from the video that is currently being transmitted (‘In-Service’ AV Delay measurement) or with the aid of test sequences supplied with the OTM.

In-Service AV Delay Measurement In-Service AV Delay measurement requires the AV_ISD software option to be installed but is otherwise very straightforward. All that is required is:

In Waveform Monitor/Test Signal Generator mode: Set the Analyser 1 source on the System page of the Config window to select the source for the Reference signal for the measurement. Then set the Analyser 2 source on the System page of the Config window to select the source for the signal for which the delay is to be determined. (For details, see Section T.4.) In PQA Mode: Select Internal/Internal, Internal/External or External/External mode as appropriate (see Section S.2).

Configure each input to select the Audio Channel to be used in the A/V Delay assessment as the Delay measurement source for this input. (This is set on the Audio Config page of the Config window: see Section T.3.)

Transmit a video sequence with an audio track that varies (audio comprising a simple combination of sine waves isn’t sufficiently distinctive).

The results are displayed within the Quality Analysis section of the Status Overview and on the AV Delay/Quality Status Summary page. Lip-Sync and Audio delay ‘meters’ may also be included in the PQA Meters display available in PQA Mode (see Section S.4). Note: The maximum delay that can be measured is 15 seconds. (This applies to all video standards.) The audio delay measurements made are accurate to 1/48000 of a second (or about 20 microseconds).


Figure N-5: In-Service Delay Measurement, as displayed within Status Overview

Figure N-6: In-Service Delay Measurement, as displayed within Status Summary

The audio delay measurements made are accurate to 1/48000 of a second (or about 20 microseconds).


Using Dedicated Test Sequences Where there is no AV_ISD option, AV delay is measured using a dedicated Test sequence. In this case, the Analyzer software analyses the input video signal, looking for the first frame in the sequence (identified by the binary code). When this is detected, an internal timer counts the time delay before the audio pulse associated with this first frame is detected. The system automatically detects whether the audio pulse is early or late with respect to the video, and displays the results accordingly. The delay that is determined is shown in the AV Relative Timing View.

Figure N-7: AV Relative Timing View

This shows two ‘meters’, the upper one showing the difference in timing relative to the video of the audio in the first channel in the selected channel pair and the lower one showing this for the second channel in this channel pair. The ends of the meter represent 1 field. With the test sequences supplied, it is possible to measure the delay introduced in either PCM audio or Dolby-E encoded audio, but it should be noted that Dolby-E transmission delays can only be determined where the OTM includes the AUDIO_DOLBY_E option and where the system used to generate the test sequence supports RVF files (or the test sequence has been played out once on such as system and recorded for playback either from a videotape machine or a video file server). The test sequence is generated remotely from the analyser, allowing A/V delays in satellite, cable, or terrestrial broadcast links to be measured. The delay range that the system is capable of measuring is: 50Hz Systems 60Hz Systems Audio early with respect to video: 0 ~ 5760 ms 0 ~ 4800 ms Video early with respect to audio: 0 ~ 1920 ms 0 ~ 1600 ms. The relative time delay measurement is typically expressed in milliseconds, and the accuracy is better than 1 ms.


Set-Up The set-up required is summarised in the following diagram.

OmniTek Delay Measurement System

(OTM 1000)RVF source

(OTM/OTR/OmniTek LAB)

Transmission Path

Figure N-8: Set-up for Lip-Sync Delay measurement

Test Sequence Measurement of audio/video delays relies on the use of a special full-motion video test sequence, which contains precise embedded audio tones. OmniTek has generated a special full-motion video sequence, which is available in all supported video formats – SD, HD and 3G. Two versions of the test sequence may be provided. The first comprises 100 frames of video that includes an uncompressed PCM tone on channels 1 and 2 of group 1 and a Dolby-E encoded tone on channels 3 and 4 of group 1. This is provided as sets of RVF files, one for each video standard that is supported, provided in subdirectories named DolbyE_<NumActiveLines>_[Field|Frame]/RVF_[i|p]<FieldRate>Hz within an overall Sequences/Test Sequence E directory. (For example, the directory containing the test sequence for PAL is provided in DolbyE_576_Field/RVF_i50Hz.) This version of the test sequence may be used to measure any of the following:

PCM delay affecting PCM source

PCM delay affecting Dolby-E source

Dolby-E delay affecting Dolby-E source

Dolby-E delay affecting PCM source (This last mode of operation is particularly useful where a PCM source is put through a Dolby-E encoder as the operation of de-embedding the audio and encoding it often introduces an unknown delay.) The other test sequence is a PCM-only version that may be used to determine just the PCM delay affecting a PCM source for use where the equipment used to generate the test sequence does not support RVF files. This test sequence is provided as sets of YUV files, provided in subdirectories with names of the form <NumActiveLines>[_<AspectRatio>]_[Field|Frame][_<Frames>]/YUV within an overall Sequences/Test Sequence A directory.


The test sequence contains many elements that are useful for testing and analysing the performance of a video system, however for the purposes of the audio/video delay measurement it has two characteristics that are of special importance – an embedded audio tone (in the case of the PCM-only sequence this tone needs to be added when the sequence is run) and a binary frame count displayed in the top left-hand corner of each frame as a sequence of yellow squares.

When the clock hand reaches the top (frame 0), an audio pulse is generated for 1 frame duration

This gives a binary count of the test sequence

Figure N-9: OmniTek Test Sequence

The Analyzer software extracts the binary frame count from the input video image. It also detects the embedded audio tone. The relative timing of the audio tone to the first video frame in the sequence indicates the delay between audio and video components.

Playing the Test Sequence The supplied test sequences can only be played by the generator of an OmniTek OTM, OTR or LAB system. However, the output from the Generator can then be recorded on a recording device that also records blanking – e.g. a tape or disk recorder – and that recording subsequently used in place of OmniTek system.


To run the test sequence on an OTM: (Note: Equivalent steps are given in the OTR user guide and in the OmniTek LAB user guide.)

1. Set the OTM to generate output in the appropriate video standard as described in Section P.2. 2. Load all the frames of the special A/V Delay Test Sequence that is applicable to the video

format that is under test (see ‘Test Sequences’ above). For information on loading a sequence, see Section R.2.

3. Call up the Properties of the Test Sequence and check that the Resize type for this pattern is set to None. (See Section Q.5)

4. Where the TSA (PCM-only) test sequence is being used, set the Audio Tone Generator to generate a tone on channel 1 set for 8kHz, -18dB (see Section Q.6) and set the associated Click Mode to Mutes except on frame 1. These settings are essential for correct operation.

5. Play the Test Sequence as a continuous loop.

Note: Where the sequence is recorded to tape/disk, it is sensible to record at least a minute of the repeating sequence to make operation and measurement easier.


Display The AV Relative Timing View is a member of the TIMING category.


To select the AV Relative Timing View:

Press the TIMING tile button until the AV Relative Timing display appears.

Select AV Relative Timing from the TIMING section of the View Tile Browser.


Display Properties Other aspects of the AV Relative Timing display are determined by the tile’s properties, a complete read-out of which is given in the Properties control (Control Panel: press PROPS to display). Shortcuts to common settings are provided through the Button Bar (Control Panel: press GENERAL or OTHER knob on the tile; Mouse/Keyboard: click on the tile to display).

Figure N-10: AV Relative Timing View Properties

Button Bar WFM VECTOR PICT AUDIO GAMUT STATUS TIMING PHY


Pair This option selects the stereo pair that is analysed in determining the AV Relative Delay. (The Button Bar option cycles through the pairs that make up the selected audio input.)

Mute Speaker volume control, identical to that on many Audio displays. For details, see Section K.9.


N.3 Loop Delay Measurement

A common application of AV Delay measurement is the determination of the delay introduced to the video and to the audio components of a video signal when it is transmitted over a particular signal path such as that presented by a piece of video equipment. This delay is commonly referred to as a Loop Delay. To make the measurement, the OTM needs to compare the timing of the signal after passing through the equipment under test with its timing immediately prior to being fed into the equipment under test. This comparison requires the AV_ISD software option. With AV_ISD installed on the OTM, determining the Loop Delay is simply a matter of feeding the original signal into SDI Input 1 on the OTM, feeding the signal the other side of the equipment into SDI Input 2 and reading off the delay data from either the Status Overview or the AV Delay/Quality Analysis Status Summary – as described on page N-6.

Signal Source Equipment Under Test

SDI Input 1 SDI Input 2

OTM 1000 Figure N-11: Setup for Loop Delay measurement

Note: The maximum delay that can be measured is 15 seconds. (This applies to all video standards.)

OmniTek OTM 1000 User Guide, v3.1 O-1

O : Simultaneous Monitoring Note: The facilities described here are added by installing the VIEW_2 option. In systems without the VIEW_2 option, the View window displays the results obtained from monitoring one of the possible inputs to the OTM 1000. Where the OTM 1000 includes the VIEW_2 option, the window can show the results from analysing two input channels on the same display. Note: The simultaneous monitoring feature described here cannot be used with either 3Gb/s Level B or Dual-Link video.

O.1 Overview

When the user selects an input on the View window, the default is for all the tiles on the View window to display results from monitoring the selected input and a change of input on any tile automatically applies to all the tiles that are being shown. When simultaneous monitoring is both installed and enabled (see below), the effect of selecting an input is to switch just the currently selected tile to display results from the newly-selected input. The other tiles remain showing analyses of the input that was previously selected. With care, the View window can be set up to allow a detailed comparison of two video inputs. This might be used, for example, to compare the colour gamut of two copies of the same video before and after conversion to a different video standard.

Figure O-1: Example Screen set-up.

The steps needed both to enable/disable simultaneous monitoring and to select the required input are given below. The input stream that is analysed in each tile of the display may be seen by setting the Tile Info Line option in the Properties control to Permanent. The banners that are then added to each tile include details of the input that is being analysed in the associated View.

O-2 OmniTek OTM 1000 User Guide, v3.1

O.2 Enabling and Disabling Simultaneous Monitoring

Simultaneous Monitoring is enabled and disabled through an option on the System page of the Config window (see Section T.4).


To enable Simultaneous Monitoring:

Tick Simultaneous monitoring. View window tiles can then be individually set to display results from different inputs.

To disable Simultaneous Monitoring:

Clear Simultaneous monitoring. Then selecting an input in one tile automatically switches all the tiles to that input.

Figure O-2: Selection of Simultaneous Monitoring

OmniTek OTM 1000 User Guide, v3.1 O-3

O.3 Picking the Input analysed in a particular tile

The steps used to set the input that is analysed in any tile are essentially the same as those used in the standard system to select the input analysed in all the tiles. The only difference is that the selection made only affects the currently selected tile, making the steps to use:


To set the required input:

1. Move the focus to the tile you wish to set (or otherwise select this tile).

2. Either press the INPUT button and type the number of the required input, or press and hold the INPUT button to display the Inputs toolbar and select the required input from the list offered.

1. Select the tile you wish to set. 2. Select the required input from the Inputs

toolbar.

Note: To change all the tiles to monitor one input, use HOME to move the focus off the tiles that are currently displayed then select the required input.

O-4 OmniTek OTM 1000 User Guide, v3.1

OmniTek OTM 1000 User Guide, v3.1 P-1

P : The Gen Window

Figure P-1: Example Gen Window.

The Gen window provides access to two features of the OTM 1000’s operation: image capture and test signal generation. These features require either the GEN option or the GEN_BASIC option to be added to the OTM. This section introduces the Gen window and describes the basic capture and test signal generation facilities that are offered when either GEN or GEN_BASIC is installed. The facilities for creating test patterns that are offered when the GEN option is installed are described in Section Q. Note:The majority of the facilities described in this and the following two sections cannot be used at the same time as the 3D analysis described in Section I. In particular, you will not be able to generate test signals from any of the images or sequences displayed in the Gen window, which are therefore shown greyed out while 3D analysis is selected. Note for users of the PQA option (described in Section S): The Gen window is disabled when using the OTM to carry out External/External quality assessments.

Selection


To display the Gen window:

Press the GEN button

Click on Gen in the Top-Level Windows toolbar

P-2 OmniTek OTM 1000 User Guide, v3.1

P.1 Overview

The Gen window provides a range of facilities associated with creating or playing video and audio clips. The facilities offered depend on which instrument options are installed but include:

Capture of single frames or video sequences from live input

Play-out of stills and video sequences from disc

Creation and play-out of line patterns

Creation and play-out of zoneplate patterns

Pass-through of the video on either Input 1 or Input 2 (either SDI or EYE inputs depending on the System configuration: see Section T.4)

Application of modifiers such as gain and noise

Addition of simple tones to video clips

Addition of timecodes

Deliberate addition of pixel errors (for equipment test) With the GEN_2 option, the OTM also offers dual generator operation (see Section Q.12). The top two lines of the screen comprise sections dedicated to Generator 1 and Generator 2 (where included), plus a third section that gives details of the current selection for the video standard at which the images are played out and the form of genlock that is being applied. When a single frame is being played out, the Generator details include the type of test signal (e.g. Zoneplate). When a sequence is being played out, the current position in the sequence is shown. The central area of the window comprises a blank area into which thumbnails of still images, video clips and test patterns are placed prior to being played out in a chosen video standard. The video clips etc. associated with these thumbnails are generally referred to as ‘Patterns’ from their potential use as the source for test signals. Where just GEN_BASIC is installed, the OTM offers a fixed selection of Patterns: three ‘pass-through’ options (one for Input 1, one for Input 2 and one for both inputs), and four offering some standard line patterns (100% colour bars, 75% colour bars and two standard pathological test patterns). Where the OTM includes the GEN option, the display again automatically includes the three ‘pass-through’ options while the remainder of the screen shows thumbnails for the patterns that have currently been loaded onto the OTM. A wide range of patterns can be loaded into the framestore of the built-in test signal generator – still images of various formats, sequences, zoneplates as well as other line patterns. These patterns can also be modified before play-out for example by setting a particular gain level or by adding audio. You can also define your own zoneplate and line patterns. The facilities of the Gen window are chiefly driven from the Button Bar at the bottom of the screen. Given alongside each thumbnail are brief details of the associated pattern, such as its filename (where it is saved on disc) and how many frames it comprises. When a pattern is being played out, the number of the generator that is being used is also shown in the thumbnail. Further details are given about the pattern that the focus is currently on, in a band of Pattern Information shown just above the Button Bar. The information displayed depends on the type of pattern that is currently selected but typically includes the number of frames, their dimensions, the amount of memory that the pattern occupies (where it has been loaded into memory) and whether the images have been resized. Further details about how the pattern is set up to play-out are given in the Gen window’s Properties control (see below).


Controls Screen Navigation In line with the system used in other parts of the OTM 1000 application, the pattern that currently has the focus on it is outlined with a copper-coloured box which changes to blue when the pattern is selected for play-out.


To move the focus from pattern to pattern on the Gen window, twist the GENERAL knob.

To move the focus to a particular pattern, simply click on the pattern’s thumbnail.

Button Bar The Gen window is typically displayed with a Button Bar across the bottom of the screen. The main Button Bar to be displayed is the one shown below. However, when a sequence is selected for play-out, this Button Bar is replaced by one containing controls for playing the selected sequence. Note: Pressing the BACK button hides this set of transport controls and returns to the main Button Bar without affecting the current play-out.


Figure P-2: Gen Window Button Bar.


To select an option from the Button Bar:

Press the Tile button immediately below the required option.

Click on the required option.

Note: It is not possible to select from the Button Bar while the Properties control (see below) is active. If you have been using the Properties control, you need to either close it or where a mouse& keyboard are attached, click away from it, for the Button Bar to become active again.

File menu Taking the File option from the Button Bar displays a menu offering some or all of the following options. Clear clears the selection of patterns currently shown on the screen. Load configuration (GEN option only) allows sets of Patterns saved from earlier versions of the OTM/OTR application to be loaded (see Section Q.8). The Load pattern, Load 3D Sequence, Save pattern and Save pattern as… options (where included) refer to loading images stored on disc, creating zoneplates and line patterns for use as test patterns, and saving these either in your User area (alongside settings, presets etc.) or elsewhere on disk (see Section Q). Note: The special features of loading a 3D sequence are described in Section R. Manage Disk calls up the Manage User Files dialogue described in Section U. Among the facilities this dialogue offers are the options to ‘export’ patterns and captures that you have temporarily stored in your User area and to free up space in this area by deleting patterns or captures that you no longer require. For details, see Section U. Note: Any thumbnails associated with the patterns you delete will be automatically cleared. There is no need to delete these thumbnails first.


Properties Control Other aspects of the OTM signal generator’s operation are set through the Gen window’s Properties control, alongside specific details of the current selection of patterns.


To display the Gen window’s Properties control:

Select the Gen window and press the PROPS button.

Either: Press the TAB key Or: Click on the Gen tab where this is

shown at the bottom of the Properties control that is currently displayed.

(Alternatively, either right-click and select Properties from the menu that is displayed or select Properties from the main View menu and tick the Gen option in the sub-menu that is displayed.)

The information displayed about the individual patterns comprises the type of pattern (the Video type), plus associated configurable details depending on that selection. The drop-down menu associated with the Video type setting allows the current pattern to be substituted either by another pattern of the same type or by one of a completely different type. Note: The ‘Patterns’ section of the display is under the control of the Show All tick selection towards the top of the Properties control. When ticked, the Properties control includes expandable entries for all the patterns currently included on the Gen window. Clearing the tick reduces the display to just the pattern that currently has the focus on it.

Figure P-3: Gen Window Properties.


P.2 Gen Window Set-Up

The following aspects of the Gen window and its output are configurable:

The video standard used to play out Test Patterns

The size of the thumbnails used to represent the different patterns currently included on the Gen window.

The Genlock ie. the clock reference to which the generated video is locked (where required)

These details are both set through the Properties Control associated with the Gen window. The settings can also be saved for re-use by recording the current settings as a Gen Preset (see below).

Output Video Standard The output video standard sets the video standard used to play out the current Test Pattern. The required video standard is set through the Output Video Standard option of the Properties control (see Figure P-3 above). This option offers a choice of selection from a list of up to eight previously-selected standards (offered as a drop-drop menu) or precise specification of the required standard. The current selection is shown alongside the Output Video Standard heading.


To set the output video standard:

1. Either select the Output Video Standard option on the Gen window Button Bar (where shown) or press the PROPS button to display the Properties control.

2. With the focus on the current Output Video Standard selection in the Properties control, push the GENERAL knob to display the list of previously-selected standards.

1. Either select the Output Video Standard option on the Gen window Button Bar (where shown) or otherwise display the Properties control.

2. Click on the current Output Video Standard selection in the Properties control to display the list of previously-selected standards.

3. If the required standard is included in the display list, select it. Otherwise continue as follows:

4. Take the Other… option offered at the bottom of the list. 5. Use the separate Interface, Raster, Refresh rate and Sampling format options in that

order to specify the characteristics of the video standard you want to use. 6. Select the video standard corresponding to the settings you’ve made by selecting the Set

option offered below these individual settings (shown with a flashing outline once any of the above settings are changed to remind you that this Set option is required in order to implement the new selection).

While the basic version of the OTM 1000 supports SD and HD video, other standards may be supported through the addition of appropriate software options and the overall range is very broad. The required standard is therefore picked out through separate selections of:

Interface format (SD, HD, Dual-link, 3G Level A, 3G Level B, 3G Level B Dual-link, 3G Dual-stream).

Raster (pixels & lines) Refresh rate Sampling format and bit depth – covering 8-bit 4:2:2 YCbCr and 10bit/12bit YCbCr[A]/

RGB[Y]/XYZ 4:2:2/4:4:4/4:4:4:4


Only compatible selections can be made, which is why it is necessary to select first the Interface format, then check and if necessary adjust the Raster, the Refresh rate and the Sampling details in that order. (As each selection is made, the subsequent settings automatically change to a valid value given the previous selections.) Note: When outputting live input (see Section P.4), the output video standard will be automatically set to the detected input standard.

Thumbnail Size Pattern thumbnails may be shown at one of five sizes, numbered 1 – 5. The required size is selected in the Properties control. The thumbnails immediately change to show the effect of the current selection.

Genlock The output from the generator can either be locked to one of the videos that is currently being fed into the OTM, locked to an external reference clock or left to ‘free run’. The current Genlock source is detailed in the top right-hand corner of the Gen window, against a background that indicates whether it is present at a matching frame-rate (green) or either not present or not at a matching frame-rate (brown). (‘Free Run’ is always available and so is just shown against a blank background.) The full list of options is offered in the Video/Genlock section of the Properties control, while clicking on the Genlock display in the Gen window with a mouse cycles through the possible settings.

Source A drop-down list of the different possible Genlock sources.

To lock the output to an input video, select Analyser 1 or Analyser 2 as appropriate. To lock the output to an external reference, connect this clock to the OTM’s Ref Loop

and take the Ref Loop option. If no lock is required, select Free Run

Note: It is perfectly valid to lock to an SD sync whilst working in HD, as long as the format has the same frame rates.

H Offset; V Offset These settings allow the position of the output video to be adjusted relative to the lock reference.

Figure P-4: Genlock settings within the Gen Window

Properties control.


Saving and Recalling Specific Gen Window Set-ups Where the GEN option is installed, the above settings can be saved for re-use by recording the current Gen Window Set-up as a ‘Gen Preset’ (see Section B.4). A Gen Preset records all the details recorded in the Gen window Properties control together with the details of the patterns that are loaded. Selecting a Gen Preset both changes the selection of patterns to the ones in place when the Gen Preset was recorded and causes the following parameters to be set to match the selected Preset:

The output video standard (see above)

The pattern thumbnail size (see above)

The genlock source (see above)

The current Capture configuration (see Section P.3)

The audio tones that are generated (see Section Q.6)

The insertion of deliberate bit errors (see Section Q.7)


To save the current selection as a Gen Preset:

1. Select the Gen window. 2. Press PRESET to put the keypad into

‘Preset’ mode. 3. Press and hold the appropriate numeric

key. 4. Set a suitable description and select OK.

1. Display the Presets – Gen toolbar. 2. Click and hold the appropriate key of the

numeric keypad within this toolbar. 3. Set a suitable description and select OK.

To recall a saved selection:

Either: Press and hold PRESET and load the required Gen Preset from the list that is displayed

Or, if you know its index number: Display the Gen window, press PRESET to put the keypad into ‘Preset’ mode, then use the numeric keypad to enter the index number

Either: Take Load/save presets… from the File menu and load the required Gen Preset from the list that is displayed

Or, if you know its index number: Display the Gen window, then use the Presets – Gen toolbar to enter the index number

(For more detailed instructions, see Section B.4.)


P.3 Capture from Input

Where the GEN option is installed, the OTM 1000 is able to capture frames of video from the current SDI input. Capture is however not possible where the OTM is set up to analyse S3D output (see Section I) but is restored when 3D analysis is disabled. The standard capture facility just captures single frames of active video but adding either the CAP_MOTION or the CAP_ADV option also allows video sequences to be captured (up to a maximum of 1.7Gbytes). Where the CAP_MOTION option is installed, the capture facility is extended to capturing sequences of active video. With the CAP_ADV option, the facility is further extended to capturing full video i.e. including the ANC packets, audio etc. transmitted in the blanking. The steps used to capture a single frame of the input video are given below. The extra facilities offered by CAP_MOTION and CAP_ADV are described in Section R: Sequence Capture and Play-Out. Once captured, the captured frame can be used as a test pattern in the same way as other image files. The frame can also be saved on disc for later use either in your User area (alongside settings, presets, event logs etc. – see Section U) or in another part of your disk.

Initial Set-up First, brief details of the capture need to be recorded in the Capture section of the Gen window’s Properties control before the capture is made.

Figure P-5: Gen window Properties control, showing Capture details.

These details are set as follows. Before starting, it may be useful to display the video from which you want to capture frames in a Picture View on the View window then duplicate this display on a separate monitor by attaching this to the VIDEO OUT socket on the OTM.


To set the OTM up for a single frame capture:

1. Display the Gen window and press PROPS to call up its Properties control

1. Display the Gen window and call up its Properties control

2. Open the Capture section of the control. 3. Set the Full frame option as required (where offered – see Section R). 4. Check that the Length option is set to 1 (to capture a single frame) and set the Capture

Channel to the channel from which the video data is to be captured.


Capture With the details of the capture recorded in the Gen window’s Properties control, make the capture itself as follows:


To make the capture:

Take the Capture option offered on the Gen window’s main Button Bar (where offered).

Note: If the Button Bar is currently showing transport controls, press the BACK button. Pressing BACK has no effect on any test pattern that is currently being played out but the generator will be paused while the image is captured.

Note: If the Button Bar is currently showing transport controls, press Backspace key. Pressing Backspace has no effect on any test pattern that is currently being played out but the generator will be paused while the image is captured.


Figure P-6: Main Gen window Button Bar, showing Capture option.

The OTM then captures the specified number of frames from the selected capture channel and adds a corresponding thumbnail to the Gen window display.

Save Captured images are not automatically saved on disc.


To save the captured image in your User area:

Select File from the Button Bar and take the Save pattern option.

To save the captured image elsewhere on disc:

1. Select File from the Button Bar 2. Take the Save pattern as option. 3. Use the File Selector that is displayed to

save the image on disc. Note: The use of the File Selector is described in Section B.6.

1. Either display the File menu on the Menu bar or select File from the Button Bar.

2. Take the Save pattern as option. 3. Use the File Selector that is displayed to

save the image on disc.

Frames of active video are saved as YUV files. Where full-frame images are captured, these are saved as RVF files (see Section R).


P.4 Basic Test Pattern Generation

This section describes the basic actions that can be carried out using the OTM 1000’s test signal generator. These actions are supported both by the GEN option and by the GEN_BASIC option. The test signal generator operates together with a framestore, the size of which depends on the options you have installed but is typically capable of storing up to 60 secs of SD, 10 secs of 1080i 4:2:2, or 5 secs of 1080p60 for use as test signals. (If a sequence is too big, just the frames that will fit will be loaded when you come to play it.) To play out any test pattern:

1. The pattern must first be added to the GEN window (unless it is already there). 2. The required output video standard needs to be set.

The pattern needs to be selected for play-out. With the GEN_BASIC option, test pattern generation is limited to a choice of 100% colour bars, 75% colour bars, the PLL pathological test pattern, the EQ pathological test pattern – or simply passing the current input(s) through to the outputs. Patterns for each of these options are automatically included on the GEN_BASIC Gen window. On systems that include the GEN option, the choices are very much wider and only the pass-through options are included in the Gen window by default. This section describes how to play out the standard colour bar patterns and the pathological patterns, and how to make use of the pass-through options. (The additional facilities offered by installing the GEN option are described in the following section (Section Q). Note: By default, the output that is generated automatically includes the appropriate SMPTE 352 code. If required, this feature can be disabled. For details, see Section Q.6.

1. Playing out Colour Bars Colour Bar patterns provide simple distributions of both colour and luminance and so can be used to provide an overall test of a receiver’s response. The following steps are used to play out Colour Bar patterns.


To add the required Colour Bar pattern to the GEN window (GEN option only):

1. Press and hold the Line option on the Gen window Button Bar (PICT button).

2. Open the first (possibly the only) segment of the pattern, select the Pattern entry and select the required Colour Bars pattern from the drop-down menu that is displayed. The thumbnail on the Gen window is then re-drawn showing the pattern you have selected.

3. Close the Properties control by pressing the BACK button.

1. Click on the Line option included in the Button Bar. This adds a new line pattern item to the Gen window.

2. If the Properties control is not displayed, call this up e.g. by pressing the TAB key on the keyboard.

3. Note how the section of the display for the line pattern is split into ‘segments’.

4. Open the first (possibly the only) segment, select the Pattern entry and select the required the required pattern from the drop-down menu that is displayed. The thumbnail on the Gen window is then re-drawn showing the pattern you have selected.


To play-out the pattern (both GEN and GEN_BASIC):

1. Set the Output Video Standard recorded in the Properties control as described in Section P.2.

2. Check that the focus (copper-coloured box) is on the thumbnail for the required Colour Bar pattern and push the GENERAL knob.

2. Click on the thumbnail showing the required Colour Bar pattern.

Note: In the absence both of any specific test pattern to play-out and of any input on the IN BNCs, the 100% Colour Bars pattern is automatically generated on both OUT BNCs in the output video standard that is currently selected (see Section P.2).

2. Using the provided Pathological Test Patterns Offered alongside the test signal generator is the option to create test patterns based on two of the standard pathological test patterns used to provide a stringent test of SDI transmission. The following steps are used to play out the Pathological Test Patterns.


To add either Pathological pattern to the Gen window (GEN only):

1. Press and hold the Line option on the Gen window Button Bar (PICT button).

2. Open the first (possibly the only) segment of the pattern, select the Pattern entry and select the required Pathological pattern from the drop-down menu that is displayed. The thumbnail on the Gen window is then re-drawn showing the pattern you have selected.

3. Close the Properties control by pressing the BACK button.

1. Click on the Line option included in the Button Bar. This adds a new line pattern item to the Gen window. The thumbnail on the Gen window is then re-drawn showing the pattern you have selected.

To play-out the pattern (both GEN and GEN_BASIC):

1. Set the Output Video Standard recorded in the Properties control to select a single-link 10bit YCbCr 4:2:2 video standard (as described in Section P.2). Suitable video standards include all SD and HD standards and progressive 3GA standards but don’t include any 12bit dual-link or 3GB formats. (The pathological test patterns are defined as 10bit parallel data, ready for mapping to 10bit serial data. The mapping imposed by the SMPTE 12bit format prevents the correct pathological sequence appearing.)

2. Check that the focus (copper-coloured box) is on the thumbnail showing the pathological pattern, then push the GENERAL knob.

2. Click on the thumbnail showing the pathological pattern.

The pattern is then loaded into the generator and played out through both SDI OUT BNCs.


3. Live Input Pass-through When neither GEN_BASIC or GEN is installed, video received on either input (SDI or EYE as configured on the System page of the Config window) is automatically passed through to the corresponding SDI Output. This facility may be used to pass the signal on either to another OTM 1000 or to some other type of test and measurement instrument for further analysis. With GEN_BASIC or GEN installed, live input pass-through has to be specifically selected. The steps used are essentially the same as those used to play out any pattern i.e. pick out the appropriate pattern on the Gen window and play it. You also need to set the Genlock to lock to the incoming signal (as described in Section P.2), and if you have defined safe action/safe title cages for the input (see Section F.3), you may also wish to includes these cages on the output by ticking the Show Cage option in the Gen window Properties. However you don’t need to set the Output Video Standard as that is automatically matched to the incoming Input Video Standard. The pattern thumbnails included in the Gen window automatically start with ones for passing through each SDI Input through to both outputs and a wider one that allows the two inputs to be passed through to their respective outputs. These patterns are differentiated from other patterns by being shown against a cyan background. These thumbnails will either show the input being received or ‘No Input’ if none is being received or ‘Not Available’ if the analyser is currently processing video output from the built-in generator and the internal loopback between the generator and the analyser is therefore in action.

Figure P-7: Sample Live Input Thumbnails, with and without input.


To pass a live input through:

Move the focus to the appropriate thumbnail and push the GENERAL knob.

Click on the appropriate thumbnail.

Note: The signal is played out exactly as received via the input (except for any cage that you have opted to show). In particular, while live input is being output in this way, the output video standard is automatically switched to the input video standard.

4. Displaying the Test Signal on a Monitor At the same time as a test signal is output via one of the SDI outputs, the signal can be displayed on a monitor attached to the ANA OUT port.

OmniTek OTM 1000 User Guide, v3.1 Q-1

Q : Gen Actions This section describes the facilities generating test patterns offered by the GEN and GEN_2 option s. (GEN_2 adds a second generator, thereby allowing the generation of Stereo 3D video – see Section Q.12). These facilities are mainly driven either from a Menu bar (where the OTM is fitted with a mouse) or from the main Button Bar shown in the Gen window (Figure Q-1), and in particular from the File menu, which is called up by taking the File option on the Button Bar (illustrated below).


Figure Q-1: The main Gen window Button Bar.

Selecting File displays the following menu:

Figure Q-2: Gen window ‘File’ menu.

Q.1 Loading Patterns from Disk

A common source of test signals are files stored on disk. These may be added to the Gen window by taking either the Image option from the Button Bar or the Load pattern(s)… option from the File menu. The types of pattern that can be loaded in this way include

Video stills – stored as JPEG, BMP, RAW, DPX, YUV, SGI, TIFF or RVF files. Video sequences, stored either as separate images of the types listed above or as a single

YUV or RVF file. Zoneplates stored on disk in OmniTek’s proprietary ZPD format. Line patterns stored in its proprietary LPD format

Any combination of the above files can be picked out for loading at the same time. Entire folders of these files can also be loaded. Note: EBU yuv16 images are automatically scaled from full range to SMPTE range on opening.

Q-2 OmniTek OTM 1000 User Guide, v3.1

General Procedure The process of loading any of these items is essentially the same whether you want to add one item or many. However, there are some special features to the process where sequences of images are involved (see Section R).


The procedure for loading individual files is:

1. If the Button Bar is currently showing a set of transport controls, press the BACK button. Any pattern that is currently being played out will continue to be played out.

2. Select the Image option offered on the Button Bar.

3. Use the File selector that is displayed to pick out the file or files containing the Pattern(s) you want to load. For instructions, see Section B.5.

1. If the Button Bar is currently showing a set of transport controls, press the BACK button. Any pattern that is currently being played out will continue to be played out.

2. Select the Image option offered on the Button Bar.

3. Use the File selector that is displayed to pick out the file or files containing the Pattern(s) you want to load.

In general, each item that is picked out from the File selector is inserted as a separate item in the Gen window. The exception is where the items selected form a video sequence (as described in Section R). Once added, how the selected image plays out can then be refined, for example by adding audio. The various options are described in Sections Q.6 – Q.10.

Inspecting the Source If a mouse is fitted to the OTM, it is also possible to call up the source file(s) associated with any pattern that has been either loaded from disk or saved to disk.

Mouse & Keyboard

To call up the source file:

1. Right-click on the pattern on the Gen window. 2. Take the option to Locate on Disk offered at the bottom of the menu that is displayed. Note: This option is only offered where the pattern has been loaded from disk or saved to disk. The OTM then opens a Windows Explorer window, showing the directory that contains the file(s) used to construct the selected image or sequence. Information shown within the File Selector shows the name of the file containing the pattern or the first file of a sequence. What you can then go on to do with the file depends on the type of file and the range of Windows applications installed on your system.


Q.2 Creating Test Patterns

As well as using images stored on disk as file patterns, two types of test pattern can be created from scratch within the Gen Window – zoneplates and line patterns. These are created by using the dedicated options offered on the Button Bar. Note for users of the PQA option (described in Section S): It is not possible to either create or play-out zoneplate patterns while the OTM is being used in PQA Mode.

Zoneplates Zoneplates are geometrical patterns that test the horizontal, vertical and temporal aspects of a video system. Zoneplate patterns are all based on the same standard phase equation but with different multipliers for the separate x, y, t etc. components of the equation, i.e. it is the values of these multipliers that define the appearance and behaviour of the zoneplate. Specifying the zoneplate you require is therefore principally a matter of setting the appropriate multipliers. However it is notoriously difficult to determine what multipliers to use to achieve a specific result so the OTM 1000 offers some pre-defined patterns to either use directly or modify to suit your requirements.. The OTM also allows you to select the ‘type’ of waveform that is used to interpret the phase information generated by the selected equation (from a choice of four) and to choose the colour components in which the zoneplate is generated. In particular, you can choose a quad-split arrangement featuring the zoneplate in each of the three colour components in three of the display segments, together with the result of combining either a selection or all of the colour components in the fourth segment.

Adding a New Zoneplate Note: After creating the zoneplate you require, it is a good idea to save this zoneplate on disk (as described in Section Q.3). Otherwise all details of the zoneplate will be lost if the zoneplate is deleted from the display or the OTM 1000 loses power. (The zoneplate will however remain in the Gen window if the system is shut down then reloaded, regardless of whether it has been saved onto disk.)


To create a new zoneplate:

1. Either: Press and hold the Zoneplate option on the Gen window Button Bar. Or: Press the Zoneplate option, then press the PROPS button. This both adds a new ‘zero’ zoneplate pattern to the Gen window and displays the Gen window’s Properties control, with the details of the new pattern displayed.

2. Move the focus to the entry alongside the Preset heading and push the GENERAL knob to display the selection of pre-defined zoneplates the OTM 1000 offers.

3. Push the GENERAL knob on the zoneplate preset that tests the factor(s) that you are interested in (listed in brackets below the pattern).

1. Click on the Zoneplate option included in the Button Bar. This adds a new ‘zero’ zoneplate pattern to the Gen window.

2. If the Properties control is not displayed, call this up e.g. by pressing the TAB key on the keyboard.

3. Click on the entry alongside the Preset heading to display the selection of pre-defined zoneplates the OTM 1000 offers, then click on the zoneplate preset that tests the factor(s) that you are interested in (listed in brackets below the pattern).



This returns to the Properties control, with the coefficients set to generate the selected zoneplate pattern. The thumbnail also changes to show the zoneplate pattern that you selected. The values listed represent the coefficients of the various x, y and t factors that define the zoneplate pattern.

4. Make any adjustments to the coefficients that are needed. 5. Set the Type entry to the type of waveform you want to be used to interpret the phase data

generated by the equation. The OTM 1000 offers a choice of waveforms to apply – a sine wave, a square wave, a triangle wave and a sawtooth wave.

6. Use the Display section to specify: (i) The colour component on which you want to generate the zoneplate (Luma, Cb or Cr), or

alternatively (ii) Whether you would like a quad-split arrangement (such as that shown below) covering

the individual colour components together with a composite image comprising the ticked ‘Quad-split’ colour components.

7. To preserve the pattern you have created for future use, either save it to your User area or elsewhere on your disk (see Section Q.3). The pattern you create is not automatically saved to disk.

Figure Q-3: Zoneplate Properties.


Figure Q-4: Zoneplate Presets display and associated Button bar.

Figure Q-5: Quad-split version of a zoneplate.

Notes: (i) Wherever possible, zoneplate patterns should be used and displayed at their generated size to avoid the artefacts that can be introduced where these patterns are resized. (ii) The Reset Timebase option included among the Zoneplate properties may be used when the zoneplate is played out to reset a zoneplate that has time (t) as one of its parameters back to its state when t = 0. (iii) OmniTek has produced a White Paper that explains how its Zoneplate Generator works. This paper is available on the 'Support' section of the OmniTek website.


Modifying Zoneplates To modify a zoneplate that has been added to the Gen window, simply call up the Gen window Properties control (for example by pressing the PROPS button). The entry for the zoneplate will include the same Zoneplate editor as was seen when the zoneplate was created, set up to define the current Zoneplate.


To change any aspect of the zoneplate:

1. Move the focus to the zoneplate. 2. Call up the Properties control. 3. Use the entries in the Properties control to define the zoneplate you now require. 4. Use the Save pattern option in the File menu (called up from the Button Bar) to record the

new version on disk.

Note: The changes you make are not automatically saved to disk.

Line Patterns Line patterns are simple single-frame colour bar displays, typically generated from industry-standard colour bar patterns. The frame can be divided into up to 6 horizontal segments, with each segment containing a different colour bar pattern selected from the choices offered by the OTM 1000. The procedure for adding a new line pattern to the Gen window is given below.

Adding a New Line Pattern Note: After creating the line pattern you require, it is a good idea to save this line pattern on disk (as described in Section Q.3). Otherwise all details of the line pattern will be lost if the zoneplate is deleted from the display or the OTM 1000 loses power.


To insert the pattern offering the default 100.0 100.0 Colour Bars:

Select Line from the Button Bar. A new line pattern item is then added to the Gen window, set up to generate the default colour bars across the whole of the active frame area.

To insert a customised pattern:

1. Either: Press and hold the Line option on the Gen window Button Bar. Or: Press the Line option, then press the PROPS button. This both adds a new line pattern item to the Gen window and displays the Gen window’s Properties control, with the details of the new pattern displayed.

2. Note how the section of the display for the line pattern is split into six parts, one for each of the segments into which the line pattern can be divided.

1. Click on the Line option included in the Button Bar. This adds a new line pattern item to the Gen window.

2. If the Properties control is not displayed, call this up e.g. by pressing the TAB key on the keyboard. Note how the section of the display for the line pattern is split into six parts, one for each of the segments into which the line pattern can be divided.



3. For each segment that you want to use, display the drop-down menu associated with the Pattern entry to show the list of available line patterns (see Figure Q-6) and select the pattern you require in this segment.

4. Also for each segment, set the number of lines of the frame you want this segment to occupy as the Line count. The total number of lines available for the Pattern is determined by the current output video standard. It is up to the user to ensure that the Line counts that are set give the required result.

5. The thumbnail for the pattern on the Gen window changes to show the overall pattern that has been set up.

6. To preserve the pattern you have created for future use, either save it to your User area (the default) or elsewhere on your disk (see Section Q.3). The pattern you create is not automatically saved to disk.

Figure Q-6: Setting the details of a Line Pattern.

Note: (i) The pattern is generated in the current output video standard. If a pattern generated in one standard is subsequently used in a different standard, the segment line counts will be scaled in proportion to the change in vertical resolution between the original and new standards.


(ii) If a given band is set just one line high whilst in an HD resolution, that band would be reduced to less than one line when scaled to SD, which in practice means it would not appear. Hence the translation between different resolutions is necessarily slightly approximate. If the height of each band is of particular importance, then generate the pattern in the standard you wish to use it in.

Modifying a Line Pattern To modify a line pattern, simply call up the Properties control. The entry for the line pattern will be the same Line Pattern editor as was seen when the line pattern was created , set up to define the current line pattern.


To change any aspect of the line pattern:

1. Move the focus to the line pattern. 2. Call up the Properties control. 3. Use the entries in the Properties control to define the line pattern you now require. 4. Use the Save pattern option in the File menu (called up from the Button Bar) to record the

new version on disk. Note: If the pattern has previously been saved, the file stored on disk will be automatically updated with the changes you have made when you exit from the O application.

Q.3 Saving Patterns

Save pattern and Save pattern as… options are used to preserve details of the patterns on disk, both in the File menu and in the ‘right-click’ menu. The Save pattern as option saves a copy in a chosen location on disk; the Save pattern option either overwrites an existing file on disk or, if the pattern is unsaved, saves it in your User area under a standardised name, based on the time and date (alongside settings etc.) . The progress bar is coloured yellow as the image(s) are saved. Note: Patterns stored in your User area can subsequently be exported elsewhere: see Section U.


To save a new version of an existing pattern under its current name,

Take the Save pattern option from the File menu (called up from the Button Bar).

To save a new pattern in your User area:

Take the Save pattern option from the File menu

Either take the Save pattern option from the File menu or take the Save option from the ‘right-click’ menu.

To save a new pattern elsewhere on disk

Take the Save pattern as… option and use the file selector that is displayed to set where the pattern is stored.

Either take the Save pattern as… option or take the Save option from the ‘right-click’ menu and use the file selector that is displayed to set where the pattern is stored.


Q.4 Deleting Patterns

Patterns that are no longer needed in the Gen window can be deleted as follows, while images etc. saved on disk can be deleted using the Manage Disk facility described in Section U:


To delete a pattern from the Gen window:

1. Move the focus to the pattern you want to delete.

2. Select the Delete Pattern option from the Button Bar.

Either: Click on the pattern you want to delete and take the Delete Pattern option from the Button Bar.

Or: Right-click on the pattern you want to delete and take the Delete option from the ‘right-click’ menu.

Note: The above procedure deletes one pattern at a time. Where you want to delete all the patterns that are currently selected, a better route is provided by taking the Clear option from the File menu (called up from the Button Bar). This automatically clears the current set of patterns from the Gen window.

Q.5 Playing Out Test Patterns

Preparation for Play-Out Before a video clip or a test pattern such as a zoneplate can be played out as a test signal:

The selected item needs to be added to the Gen window (as described in Section Q.1)

Any audio etc. that is required needs to have been added to the item – as described in Section Q.6 and following, and

The Output Video Standard needs to be set to the required video standard (as described in Section P.2)

Note: If the selected output video standard differs from the video standard for which the selected pattern was created, then to fit the image to the output video standard, the image may need to be resized either horizontally or vertically or both. The various re-sizing options are offered through a Resize Type option included in the Properties control, together with a None option. The None option should be taken where it is important to maintain the aspect ratio.

Figure Q-7: Gen window’s Properties control showing Resize options


Another option is to turn off the NRZI coding (as required by SMPTE). This can be done individually on the two output channels, allowing you to output one video signal with NRZI coding and the other without this coding if so required. You should however be aware that a video signal without NRZI encoding is effectively full of bit errors and hence impossible to analyse. The presence/absence of this coding is controlled through the SMPTE Scrambler setting included among the properties of SDI Output 1 and SDI Output 2. In normal use, this option should be ticked in order to apply NRZI coding to the output stream.

Figure Q-8: SMPTE Scrambler option, controlling application of NRZI coding.

Note: SMPTE 352 packets detailing the video standard are included by default in HD and 3Gbps output. If these packets are not required, this feature can be disabled. For details, see Section Q.6.

Play-Out Control Panel Mouse & Keyboard

To play out the pattern associated with any thumbnail on the Gen window:

Move the focus to the corresponding thumbnail on the screen and push the GENERAL knob.

Simply click on the corresponding thumbnail on the screen.

The selected pattern is then loaded into the generator’s framestore, from where it is played out over both of the SDI OUT ports unless Dual Generators are enabled (see Section Q.12). The number of the generator on which it is being played out is shown in the thumbnail followed by a ‘progress bar’ which is coloured green as the pattern is loaded. Additional information, for example the number of frames that have been loaded, is automatically displayed in the Pattern Information shown at the bottom of the screen. As a sequence is played, the current position in the sequence is displayed in the slot for the Generator details at the top of the Gen window. Where the OTM is being used with a mouse & keyboard, the sequence can be started and stopped, and moved to a different frame by clicking and dragging on the progress bar. Note: If the selected pattern is a sequence, the sequence will automatically start playing in a continuous loop. In addition a set of transport controls will be displayed which can be used to pause the sequence, to move to the first or last frame or to step through it frame by frame. Further information on playing out sequences is given in Section R.3. Selecting a different pattern for play-out automatically terminates the current pattern that is being played out and switches the generator to playing the new pattern.


Q.6 Modifying the output

Patterns that have been added to the Gen window may subsequently be modified on play-out, for example, to add a known amount of noise. Where Dual Generators are being used (see Section Q.12), different modifiers can be applied to each output stream. These modifiers are provided in the Video subsection of the Generator section of the Properties control. The steps to use are therefore as follows:


To modify the output:

1. Move the focus to the thumbnail of the pattern you want to modify and push the GENERAL knob.

2. Call up the Properties control for example by pressing the PROPS button

1. Click on the thumbnail of the pattern you want to modify.

2. Call up the Properties control (for example by pressing the Tab key.

3. Use the Video section of the Properties control to make the changes you require.

Figure Q-9: Video section of the Gen window Properties


Enable SMPTE 352 When this option is ticked, SMPTE 352 packets are included in the output video stream.

Gain This section of the control offers separate Luma and Chroma controls, allowing the luma and chroma gain to each be adjusted away from of the level in the source. The value is a percentage, so values above 100 increase the luma/chroma (as appropriate).

Noise Whilst the default is for clean outputs, this section allows noise to be separately added to either the luma or the chroma channel. The associated Luma and Chroma options offer a selection of dB values for the noise. Adding 4 dB of noise will make the output extremely noisy, whilst at the other end of the available range, adding just 52 dB of noise will only have a very slight effect.

Bounce The Bounce controls let you flash luma or chroma (or both) on and off. The tick boxes allow the selection of the components to which bounce is to be added; the following High Period and Low Period settings determine the number of fields that the selected components are on and off for between 1 and 15.

Panning By selecting Enable and setting a Speed from 1 to 31, it is possible to have the image/sequence scroll sideways continuously. Selecting Reverse lets you change direction. If you keep Enable selected and drop the speed to 0, the image will simply stop scrolling and remain at its current position. To return the image to the normal position, clear Enable. Please note that one side of the image will drop one line during panning, since the image in effect wraps around from the right hand edge onto the start of the next line on the left hand edge. Please also note that this feature only works with frame-based patterns, handled either individually or as part of a sequence.


Wide Screen Signalling The OTM is able to generate Line 23 wide screen signalling data. The data may be generated in accordance with either the original EN 300 294 specification or the ARDSPEC 1 modification of this specification. For either type of signal, some parts of the packet may be configured from drop down menus while the rest require data to be entered in binary format.

Figure Q-10: Wide Screen Signalling options within the Gen window Properties


Video Index The OTM is also able to add a Video Index to the outgoing signal. Classes 1.1 – 2.2 of both RP186 and ARD format video indexes are supported. Simply use the various drop down menus to make the required settings. The Video Index is automatically generated on the lines normally used for this signal, which are also the default lines for reading the signal.

Figure Q-11: Video Index options within the Gen window Properties


Output Range and Gamma The OTM is also able to vary the output with regard to:

Whether the RGB values are‘Full range’ or scaled to SMPTE range

The Gamma correction applied to the signal, and

The White Level to be used in converting between RGB and XYZ (expressed in cd/m2)

Figure Q-12: Output Encoding options within the Gen window Properties


Q.7 Interpreting Image Files

While the majority of image files use the standard encoding for the type of file, there are some variations. To cater for these, the OTM allows you to define specific settings for the colourspace, RGB range (Full or SMPTE), the gamma value and the reference white level for use when working with particular types of image file. Two approaches are offered:

1. Setting general rules for interpreting particular types of image file; and/or 2. Setting the required interpretation for an individual pattern

The general rules are applied when an image file of the appropriate type is added to the Gen window. The interpretation that this sets can subsequently be modified for individual patterns. Note: EBU yuv16 images are automatically scaled from full range to SMPTE range on opening.

General Rules The general settings to be applied are recorded in the Image Files/Open File Settings section of the Properties control. Separate settings are provided for JPEG, BMP and TIFF format files, along with a Reset option that puts the settings for all three types of file back to their standard values. The steps to use are therefore as follows:


To set the general rules for how image files are interpreted:


2. Call up the Properties control for example by pressing the PROPS button.



3. Use the Image Files/Open File Settings section of the Properties control to make the changes you require.

Figure Q-13: Open File Settings within the Gen window Properties


Individual Images Each image that is added to the Gen window is initially interpreted following the Open File Settings described above. If these settings aren’t appropriate for a particular image, then a different interpretation can be set as follows:


To modify how an individual image is interpreted:





3. Modify the colourspace settings given for the pattern as required.

Figure Q-14: Colourspace settings used for an individual image


The OTM similarly allows you to define the encoding used when JPEG, BMP and TIFF image files are saved. This is recorded in the Image Files/Save File Settings section of the Properties control. The steps to use are therefore as follows:


To set how image files are interpreted:





3. Use the Image Files/Save File Settings section of the Properties control to make the changes you require.

Figure Q-15: Save File settings within the Gen window Properties


Q.8 Adding Simple Audio Tones

The OTM has the ability to generate simple audio tones alongside the current test sequence. It also has the option to either apply the tone just on the first frame or to apply it on all frames except for first. This ‘Click’ mode is particularly useful when playing out sequences in a continuous loop for A/V Timing tests (see Section N). The selected audio tone pattern is applied to any pattern that is played out. The 16 available audio channels are handled as four groups of four channels. Audio may be inserted onto any two of the four audio groups, giving up to eight channels of audio. Each of these channels can be set to generate its own individual frequency (set from a selection from 100Hz to 20kHz). Two sets of frequencies are defined, referred to as Audio Group A and Audio Group B, which are then separately assigned to one of the four audio groups (or left turned OFF). The selected tone pattern is then played out alongside any test sequence until it is either changed or disabled by setting both groups to OFF. The tones are sampled at 48 kHz, with 20- or 24-bits per sample. The waveform is user-selectable out of a choice of sine, square or triangular, and the amplitude across all the channels can be varied from 0 dB to -60 dB.


To add a simple tone pattern to the pattern(s) that are played out:

1. Call up the Properties control window. 2. Fully open the Audio Tone Generation section of the Properties control. 3. Set the following details:

For Audio Groups A & B: Select the frequency to be generated on each of the four channels within each group. Also allocate each group to one of the four Audio groups 1 – 4 (or leave set to OFF). Waveform Parameters: Select the waveform to use (out of the choice of a sine wave, a square wave or a triangle wave) and set the required amplitude. Click Mode: Select from a choice of Off (i.e. tone on all frames), Mute on frame 1 (i.e. tone on the other frames) or Mute except frame 1 (i.e tone only on frame 1). (Mute All Channels provides a quick route to switching the current tone generation set-up between On and Off.

Figure Q-16: Gen window Properties control showing

Audio Tone Generation details.


Q.9 Adding Timecodes

The OTM allows the insertion of ATC timecode packets into the output video – either ATC LTC, ATC VITC #1 or ATC VITC #2 timecode packets, or any combination of these. The timecodes are generated simultaneously so that they will have the same value at all times. The required timecode packets are defined in the Generators/Timecode section of the Properties control.

Figure Q-17: Timecode section of the Gen window Properties.

Use the tick boxes to select the required type(s) of timecode packet. Use the Set value control to set the required timecode. (Note: Press BACK to move on from setting the components of the timecode value.)


Q.10 Adding Deliberate Bit Errors

When testing video production and distribution equipment, it can be useful both to test its response to video signal errors and to examine how well it recovers from such events. To aid such testing, the OTM 1000 includes the option to insert deliberate pixel bit errors into the video signal that is output from either SDI Output 1 or SDI Output 2 of the OTM 1000. These errors can be inserted either into the active video or the blanking as required. There is also the option to insert errors into the video bitstream as it comes out of the SDI bit scrambler to mimic bit errors introduced in the cabling. Bit errors can be introduced at a range of rates from every pixel to once every frame or once in several frames depending on the selected output video standard. Where simultaneous monitoring of SDI Input 1 and SDI Input 2 is enabled (see Section O), it is possible to set up the OTM 1000 to display (for example) the results of passing the video signal containing the errors through the equipment under test alongside the results of passing a copy of the same video signal through a reference system.


To add bit errors to the video bitstream that is played out:

1. Call up the Properties control window. 2. Fully open the SDI Output section of the Properties control for the output on which you

want the bit errors to be inserted. 3. For each output on which you want to generate bit errors, tick the Bit Error Inserter tick

box and set the rate at which you want bit errors to be inserted and where you want these errors to be inserted. Rate: The rate setting defines the required number of ‘good’ pixels between inserting ‘bad’ pixels. Values between 0 and 4194303 can be set. A value of 0 specifies that every pixel should be corrupted. The upper limit is large enough to allow the gap between bad pixels to be more than a frame even where 3G video standards are being used. Active Video: Ticking this option allows bit errors to be included in the active video part of any frame. Blanking: Ticking this option allows bit errors to be included in the blanking (where it can potentially corrupt both standard markers such as EAV, SAV and TRS codes and embedded data such as ANC codes). Post Scrambler: Ticking this option allows errors to be introduced after the signal has passed through the SDI bit scrambler. Note: In this case, the errors may affect either the active video or the blanking because, after scrambling, it is not possible to determine which part of the video bitstream any pixel comes from.


Figure Q-18: Bit Error settings within Gen Window Properties

Note: When either Bit Error Inserter is turned on, the OTM 1000 changes the background to the display of the output video standard (in the top right-hand corner of the screen) to red to draw attention to the reduced quality of the current video output.

Figure Q-19: Gen window showing the marking used when the output is being generated with

deliberate bit errors.


Q.11 Saving and Recalling Pattern Selections

To make it easy to recall a particular set of Patterns whenever you want, the current selection of Patterns can be saved in a Gen Preset (see Section P.2). The information recorded about each pattern normally just comprises the name and location of its file on disk, but where the Preset includes an unsaved line pattern or zoneplate, enough information is recorded to be able to re-create this pattern when the Preset is selected. However, sequences of images that have been captured but not saved won’t be recorded. Note: In earlier versions of the OTM application, sets of Patterns were saved as ‘Configurations’. A Load Configuration option is provided in the File menu (called up from the Button Bar) to allow these earlier sets of Patterns to continue to be used.

Q.12 Dual-Generator Operation

Where the GEN_2_option is installed, the OTM 1000 includes a second test signal generator. This gives the OTM the capacity to output two images or sequences at the same time, one to SDI OUT 1 and the other to SDI OUT 2. Moreover the two outputs can either be run independently or the output from the two generators can be locked together as required for Stereo 3D video. The generators are known as Generator 1 and Generator 2. In single generator mode, only Generator 1 is available and it outputs the generated test signal to both SDI OUT 1 and SDI OUT 2. When dual generation is selected, Generator 1 outputs its test signal to SDI OUT 1 and Generator 2 outputs its test signal to SDI OUT 2. The same Output Video Standard and Genlock are applied to both outputs. The way in which the generators are currently deployed is indicated on the Gen window. The pattern that is currently selected for play-out by Generator 1 is indicated by a ‘1’ marker in the bottom left-hand corner of its thumbnail. A similar ‘2’ marker marks the pattern that is selected for play-out by Generator 2. If the same pattern is being played out by both generators, the thumbnail will show both a ‘1’ and a ‘2’. Note: (i) The use of a second generator halves the amount of memory that is available for any single sequence. The OTM therefore allows you to enable and disable dual-generator operation as required (see below). (ii) It is not possible to use the OTM dual-generation facility to simultaneously output two separate Dual-Link videos or two 3GB Dual-Stream videos.

Dual Generation and Dual-Link The generation of Dual-Link video uses the two outputs for different parts of one video stream generated from a single image source. This is incompatible with dual generation so whenever a dual-link video standard is selected as the output video standard, the selection or otherwise of dual generation is ignored and the OTM operates as if dual generation was not selected.

Dual Generation and Zoneplates The OTM has one zoneplate generator. It is not therefore possible to select a different zoneplate on each generator.


Figure Q-20: Gen window showing the marking used when the OTM is operating

with two generators.

Enabling Dual-Generation Operation With the GEN_2 option installed, the Gen window Properties includes a Dual Generator option.

Figure Q-21: Dual Generator option within Gen window Properties.


When this option is ticked, the OTM’s generators are available to be used either to generate two unrelated test signals or to generate the two signals that go to make up Stereo 3D (S3D) video.


To select Dual Generator operation:


2. Move the focus to the Dual Generator option and press the GENERAL knob to tick this option


2. Click on the tick box next to the Dual Generator option.

To return to Single Generator operation:

1. Use similar steps to those given above to clear the tick next to the Dual Generator option.

Note: A side-effect of ticking the Dual Generator option is that the amount of framestore available for any individual video sequence is halved. If the full framestore is needed to run the required sequence, clear the tick to disable dual generation.

Configuring the Generators The generators both work with the same output video standard and genlock but the gain, noise level, bounce etc. (see Section Q.6) that are applied and the timecode that is generated (see Section Q.9) can be individually for the two generators. When the Dual Generator option is ticked, the Generators section of the Properties control described in Section Q.12 is replaced by identical Generator 1 and Generator 2 sections through which the required settings can be made.

Figure Q-22: Dual Generator option within Gen window Properties.


Note: When the Dual Generator option is ticked, the current Generators settings are applied to both generators. When the Dual Generator option is cleared, the generator retains the settings defined for Generator 1. The way to set up Generator 2 to match Generator 1 is therefore to first clear the Dual Generator option then re-select it.

Playing out Test Signals When working with a single generator, any pattern that is selected for play-out is automatically output on both SDI OUT ports. When the Dual Generators option is ticked, patterns for output on SDI OUT 1 need to be selected for play-out by Generator 1 while those for output on SDI OUT 2 need to selected for play-out by Generator 2. To play-out a pattern on a particular generator, first the required generator needs to be selected. The generator that is currently selected is the one highlighted at the top of the Gen window.


To play-out a sequence on a particular generator:

1. Use the GEN button to highlight the required generator at the top of the Gen window

1. Click on the slot for the required generator at the top of the Gen window to highlight it

2. Load and play the required pattern in the usual way.

The pattern that is selected for play-out on Generator 1 is marked with a ‘1’. The pattern that is selected for play-out on Generator 2 is marked with a ‘2’. To play out the same pattern on both generators, for example with a different gain or noise level, select the same pattern for play-out on both generators. The pattern is then marked with both a ‘1’ and a ‘2’, each associated with a separate progress bar. The version of the test signal output on SDI OUT 1 is then played out with the modifications set for Generator 1 (see above) and controlled either through the Button Bar of Transport controls when Generator 1 is selected or by clicking and dragging on the ‘1’ progress bar, while the version of the test signal played out through SDI OUT 2 is played out with the modifications set for Generator 2 and controlled either through the Button Bar of Transport controls when Generator 2 is selected or by clicking and dragging on the ‘2’ progress bar. Note: The special features of playing out Stereo 3D (S3D) video are described in Section R.


Synchronising Generators If required, it is possible to lock the generators together in such a way that they play out the same frame from the same pattern, while still maintaining the difference of gain etc. specified within the Generator 1 and Generator 2 sections of the Properties control.


To synchronise the generators:


2. Move the focus to the Link Generators option within the Pattern definition and press the GENERAL knob to tick this option


2. Click on the tick box next to the Link Generators option within the Pattern definition.

Figure Q-23: Link Generators option within Gen window Properties.

Where this option has been ticked, the thumbnail for the pattern is marked and when the pattern is selected, it is automatically played out on both generators. It is also automatically stopped on both generators if another pattern is then selected to be played out on either generator.


OmniTek OTM 1000 User Guide, v3.1 R-1

R : Sequence Capture/Play-Out This section describes the facilities for capturing and playing out video clips offered by the CAP_MOTION, CAP_ADV, GEN_MOTION and GEN_ADV options, over those offered by the GEN and GEN_BASIC options (described in Sections P and Q). For example, the basic capture facility offered by the GEN option is limited to capturing single frames of active video. Installing the CAP_MOTION option adds capturing sequences of active video while the CAP_ADV option extends this to capturing full raster images and sequences. Similarly, the play-out feature offered by the GEN option just allows the play-out of still images. Installing the GEN_MOTION option adds sequence play-out and live streaming of MPEG and other compressed files, while the GEN_ADV option extends this to the play-out of full raster video stored in OmniTek’s proprietary RVF format. Note: The facilities described here all also require the GEN option to be installed.

R.1 Capturing Video Clips (supported by the CAP_MOTION and CAP_ADV options)

The capture facility offered by the GEN and GEN_BASIC options (see Section P.3) allows single frames of video to be captured from the input. Where either the CAP_MOTION or the CAP_ADV option is installed, the OTM 1000 is able to capture multiple frames of active video from the current SDI input. Where the CAP_ADV option is installed, this option is further extended to capturing full raster video, complete with any associated ancillary data such as embedded audio, timecodes etc. Up to about 1.7GBytes of image data can be captured (depending on which other options are installed). The following describes the basic steps used to capture and save frames of video from the input video. This procedure divides into two parts: Initial Set-up and Capture. Note: (i) Capture is not available when 3D Analysis is selected (as described in Section I). (ii) Where full raster video is captured and stored on disk, this is stored in OmniTek’s proprietary RVF format. More information about this format is given in Section R.2. (iii) Capture of EBU yuv10 and yuv16 is not supported.

Initial Set-up Before the capture is made, the following details need to be defined:

The number of frames that are to be captured

Whether just active video is to be recorded or full frames (where this is given as an option)

The input stream from which the frames are to be captured. These details are set in the Capture section of the Gen window’s Properties control:


Figure R-1: Gen window Properties control, showing Capture details.


Define the required capture as follows:

1. Display the Gen window and call up its Properties control for example by pressing the PROPS button.

1. Call up the Properties control for the Gen window

2. Open the Capture section of the control. 3. Set the Length entry to the number of frames you wish to capture (automatically truncated if

the selected length exceeds the capacity of the framestore). 4. If the Full-frame option is offered, either tick this to capture full frame data or leave it clear

to capture just the active video. 5. Set the Capture Channel entry to the channel from which the video data is to be captured.

Note: The list shown corresponds to the list of inputs that the OTM 1000 is currently set up to work with. If the input you require is not listed, you probably need to adjust the Analyser settings on the System page of the Config window.


Capture Control Panel Mouse & Keyboard

With the details of the capture recorded in the Gen window’s Properties control, the capture itself can be made as follows:

Take the Capture option offered on the Gen window’s main Button Bar Note: This option is disabled if there is no signal on the selected input. If the Button Bar is currently showing transport controls, press the BACK button. Note: Pressing BACK has no effect on any test pattern that is currently being played out but the generator is disabled while the capture is made.

Take the Capture option offered on the Gen window’s main Button Bar. Note: This option is disabled if there is no signal on the selected input or if 3D analysis is enabled. If the Button Bar is currently showing transport controls, press Backspace. Note: Pressing Backspace has no effect on any test pattern that is currently being played out but the generator is disabled while the capture is made.

The OTM 1000 then captures the specified number of frames from the selected capture channel and adds a corresponding thumbnail to the Gen window display.


Figure R-2: Gen window Button Bar, showing Capture option.

IMPORTANT: Captured images are not automatically saved on disk. So images/sequences you wish to retain will need to be saved using the same Save options as are used to save other types of pattern (see Section Q.3).


Twin-Channel Capture Where the GEN_2 option is installed alongside CAP_MOTION or CAP_ADV, the OTM also offers the option of simultaneously capturing images from both inputs and saving these as a pair that can then be played out simultaneously using the steps described in Section R.4. The procedure used to capture the images is similar to that used to capture any sequence. The difference is in the selection of the ‘pair’ option within the range of Capture Channels.

Figure R-3: Capture properties, showing selection of ‘pair’ option.

The procedure used for saving the captured images is also similar to that used for other captures. The only difference is in the naming of the saved files, half of which automatically have Input_1 in their names while the other half have Input_2, recording the input from which the images were taken.

R.2 RVF Files (Supported by the CAP_ADV and GEN_ADV options) Where full frame data is captured from the video input, this is stored on disk as an RVF file. The OTM also requires full frame video for play-out through the built-in generator to be stored as an RVF file. The RVF file format is a proprietary OmniTek file format. It contains a header, followed by the raw data from the serial bitstream. No processing is done on the video before it is stored, so the original colour space is preserved intact. Details on the file format can be made available to any interested parties. The procedures used for capturing full format data as an RVF file and for playing out an RVF file are much the same as for other types of video data. The only difference is that the Full-frame option needs to be ticked when configuring the data capture. It should however be noted that, because the video data is not compressed in any way, fewer frames of RVF video can be captured than of active video.


R.3 Sequence Play-Out (supported by the GEN_MOTION option) The OTM can play out sequences of up to about 1.7GBytes of image data (depending on which other options are installed). Two main types of video sequence may be played out on the OTM 1000. The more usual choice is to play out a video clip held as either a single YUV file or an RVF file (where supported). Such files are loaded and played out in much the same way as still images: the only difference is that a set of transport controls is offered which can be used to play/stop/step through the sequence as required (see below). The alternative form of sequence that can be played out is one made up of frames held as individual files. The frames can be of any of image types that can be used for single frame images (see Section Q.2), but the files must be named in such a way that the OTM 1000 recognises them as a sequence. Note: The various ‘TSA’ test sequences provided by OmniTek are examples of the second form of sequence. To make such collections of images easy to select, they will normally be stored in separate folders. Note: The various ‘TSA’ test sequences provided by OmniTek are examples of the second form of sequence. Special steps are required both for loading and for playing out any test signals such as Stereo 3D test signals that involve two video streams, one played out through SDI OUT 1 and one through SDI OUT 2. The special steps that are required are described in Section R.4.

Loading a Sequence Control Panel Mouse & Keyboard

To load a sequence that is held as a single file:

Take the Load pattern option from the File menu and use the File Selector that is displayed to pick out the required file.

Take the Load pattern option from the File menu and use the File Selector that is displayed to pick out the required file.

To load a sequence that is held as multiple single images:

1. Take the Load pattern option from the File menu and use the File Selector that is displayed to navigate to the parent directory of the folder in which the required images are stored.

2. Depending on which suits you best, either: a. Use the File Selector that is displayed to

navigate to the parent directory of the folder in which the required images are stored and take the Toggle select option on the Button Bar to select the required folder and all its contents and select OK; or

b. Navigate to the folder in which the required images are stored and use the Toggle select all option to select all the files in this folder, clear the selection on any unwanted files then select OK

1. Take the Load pattern option from the File menu and use the File Selector that is displayed to select the files that make up the sequence. (navigate to the required folder and use Ctrl+A to select all the files, clear the selection on any unwanted files, then press Enter).

2. Take the Open option.

3. When the message appears asking whether the files are to be treated as a sequence, select Sequence.


Note: The number of frames that the OTM can load is limited by the size of framestore that is available. In particular, when the Dual Generator option is selected (as described in Section Q.12), the framestore is divided equally between the two generators with the result that only half the amount of storage is available for loading any particular sequence of images. If you need more frames to be loaded and Dual Generator is ticked but not needed, we would recommend clearing the tick beside Dual Generator.

Recognising a set of frames as a sequence For frames to be recognised as a sequence, each filename must contain a fixed length number i.e. smaller numbers must be padded to the same number of digits as the largest number. The number can be anywhere within the filename, as long as the position of the number within the file name does not change. The number must also increment contiguously. Examples of incorrect filenames: Test_7, Test_8, Test_9, Test_10, Test_11, Test_12 – The digits are not of fixed length. Test_7, 8 and 9 need to be renamed as Test_07, 08, 09 for this sequence to be recognised. Fred_08, Fred_09, Fred_11, Fred_12 – the numbers do not increment contiguously – file Fred_10 is missing, so the sequence will not load. Tmp_02, 03_Tmp, Tmp_04, Tmp_05 – the position of the digits varies.

Playing out a Sequence Sequences are loaded into the generator and played out in much the same way as individual files. The only difference is that a set of transport controls are displayed as a Button Bar (see below).


Figure R-3: Gen window ‘Transport Control’ Button Bar.

The transport controls offered are as follows:

Go to 1st frame of the clip/sequence

Step back in the clip by one frame

Play the clip backwards

Stop playing the sequence;

Play the clip forwards;

Step forwards in the clip by one frame

Go to the last frame of the clip

Enable Loop mode (for playing a sequence) – selected by default Notes: (i) Pressing BACK replaces the set of transport controls by the main Gen window Button Bar without affecting any sequence that is currently playing. (ii) The files from which the selected sequence is taken can be seen by right-clicking on the pattern thumbnail and taking the Locate on Disk option from the menu that is displayed.

Modifying the Output All the options for varying the gain, noise level, colour balance etc. of the test signal described in Sections Q.6 – Q.10 may equally be applied to any sequence that is played out.


R.4 Working with Stereo 3D Video

Stereo 3D video uses two linked video streams, one providing the images for the right eye and the other providing the images for the left eye. Where the GEN_2 option is installed, the OTM can be used to generate a Stereo 3D test signal but some special steps are required when loading the components of this test signal, playing it out or saving a copy to disk (if needed). Note: The procedures are designed to cater for Stereo 3D but same steps may be used to load the frames of any test signal that involves the synchronous generation of separate sequences of images.

Loading 3D Images 3D images are loaded using the dedicated Load 3D Sequence… option included in the File menu or the equivalent Load 3D option included on the Button Bar. When this option is selected, the OTM first offers a File Selector for you to pick out the Left eye images, then follows this with a second File Selector for picking out the Right eye images.


Figure R-4: Gen window Button Bar Load 3D option.

When the sequence is played out, the Left eye images will be output on SDI OUT 1 while the Right eye images are output on SDI OUT 2. The Load 3D options become active when Dual Generators are enabled. The procedure to use is therefore as follows:


To load 3D images:


2. Check that the Dual Generator option is ticked.

3. Take the Load 3D .option from the Button Bar (GAMUT button)


2. Check that the Dual Generator option is ticked.

3. Click on either the Load 3D .option in the Button Bar or the Load 3D Sequence... option in the File menu.

4. Use the File Selector that is displayed to select first the required Left-eye (SDI OUT 1) image(s), then the required Right-eye (SDI OUT 2) image(s).

The 3D images that you have loaded become represented in the Gen window by a double-width pattern. The thumbnail is automatically marked to show that, when played out, the pattern will use both generators and the generators will be synchronised.


. Figure R-4: Example of a thumbnail for a 3D sequence.

Playing Out a 3D Pattern The steps used to play out a 3D pair of images or a 3D sequence are essentially the same as those used to play-out any image or sequence (see Section Q). The only special feature is that the Dual Generator option in the Properties needs to be selected before the images can be loaded into memory. However, it is easy to tell when this option hasn’t been selected because the is only shown in the thumbnail when the Dual Generator option is ticked.

Saving 3D Patterns to Disk Saving any pattern to disk uses the steps described in Section Q.3. The special feature of saving either a 3D image or a 3D sequence is that the files containing ‘Left-eye’ images need to be distinguished from those containing ‘Right-eye’ images. This distinction is made automatically. You use the File Selector that is displayed to pick out the folder in which you want to store the image files and specify the name to be associated with the sequence. The OTM then automatically gives the files containing the Left-eye images names of the form <name>_Input_1_xxxx (where xxxx counts from 0000 to 9999), while the Right-eye images are stored in the same folder as the Left-eye images but under names of the form <name>_Input_2_xxxx.

OmniTek OTM 1000 User Guide, v3.1a S-1

S : Picture Quality Analysis This section describes how to use the facilities of the OTM to assess the picture quality of a video signal relative to a source version of that signal. Note: The facilities described in this section are only available on OTM systems on which the PQA software option has been installed, together with the AV_ISD option (automatically provided alongside the PQA option) and the VIEW_2 option. In addition, GEN, GEN_2 and GEN_MOTION options may be required to carry out certain operations while the VIDEO_xx options that are needed to support the video standards with which you want to work (see Section V). A table detailing the options that are needed for any particular quality assessment is given in the Video Quality Analysis Application Note, which can be downloaded from the OmniTek website. You also need to enable Picture Quality Analysis as described in Section S.2. You should also note that no waveforms, vectorscope or CIE chart displays (see Sections E and H) can be viewed while picture quality analysis is enabled, no depth analysis etc. can be applied to Stereo 3D video (though Rig Alignment facilities are still available – see Section I) and no zoneplates can be either created or played out (see Section Q).

S.1 Overview

Where the appropriate software options are installed, the OTM provides ‘Full-reference’ Picture Quality Analysis (PQA) of both live and stored SD, HD or 3G video. Either the standard Region of Interest facility described in Section E.2 or a user-settable mask may be used to limit the picture quality analysis to a chosen area within the active image. The description of the OTM’s PQA as ‘full-reference’ means that picture quality is determined by comparing the test signal against a known reference version of the same image sequence. The OTM also provides facilities for aligning the signals both automatically and manually. The OTM has a special PQA Mode in which these facilities are offered, along with most of the other facilities described elsewhere in this User Guide (the exceptions are the Waveform and Vectorscope displays described in Section E, the CIE chart described in Section H, the 3D video analysis described in Section I and the zoneplates described in Section Q). The displays for Picture Quality Analysis, a selection of which are shown below, include difference images and sets of graphs and meters showing picture quality measures such as peak signal-to noise ratio (PSNR) all presented in real-time. The OTM also offers a range of ‘single-ended’ measurements such as macroblock count, also made in real-time, and ‘In-Service’ measurement of audio and video delays. Details of the various PQA displays are given in Sections S.3 – S.6: the audio/video delay information is included in a ‘PQA Toolbar’ described on page S-4.


Figure S-1: Example PQA Mode display

While standard PQA measures such as PSNR have well-established algorithms, it has been observed that in practice the results don’t correlate very well with the results of subjective tests. Human assessment turns out to be affected by such factors as proximity to edge and luma level. So alongside the standard PSNR and Macroblock count measures, the OTM offers some proprietary edge-corrected and luma-corrected versions of these measures. In particular, it offers an edge- and luma-corrected version of the PSNR referred to as CSNR. (Further details of the CSNR algorithm are given in the Video Quality Analysis Application Note, which can be downloaded from the OmniTek website.) The results of the analysis can be logged to disk both on their own and alongside other signal integrity data (see Section J.1), while SNMP traps (see Section S.7) can be set for example to trigger alarms when specified thresholds are exceeded. In fact, the OTM’s quality analysis facilities can (if required) be entirely driven using SNMP. The full range of SD, HD and 3G formats are supported, provided the corresponding VIDEO_xx option is also installed (see Section V).


Architecture The analysis is all based on comparing the video of interest against a reference copy. Three basic comparisons can be made: these are of:

one stored image against another stored image;

a live image against a stored image; and

a live image against another live image. This is reflected in the architecture used for quality analysis, as outlined in the following diagram.

SD/HD/3G SDI In 2

SD/HD/3G SDI Out 2

Generator 2

SDI Input Error Checks

SD/HD/3G SDI In 1

SD/HD/3G SDI Out 1

Generator 1


Picture Quality Analysis

In-Service A/V Delay

Reference

Test

‘Auto’ option

Manual Control

Gain/Offset Adjustment

Delay

Figure S-2: System overview, showing how live inputs and stored sequences are compared

to assess Picture Quality, also ‘In-Service’ A/V Delay (see Section N.2)

The key components of this architecture are as follows: SDI Inputs: The two multi-format SDI inputs (75 ohm BNC connectors) provided on the back panel of the OTM. SDI Outputs: The two similarly multi-format SDI outputs (75 ohm BNCs), with the video sources coming from the internal generators (or as an active loop-thru from the corresponding SDI input). Generators: The GEN_2 option required for picture quality analysis gives the OTM two internal generators. Delay: Since passing a signal through hardware inevitably adds some delay, this block acts as a Delay Compensator between the Reference signal and the Test signal. It may be adjusted either manually or automatically up to the equivalent of 15 seconds. In-Service A/V Delay: The principal role of this block is to provide the In-Service A/V Delay facility described in Section N.2. Here it provides A/V Delay data that, on selection of the provided Auto option, is used to set the parameters of the above Delay block. Note: This Auto option is available for use regardless of the type of comparison that is being made. This differs from our classic PQA product which only offered ‘auto’ delay adjustment in ‘Internal/External’ mode. Picture Quality Analysis: This block carries out the required comparisons of the Reference and Test video streams.


Operating Modes There are three distinct operating modes to quality analysis on the OTM – Internal/Internal; Internal/External; and External/External. The required operating mode is set on the PQA Toolbar. A brief introduction to the different modes and to the PQA Toolbar is given below.

Internal/Internal In Internal/Internal mode, the two internal generators are each used to play stored images or image sequences. Generator 1 is used to play the reference sequence, while Generator 2 is used to play the test sequence. No external connections to the unit are necessary. The sequences are set to play in an endless loop and are automatically synchronized. This mode is typically used to test the quality of copies generated by other equipment.

Internal/External Internal/External mode is used to determine the effect on picture quality of a transmission path (typically through one or more pieces of equipment). The chosen sequence is played in an infinite loop on Generator 1. The output from this generator is fed both to the external hardware under test and directly into the OTM’s Analyser, while the output from the external hardware is fed back into one of the OTM’s SDI inputs. The calculations performed by the OTM then show the differences that have resulted from passing the signal through the external hardware.

External/External In this mode, two separate source signals are fed into the OTM, which looks at the difference between the two signals. This mode may be used to determine the level of degradation suffered at different points in a transmission chain. Another typical use for the External/External mode is in production testing. For these tests, the choice of which signal takes the role of the reference signal and which takes the role of the test signal depends on which signal has suffered the greater external delay because that signal needs to be treated as the Test signal. Note: Generator functions are disabled in External/External mode.

PQA Toolbar Mode Selection Compensation Measurement

Figure S-3: PQA Toolbar

This toolbar is displayed towards the bottom of the View window when the OTM is in PQA Mode. There are three main parts to the toolbar:

1. Mode Selection – i.e. where you select Internal/Internal; Internal/External; External/External.

2. Compensation – the various adjustments that are currently being applied: these may be updated either manually or automatically (see ‘3’ below).

3. Measurement – the values that the OTM has determined as the appropriate adjustments, based on the analysis being carried out by the In-Service A/V Measurement facility – together with an Auto button that both prompts the measurement to be made and copies certain values to the Compensation section of the toolbar. Note: By default, the Auto option just uses the Frames value to set the Video delay but it can also be set to transfer gain and offset values as well by ticking the Auto apply gain/offset compensation option included on the Video Config page of the Config window (see Section T.2).

For further information, see Step 3 below.


S.2 Setting Up the OTM for Quality Analysis

The OTM you are using may either have been provided as a general waveform analyser/test signal generator or as a dedicated Quality Analysis system. Where the OTM is a general waveform analyser, there are three steps to setting it up for Quality Analysis: 1. Switching the OTM into PQA Mode 2. Configuring it for the required type of analysis (Internal/Internal; Internal External; or

External/External) 3. Aligning the Test and Reference signals. When the OTM provides a dedicated Quality Analysis system, you just need to follow Steps 2 and 3.

Step 1: Switch into PQA Mode OTMs that provide general waveform analysis, first need to be switched into PQA Mode. The steps to use are given below, along with the steps to use to return to general waveform analysis when you have finished.


To switch the OTM into PQA Mode:

1. Call up Config window and select the System page. 2. Set the Application type option at the top of the System section to select Picture Quality

Analyser.

To switch the OTM out of PQA Mode:

1. Call up Config window and select System page.

2. Set the Application Type option at the top of the System section to select Waveform Monitor/Signal Generator.

Figure S-4: Application Type selection


Step 2: Setting the OTM up for the required Operating Mode The OTM supports three types of comparison.

Set-up for Internal/Internal Comparison The Internal/Internal set-up is used to compare stored images or sequences. The required set-up is outlined in the following diagram.

SD/HD/3G SDI In 2

SD/HD/3G SDI Out 2

Generator 2


SD/HD/3G SDI In 1

SD/HD/3G SDI Out 1

Generator 1




Reference

Test

‘Auto’ option

Manual Control


Delay

Figure S-5: System Set-Up for Internal/Internal Comparisons

Note: Images and sequences may be held in any of the common PC file formats, such as .bmp, .jpg, or .tif, or in the Abekas .YUV and .YUV10 format. The steps used are as follows:


Step 1: Select Internal/Internal Mode

Select Internal/Internal from the drop down Mode menu on the PQA Toolbar.

Step 2: Load and run the saved images/sequences

1. Set the required Output Video Standard. (See Section P.2) 2. Take the Load Pair option offered on the Button Bar and follow the instructions to select

first the Reference image/sequence, then the Test image/sequence. 3. Click on the image/sequence icon to generate the images.


Set-up for Internal/External Comparison The Internal/External set-up is used to determine the effect on picture quality of a transmission path (typically through one or more pieces of equipment). The required set-up is outlined in the following diagram.

SD/HD/3G SDI In 2

SD/HD/3G SDI Out 2

Generator 2


SD/HD/3G SDI In 1

SD/HD/3G SDI Out 1

Generator 1




Reference

Test

‘Auto’ option

Manual Control


Delay

Equipment

Under

Test

Figure S-6: System Set-Up for Internal/External Comparisons

The sequence used for the test is played out of both SDI output ports. The steps used are as follows:


Step 1: Select Internal/External Mode

Select Internal/External from the drop down Mode menu on the PQA Toolbar.

Step 2: Load and run the Test sequence

1. Set the required Output Video Standard. (See Section P.2) 2. Use the Image option offered on the Button Bar to load the saved Reference

image/sequence. 3. Click on the image/sequence icon to generate the images.

Step 3: Pass the signal from SDI Out 1 through the test equipment and return it to SDI In 2.


Set-up for External/External Comparison The required set-up is outlined in the following diagram.

SD/HD/3G SDI In 2

SD/HD/3G SDI Out 2

Generator 2


SD/HD/3G SDI In 1

SD/HD/3G SDI Out 1

Generator 1




Reference

Test

‘Auto’ option

Manual Control


Delay

Figure S-7: System Set-Up for External/External Comparisons

Note: The signal used as the Reference signal needs to be the one that has suffered the smaller delay. If that is the Input 2 signal, then you need to swap over the two inputs. You can readily tell if you need to swap by calling up the PQA Meters display described in Section S.4: if the Video Delay line of this display shows a negative value, the signal on Input 1 is lagging behind the signal on Input 2 and the two signals need to be swapped. The steps used are as follows:


Step 1: Select External/External Mode

Select External/External from the drop down Mode menu on the PQA Toolbar.

Step 2: Feed the signals into SDI In 1 and SDI In 2

Step 3: Check if Input 1 is in advance of Input 2 or the other way round, and switch if necessary

1. Check the value shown under Frames in the PQA Toolbar. 2. If a negative number of frames is shown, swap the inputs.


Step 3: Align Test and Reference Signals Quality measurements are only meaningful when comparing the corresponding frame, when those frames are aligned horizontally and vertically, and when the luma & chroma levels are matched reasonably closely. This typically requires various adjustments to be made. The required adjustments are made using PQA Toolbar shown towards the bottom of the display when the OTM is in PQA Mode. The ‘Compensation’ section of this toolbar shows adjustments currently being made. The ‘Measurement’ section shows the results of the last comparison made for you by the In-Service Delay block. The most efficient method of setting the Compensation section starts with using the Auto button included on the PQA Toolbar. This automatically triggers the In-Service Delay block to measure the timing delay etc. and display the result in the Measurement section of the toolbar, It also sets the Video Delay to the number of frames shown on the Measurement side of the PQA Toolbar, together with the corresponding gain and offset values if the Auto apply gain/offset compensation option is selected on the Video Config page of the Config window (see Section T.2). Alternatively, all the Compensation settings may be adjusted manually: how to determine the values to set from the measurements given is explained in the table below. (The Clear button may be used to revert all the Compensation settings to their default values.) When adjusted correctly, the PNSR will be at its highest. Important: Before selecting the above Auto apply option, it is important to understand that the reliability that can be placed on the values shown in the Measurement section is strongly dependent on the content of the video that is being transmitted. A test signal with high luma and chroma contrast will produce the best results for the luma/chroma gain & offset measurement. A signal with low contrast luma or chroma will likely give inaccurate results. A first guess at the values to set is again provided by the Measurement section of the PQA Toolbar which shows the values currently being deduced from the video inputs.


PQA Toolbar Mode Selection Compensation Measurement

Figure S-8: PQA Toolbar

This toolbar appears near the bottom of the View window when the OTM is in PQA Mode. Some of the Compensation settings are applied to the Reference signal; some are applied to the Test signal. The way to ‘read’ the Compensation and Measurement parts as follows:

Compensation Section: Used to adjust for differences between the Reference and Test signals Video Delay Number of frames by which the Reference signal is being delayed in

the attempt to bring it into sync with the Test signal. Note: You should note that the delay only affects operations in which the two signals are compared: in particular, the Reference signal won’t be delayed where it is displayed in a Picture tile.

Picture H/V Offsets applied to compensate for any horizontal or vertical displacement suffered by the test signal images. The H value is calibrated in pixels, with sub-pixels for fine tuning, while the V value is calibrated in video lines.

Luma/Chroma Gain Adjustment for differences in the luma/chroma levels in the Test signal compared with those in the Reference signal.

Luma/Chroma Offset Adjustment for differences between the black levels on the Test and Reference signals. Greater than 1 if the black level on the Test signal is lower than that on the Reference signal; less than 1 if the black level on the Test signal is higher.

Measurement Section: Displays the measurements made by the In-Service A/V Delay block when the Auto button was last pressed. Pixels/Lines Record any offset detected in the positioning of the image in the test

signal. Any values recorded here need to be compensated for through the H / V fields of the Compensation section.

Luma/Chroma Gain The differences measured between the level of the Test signal components and those of the Reference signal. The corresponding Gain settings in the Compensation section should be set to the inverse of the values recorded here.

Luma/Chroma Black The black levels of the Test signal. The Luma Offset value in the Compensation section should be set to 64 minus the recorded Luma Black level, while the Chroma Offset value should be set to 512 minus the recorded Chroma Black level.

SDI Timing Record the gross timing differences between the SDI input and the SDI output at the transport level, expressed as a number of frames plus a number of lines plus a number of pixels. The Frames value should be used to set the Video Delay field of the Compensation section. (The OTM automatically applies the adjustment needed as a result of the lines + pixels element of this timing difference.)

Measurement Confidence

Advice on the degree of confidence that should be placed in the Gain/Offset and in the Video delay that are currently being displayed.


S.3 Picture Difference Display

One way of assessing differences in picture quality is through simple visual inspection of Difference images created when the Reference and Test images are compared.

Figure S-9: Example Difference Display.

Another option is an Edge Map.

Figure S-10: Edge Map Display


These images are offered by the ‘Picture’ display, alongside its standard high-resolution real-time representation of the video currently being analyzed (described in Section F). A variety of displays can be shown. The options include a range of PSNR and CSNR displays (at different levels of sensitivity). (CSNR is a proprietary version of PSNR that takes edge and luma effects into account: for further details of the CSNR algorithm, see the Video Quality Analysis Application Note, which can be downloaded from the OmniTek website.) The Difference image is limited to just the active picture but may include a ‘Region of Interest’. Other facilities include “burn-in” windows for overlays such as timecodes and a crosshair marking the current point of interest for analysis (and an exploded view of the image at that point). See Section F for details. In common with the standard video proxy display described in Section F, the aspect ratio used for the display can either be set manually or determined directly from the image (assuming square pixels) or taken from Video Index, Wide Screen Signalling or Active Format Description data embedded in the video. The difference image can be shown either on the standard analyzer display or on a separate monitor attached to the OTM’s Video Out port (as described in Section A.2).

Selection The Picture display used for Difference Images is a member of the PICTURE category. The steps used to display the desired Difference image are as follows:


To show the Picture display:

1. Press the PICT tile button. 1. Select Picture from the PICTURE section of the View Tile Browser.


2. Set the Source to Difference in the Properties (see ‘Display Properties’ below). 3. Set the type of Difference image you want.


The following Configuration settings affect how the difference image is displayed:

Aspect Ratio On the Video Config page of the Config window is a group of options concerned with the Picture Aspect Ratio. The Type option selects the source for the aspect ratio used in displaying the Picture view, from a choice of ‘None’, ‘Manual’ and various WSS, Video Index and Active Format Descriptor formats. The ‘None’ option causes the aspect ratio to be set by the number of lines and the number of pixels per line in the Active frame, while the WSS, Video Index and AFD options tell the OTM to take the aspect ratio from the associated embedded data. Alternatively, a specific aspect ratio can be set by selecting the Manual option and then setting the required X and Y components of this aspect ratio as the Manual X Aspect Ratio and Manual Y Aspect Ratio values.


Display Properties Other aspects of the Picture display are determined by the tile’s properties, a complete read-out of which is given in the Properties control (displayed by pressing the PROPS button). Shortcuts to the most-commonly required settings are provided through the Button Bar. (Control Panel: press GENERAL or OTHER; Mouse/Keyboard: click on the tile to display.)

Properties Control

Figure S-11: Picture Properties.

Button Bar

Size The Size option offers a choice of having the picture size automatically Stretched (scaled) to fit the tile or being displayed at 1:1 size (half width, half height), regardless of the size of the tile in which it is displayed (Unity). The Button Bar Size option switches between these two settings. Further details may be found in Section F.

Mode The Mode option offers a choice of display mode for the video image (Only the active area is shown of any difference images):


Active Picture: Shows the active image area. Pulse Cross: The Pulse Cross mode delays the video by half a frame both horizontally and vertically, to emulate the HV delay mode of CRTs. This can give a clearer view of the data adjacent to blanking. Full Raster: Shows both the active image area and the blanking area. The display also covers both fields of interlaced video. The Button Bar Mode option cycles through these display modes. Further details may be found in Section F.

Picture source Selects the type of image to be displayed: Live image; Reference signal; Test signal; or Difference signal. The Button Bar Picture source option cycles through the possible types.

Difference display The Difference display setting allows you to select the type of difference signal that is generated. The options (shown right) include a range of PSNR and CSNR displays at different levels of sensitivity. The Button Bar Difference display option cycles through the different options.

Timecode The Timecode options enable the display of timecode data embedded in the video and define the text style and the position for their display. The display of timecodes is described further in Section F.2.

Closed Captions The Closed Captions options enable the display of captions embedded in the video. For further details, see Section F.2.

Enable ROI/Modify ROI These options enable the definition of a Region of Interest on the Picture View as described in Section F.4. When enabled, the analysis is only applied to the selected Region of Interest: this may be used to remove the top and bottom lines, and the pixels near the edges, from the error checking process. This is intended to handle video where the edges near the sync are corrupted. The ROI has no other effect on the data.

Zoom The Zoom View option adds a sub-window containing a 15x15- or 31x31-pixel segment of the image around the current position of the crosshair cursor (see Section F.5).

Crosshair The Crosshair options in the Properties control enable the display of the crosshair cursor, while the Show Crosshair option on the Button Bar switches this display on and off (see Section F.2).

Show Cage The Show Cage option in the Properties control switches the display of Safe Action and Safe Title cages (see Section F.3).


S.4 PQA Meters Display

This display comprises a set of meters that measure differences between corresponding Reference and Test images. The user can select which meters are displayed.

Figure S-12: Example PQA Meters display.

The display comprises:

A Video Delay meter showing how much the Test signal is delayed relative to the Reference signal (and hence the number of frames by which the Reference signal needs to be delayed for a valid assessment to be made). Note: This value may be shown as a number of frames and/or as a number of milliseconds (ms).

Lip-sync and audio delay meters Individual meters for your selection of PQA parameters.

The meters are also marked to show the difference between acceptable values and values outside the limits specified on the Video Config page of the Config window, while ‘traffic lights’ to the left of each meter indicate whether the current status is Good (green), Warning (yellow) or In Error (Red). The current value of each parameter is indicated by a solid white diamond (coloured if in error) and is also shown to the right of the meter. Note: Some of the meters show both the current value and the average over the analysis duration. The average value is indicated on the meter by an open diamond (also coloured when in error).

Selection The PQA Meters display is a member of the STATUS category.


To display the PQA Meters:

Press the STATUS tile button until the PQA Meters appear.

Select PQA Meters from the STATUS section of the View Tile Browser.



Configuration The following Configuration settings affect how the PQA Meters are displayed. The required values are all set on the Video Config page of the Config window (described in Section T.2).

Analysis Duration The Analysis Duration setting controls the total duration displayed by the graphs, expressed as a number of frames.

Analyzer Mask Also included is an Enable mask option, together with Left, Right, Top and Bottom settings that allow the user to limit the part of the active image that is analysed to the part of the display remaining once the specified numbers of pixels/lines have been removed. Alternatively the Enable mask option can be left unticked and the required area selected as the Region of Interest (see Section E.2).

Error Level (set individually for each PQA Chart parameter) The Error Level associated with each PQA parameter determines the threshold for pass/fail, event-based logging. It is represented on the chart by a dotted line.

Display Properties

Details of the comparison made are set through options offered both in the Properties control (Control Panel: press PROPS to display).

Properties Control

Figure S-13: Properties Control for PQA Meters display.

PQA Meters This section lets you tick the parameters that you want to display.


S.5 PQA Charts

This display is the main reporting medium for the PQA measurements made by the OTM.

Figure S-14: Example PQA Charts display. The main section of the display comprises graphs of the various parameters that are calculated. Which graphs are displayed is determined by the options selected in the Properties control (see below). The Properties control may also be used to set the style of the graphs (line or solid), the layout of the graphs (stacked, parade or overlay) and the colours used to display the graphs. Each graph is calibrated between 0 to 100. In each case, 100 is good, and 0 is bad. Somewhere in-between will be the Error Level that marks the threshold between acceptable and unacceptable values, the location of which is set on the Video Config page of the Config window (see Section T.2) and indicated by a broken line on the display. The threshold to set should be determined by the user, based on their experience of using the product. The horizontal axis is also common to each graph, and shows the number of frames being displayed. The default is to display the most recent 500 frames (with the most recent frame labelled as frame number 500 and located at the rightmost edge of the graph), but this ‘Analysis Duration’ can be changed on the Video Config page. The yellow line marks the current cursor position. The pair of numbers shown above this line indicate the current cursor position and the value of the relevant parameter at that position. The cursor position is initially placed at the right-most point of the graph (making the value shown that for the newest frame of data) but it can be moved to other locations by clicking on the display. (The cursor moves to the same position in all the graphs to show you a complete set of data at the selected point.) Options on the Button Bar (and in the Properties control) allow you to both clear the current data and to pause collection of PQA data, in essence freezing the display.

Selection The PQA Charts display is a member of the WFM category.


To display the PQA Charts:

Press the WFM tile button. Select PQA Charts from the WFM section of the View Tile Browser.




The following Configuration settings affect how the PQA Charts are displayed. The required values are all set on the Video Config page of the Config window (described in Section T.2).

Analysis Duration The Analysis Duration setting controls the total duration displayed by the graphs, expressed as a number of frames.


Error Level Climb & Drop Speed The Error Level Climb Speed and Error Level Drop Speed affect the rate of change of the graphs. It is normal to leave both controls set to 100, so that the graphs directly reflect the calculated data. However it can sometimes be desirable to filter the graphs slightly, so the ability exists to slow the rate of change of the various parameters.

Error Level (set individually for each PQA Chart parameter) The Error Level associated with each PQA parameter determines the threshold for pass/fail, event-based logging. It is represented on the chart by a dotted line.

CPQ Weighting The CPQ (Combined Picture Quality) settings allow you to define the weightings to be used in setting the overall, combined picture quality. The weighting applied to any component is determined by the six parameters shown in the dialogue. Note: The total of the weightings set needs to add up to 100.

Edge Compensation Threshold The Edge Compensation threshold affects how the CSNR edge-compensated signal to noise ratio is calculated (see the description of the CSNR algorithm in the Video Quality Analysis Application Note, which can be downloaded from the OmniTek website).

MNL (Macroblock) Settings Two factors affect the identification of macroblocks within the incoming video data. When Luma Compensation is selected, a luma characteristic curve is applied to the macroblock detector, which causes it to ignore block edges where the picture is very dark. When Edge Compensation is selected, the edge-detector mechanism used in the CSNR calculation is applied to the macroblock detector. This results in macroblocks being ‘amplified’ in edge-regions of the test image. Note: The basic macroblock algorithm is single-ended and operates only on the test image. It does not need any reference image to be present. However the luma & edge compensation functions selected here are only valid when a reference signal is both present in the PQA and correctly aligned with the test image.


Display Properties Other aspects of the PQA Charts display are determined by the tile’s properties, a complete read-out of which is given in the Properties control (Control Panel: press PROPS to display). Shortcuts to several settings are provided through the Button Bar (Control Panel: press GENERAL or OTHER; Mouse/Keyboard: click on tile to display).

Properties Control

Figure S-15: PQA Charts Properties.

Button Bar

Picture Quality Charts This section lets you tick the parameters that you want to display and set the colours used for the associated graphs. To set the colour, select the colour block that is shown then pick the required colour from the dialogue that is displayed. Note: The PSNR calculation applies the standard public-domain algorithm for determining the signal to noise ratio. The CSNR calculation applies a proprietary algorithm developed by OmniTek that compensates for picture brightness and takes into account the way humans respond to edges. There is further information on these algorithms in the Video Quality Analysis Application Note, which can be downloaded from the OmniTek website.


Figure S-16: PQA Chart Colour Selector.

Source Lets you switch between displaying captured PQA data (saved or unsaved) and displaying PQA charts for the live input.

Close Files Enables you to shut captured PQA data.

Sync Capture Synchronises data capture to the sequence that is being played out. (Only available where Internal/Internal and Internal/External comparisons are being made.)

Display Type The charts can be displayed either as Solid bars or just as a Line showing the peak level. The Display Type option on the Button Bar toggles between these two options.

Pause Halts the normal update of the graph window. It freezes the PQA readings, then lets the display update as normal when it is clicked on a second time. Whilst the display is paused, live data is ignored, so when the graphs are re-activated, they start filling with current data. The PSNR etc. values relating to the time the graphs were paused are not displayed.

History Data Clear: Clears the data from the currently displayed graphs. Save: Starts the process of saving PQA data to disk (see ‘Creating Logs’ below). Load: Used to load a saved XML file (see ‘Reviewing Logs’ below). Compare: Starts the process of comparing PQA data (see ‘Comparing Logs’ below).

Layout The charts may be either Stacked, Overlaid or presented as a Parade.


Capturing and Comparing Picture Quality Graphs Snapshots of the picture quality results may be written to disk as XML files. The snapshots may be captured and saved in an XML file either by taking the Save option offered on the PQA Charts Button Bar (shown above) or by taking History data: Save from the PQA Charts Properties (also shown above). It is then possible to compare the data in different snapshots. When the OTM is driven remotely (see Section S.7), it is also possible to compare the data against a ‘Gold reference’. Note: The PQA data shown in Status windows is recorded alongside other status information when you record an Event Log as described in Section J.1.

Saving PQA Data to Disk


To save PQA data as an XML file:

1. Either: Take the Save option offered on the PQA Charts Button Bar (shown above) Or: Take History data: Save from the PQA Charts Properties (also shown above). The capture of PQA data is frozen at that point, in preparation for saving the current data.

2. Use the File Save dialogue that appears to specify the folder and file name for the XML file. (If you don’t specify these details, the OTM will continue to log the PQA data but will report the recorded data as <Unsaved>.)

After the file has been saved, the window continues to show the display at the point the snapshot was taken. The Source option (either on the Button Bar or in the Properties control) can be used to switch between this display (and any previously saved snapshots) and the current Live display. The Close Files option in the Properties control may be used to close the open snapshots. Note: The above facilities only store a set of PQA Charts. There is a separate event-based logging facility to store values when user-configurable thresholds are exceeded. This event-based logging is accessed from the main application toolbar, and is described in Section J.1.

Synchronised Capture The Properties control includes a Sync Capture option, also included on the Button Bar. When this option is ticked and you take the Save option, the OTM automatically captures the data for one or more complete run-through starting at frame 1 of the sequence being played out from Generator 1. The number of passes through the sequence is determined by the Synchronised capture passes setting on the Video Config page of the Config window. When the last frame is reached, logging stops and the window continues to show the display at the point the logging was stopped. The Source option (either on the Button Bar or in the Properties control) can then be used as above to switch between this display (and other previously saved logs) and the current Live display. Note: Since this function is related to sequence play-out, it is only available when the OTM is set up for Internal/Internal or Internal/External comparisons.


Reviewing Snapshots A PQA snapshot that has been stored as an XML file can be re-displayed as follows:


To review PQA data that has been stored as an XML file:

1. Either: Take the Load option offered on the PQA Charts Button Bar (shown above) Or: Take History data: Load from the PQA Charts Properties (also shown above)

2. Use the Select File dialogue that appears to pick out the required XML file. 3. Take the OK button in that dialogue. 4. Use the Source option (either on the Button Bar or in the Properties control) to switch

between this display (and other previously saved snapshots) and the current Live display.

Comparing PQA Snapshots The PQA Charts facility includes a Compare option that produces a set of graphs showing the differences between two saved sets of data. An example is shown below.

Figure S-18: PQA Chart Comparison. In this version of the display, each PQA Chart comprises a green trace and a blue trace. The green trace follows the values recorded in the first XML file to be picked out; the blue trace follows the values recorded in the XML file that is being compared against it. The way the colours are applied is also detailed at the bottom of the display. Shown alongside the cursor are the values at the current position of the cursor as <1st file value>/<2nd file value>


To compare two saved snapshots:

1. Either: Take the Compare option offered on the PQA Charts Button Bar (shown above) Or: Take History data: Compare from the PQA Charts Properties (also shown above).

2. Use the File Selector that appears to pick out the files that you want to compare.


S.6 Status

Real-time status information about both the Reference signal and the Test signal is available by calling up the Status display for that signal. The status of the Reference signal is shown by calling up the Status display and setting it to show information about Input 1; the status of the Test signal is shown by calling up the Status display and setting it to show information about Input 2. These parts of the Status display show Picture Quality information. They also show SDI Timing and In-Service Delay Measurement data (see Section N.2).

Figure S-19: Quality Analysis Status Summary.

Note: The quality details shown in the Status display relate to differences between the two signals and so is the same for both inputs. It can therefore be seen either in a Status display that is set up to show Input 1 information or in one set up to show Input 2 information. Brief information on how to call up the Status display is given below. Further information and the details it displays is given in Sections E.6 and E.7. How to set the Status display to show information about Input 1 or Input 2 is described in Section C.3. The current section also describes the aspects of the Status display that are special to operation in PQA Mode.


Selection The Status View is a member of the STATUS category.



1. Press the STATUS tile button until the Status View appears.

2. Press OTHER to display the Button Bar and use to select the required status information.

1. Select Status from the STATUS section of the View Tile Browser.

2. Click on the tile to display the Button Bar and use to select the required status information.

(For more detailed instructions, see Section E.1.) Quality analysis information can be seen by scrolling the Status Overview display to show the Quality Analysis section or by cycling through the Video set of Status Summaries until the Quality Analysis summary is displayed.

Configuration Issues The following Configuration settings affect the PQA data displayed on the Status View: Acceptable values need to be recorded for each of the parameters in the PQA Settings section of the Video Config page of the Config window, together with your choice of whether exceeding these limits should be reported as an error or simply cause a warning to be given: see Section T.2 for further details.

Error Level (set individually for each PQA parameter) The Error Level determines the threshold for pass/fail, event-based logging.

Timeout (set individually for each PQA parameter) The Timeout value smoothes the reporting of errors by requiring the error condition to be in place for a minimum time before the error is reported. The timeout can be set to any value from one frame upwards.


Video Information Displayed

PQA Section The following values are given:

Current and average PSNR, CSNR, MNL and CPQ values

The Average Picture Level for the Reference signal and the Test signal


S.7 Remote Control

In common with other areas of the OTM’s operation, Picture Quality Monitoring can be driven remotely using the SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol. This is described in Appendix II. The special feature of this control in relation to Quality Analysis is that SNMP scripts that have been created for use with the Classic OmniTek PQA system may be used with an OTM running in PQA Mode without modification. Moreover, the results given will be the same as if the quality assessment had been carried out on a Classic PQA system. You may however wish to modify the SNMP script to take advantage of the additional features offered by the OTM:

Analysis of 3Gb/s video

Auto delay measurement in all three operation modes, not just Internal/External

Both Reference and Test APL measurements Note: When driven remotely, picture quality traces can be compared against a ‘Gold’ capture file. The error threshold for this operation is set on the Video Config page of the Config window (see Section T.2).


OmniTek OTM 1000 User Guide, v3.1a T-1

T : The Config Window The facilities described in this section are available on all OTM 1000 installations.

T.1 Overview

The Config window is concerned with system-level aspects of the OTM 1000 – from the version of software and firmware that are installed, through details of input and output channels available to the system, to the levels at which errors are reported and whether error events cause SNMP traps and/or alarms to be generated. The Config window is divided into pages, concerned with different areas of how the OTM 1000 is configured. These pages are available as separate entries on the Button Bar displayed on the Config window.

WFM VECT PICT AUDIO GAMUT STATUS TIMING PHY

Figure T-1: Config Window Button Bar

The pages of the Config window are described below in the order they appear on the Button Bar.


To display the required Config information:

1. Press the CONFIG button on the control panel.

1. Click on Config in the Windows toolbar.

2. Use the Button Bar to select the required page of information.

Saving and Recalling Specific System Set-ups The settings made on the different pages of the Config window can be recorded for re-use either on the present OTM system or on another OTM or OTR system by exporting the current Configuration (as described in Section U). The current Configuration is also recorded as part of the System Settings when these are exported as an .OTX file (again as described in Section U). Importing either saved file then implements these settings on the destination system. The Configuration records all the details recorded on these pages. The changes made when a saved Configuration is imported is selected are therefore limited to the Config window. The System Settings additionally include any Presets that the user has defined (see Section B.4), so when an .OTX file is imported, this may also change what presets are available. The steps used to export and import the current Configuration and the current System settings are given in Section U.


T.2 Video Config Page

The Video Config page of the Config window is concerned with how incoming video is analysed, in particular the levels at which errors are reported and whether these events are reported in the log, cause an SNMP trap to be generated or trigger an alarm. The configuration covers a wide range of parameters. These parameters are initially set by default in line with industry practice, but where you have particular requirements, the Video Config page allows you to customise these settings as you require.

Figure T-2: Video Configuration Page

The information is arranged as a table, with the different parameters listed on the left. The parameters are arranged in a hierarchy, with each subsection defining the settings that are important in how a particular feature is handled. Some of these settings are tick box selections that turn features on or off; others set critical values. In particular, several of the settings define the threshold between desired operation and an error. Where errors may be generated, there is then a column to the right that specifies the level of error (OK, Warning or Error), followed by three tick boxes through which the different possible responses to an error (Show in Log, SNMP Trap and Alarm) may be selected. In common with other hierarchical lists, [+] or [-] symbols are shown next to the headings within this list depending on whether there is additional information to be displayed ([+]) or the associated section is currently displayed in full ([-]). Information about the various settings is given below.


Customising Settings


Any of the settings made on the Video Configuration page can be changed as follows:

1. Move the focus to the name of the parameter you want to change by twisting either the GENERAL knob or the VERT knob. Open or close sections of the display as you go by pushing the knob when the highlighting is on the [+] / [-] symbol.

2. Twist the HORIZ knob to move the focus between the different settings associated with this parameter.

3. To change a value, push the HORIZ knob then either twist it to wind the current value up or down, or type the required value using the numeric keypad – then push the knob again or press the ENTER button. To change an option selection, first push the HORIZ knob then twist this knob to pick the required option from the menu that is displayed. Press BACK to confirm your selection. To toggle a tick box, simply push the HORIZ knob.

4. Use HORIZ to move the focus back to the parameter name.

5. Repeat the above steps to set other parameters.

1. Scroll through the display, opening or closing sections of the list as necessary until the required parameter is displayed.

To open/close sections of the list, click on the [+]/[-] symbol.

2. Change the parameter’s settings as follows: To change a value, click on the current setting then either edit this setting by hand or use either the scroll wheel on your mouse (if it has one), the up and down arrow keys on your keyboard or the markers adjacent to the setting to scroll through nearby values. To change an option selection, click on the current setting and pick the required option from the associated drop-down menu. To toggle a tick box, simply click on the box.

3. Repeat the above steps to set other parameters.

Returning Settings to the Default value


To return an individual parameter to its default setting: Select the parameter with the cursor and take the Reset option from the Button Bar.

To return all the parameters to their default setting: Take the Reset All option from the Button Bar,


The Parameters

Input Video Standards This section offers for each of Input 1 and Input 2 the option of either allowing Automatic Detection of the input video standard or of forcing the OTM to work with a particular input video standard. To force a particular input video standard to be used, clear Automatic Detection, then use the Interface, Raster, Refresh and Sampling settings in that order) to specify the required video standard. Finish by selecting Set (which will be flashing as a reminder).

RGB Input Section This section defines the way RGB data streams are interpreted.

Colour Primaries Determines the set of primaries used in interpreting RGB signals. The choice is between SMPTE C Gamut (NTSC); EBU Gamut (PAL); Rec. 709 Gamut (HD); Rec. 2020 Gamut (UHD) and DCI Gamut.

YUV Mode Determines the standard to follow in converting RGB to YCbCr. The options are SMPTE C; EBU; Rec. 709; or Rec. 2020.

Range Selects between two possible waveform calibrations: the SMPTE range of 64 to 940/960, and the Full range of 0 to 1023.

LUT Selects the look-up table applied to the waveform before display. The Linear setting leaves the data unchanged; the Logarithmic setting applies a standard log look-up table to the data; selecting Custom applies the look-up table contained in the named Custom LUT file.

Remove Gamma The tick box selects removal of gamma correction before display. The gamma value to be removed is set below.

XYZ Input Section (where included) This section similarly defines the way XYZ data streams are interpreted, with one addition as follows:

Reference White Level Defines the white level used in converting between XYZ and other colour spaces. The standard value is 48.000cd/m2..

Picture Content Section Motion Defines the conditions under which the OTM should report motion content errors. The first line defines the desired state (i.e. the state that won’t be reported as an error), followed by the action to be taken when an error is identified. The other settings define the equivalent noise level of the filter that is to be applied in assessing whether there is any motion and the number of frames over which the error must continue before a motion error is reported.


Luminance Works in a similar way to the above Motion specification to set the conditions under which the OTM will report a luminance error.

Chrominance Works in a similar way to the above Motion specification to set the conditions under which the OTM will report a chrominance error.

Average Picture Level (APL) Defines the maximum acceptable average signal level over the active part of the frame. If the APL is above this figure, an error will be reported.

Error Checking Section It is important to ensure that the data ranges specified reflect the type of data you are expecting.

Gamut Range: Error Mask Sets the number of lines from both the top and bottom of the display, and the number of the pixels from each edge to be omitted from the error checking process. This is intended to handle video in which the edges near the sync are corrupted. The mask has no other effect on the data, which continue to be grabbed, displayed on the waveform views etc, in their entirety.

Gamut Range: YCbCr Specifies the conditions under which a YCbCr Range Error will be reported. The first line specifies the percentage of the image which needs to be out of range before an error is reported. This is followed by the minimum and maximum acceptable values, expressed in the amplitude measurement units selected on the System page of the Config window (see Section T.4) The Polarity Outside setting determines whether an error is reported when the value is outside the specified range (tick box checked) or inside the specified range (tick box clear). The other two settings control whether the error is flagged on copies of the video that are mapped to the SDI output ports and/or on the OTM’s own Picture display.

Gamut Range: RGB Specifies the conditions under which an RGB Range Error will be reported, in a similar way to the above YCbCr Range Error.

Gamut Range: Composite The Composite Matrix Type sets whether composite waveform displays are generated using a composite matrix that is selected automatically (based on the current input video standard) or generated using the particular composite matrix selected here. The other settings specify the ‘rules’ to be followed in generating a Composite waveform, in particular the maximum and minimum values to apply when using the different composite matrices. The other two settings control whether the error is flagged on copies of the video that are mapped to the SDI output ports and/or on the OTM 1000’s own Picture display.

Physical This section is concerned with data embedded in the video signal that may be present/absent or otherwise in error. In most cases, a value is set which gives the number of such errors that can happen per frame before an error should be reported. In the case of EDH values, selections can be made for the number of consecutive frames containing an error in either the Full frame EDH value or the Active frame EDH value after which an error is reported (the Full/Active setting), or for Full frame EDH errors and Active frame EDH errors counted separately.


3D: Picture Analysis (where included) Specifies the conditions under which the OTM should report as errors:

The percentage of pixels that have an apparent depth that is either nearer to the viewer than the specified minimum distance or further than the specified maximum distance. (These minimum and maximum distances are recorded on the System page of the Config window.)

The percentage of points in the left-eye and right-eye images that are not matched.

The difference in Sharpness between the left-eye and right-eye images (the Sharpness Delta) as indicated on the 3D Meters display

3D: Camera Alignment (where included) Defines the values of camera rotation, the difference in camera zoom level, camera horizontal offset and camera vertical offset above which errors should be reported.

3D: Picture Levels (where included) Defines the percentage differences in gain and lift at which errors/warnings should be raised (calculated by comparing the right-eye image value against the left-eye image value).

Picture Quality (where included) Specifies the required values for the following parameters:

The Duration for which the PQA Charts are displayed, expressed as a number of frames. The number of complete sequence loops that are captured by the OTM when the Sync

capture option is selected (see Section S.5). The error threshold used when comparing a new graph trace capture against the ‘Gold’

reference capture file. (Applies only to operation under remote control: see Section S.7) The Drop Speed and Climb Speed applied in generating the PQA Charts. It is normal to

leave both controls set to 100, so that the graphs directly reflect the calculated data. However the charts can be made to emphasise quality by setting a high Climb Speed alongside a low Drop Speed, while errors can be emphasised by setting a low Climb Speed alongside a high Drop Speed.

Ticking Auto apply gain/offset compensation sets the OTM to transfer the gain and offset values as well as the frames value when the Auto button on the PQA Toolbar is selected.

Ticking the Enable mask option limits the PQA analysis to the part of the active image that remains when the numbers of pixels/lines defined as Left, Right, Top and Bottom are masked out from the edges of the active image. When unticked, the analysis is limited to the Region of Interest that has been defined (see Section E.2).

Plus for PSNR etc.

The Error Levels that determine the threshold for pass/fail, event-based logging of PSNR etc.

The associated Timeouts which smooth the reporting of errors by requiring the error condition to be in place for a minimum number of frames before the error is reported.

The Weightings to be used in calculating the overall Combined Picture Quality (CPQ), expressed as a percentage. Note: The total of the weightings set needs to add up to 100.

The Edge Compensation Threshold used in calculating CSNR values (see the description of the CSNR algorithm in the PQA Application Guide, available from the OmniTek website).


The methods used in identifying macroblocks within the incoming video data. When Luma Compensation is selected, a luma characteristic curve is applied to the macroblock detector, which causes it to ignore block edges where the picture is very dark. When Edge Compensation is selected, the edge-detector mechanism used in the CSNR calculation is applied to the macroblock detector. This results in macroblocks being ‘amplified’ in edge-regions of the test image.

Eye/Jitter Settings (where included)

Rise/Fall low/high amplitude Set the percentages of the eye amplitude used in the automatic measurement of the eye rise and fall times (see Section M.5). The industry-standard values (and the ones set by default) are 20% and 80%.

SD/HD/3G Thresholds Separate sections detailing the threshold levels at which errors are reported, covering:

The amount of Jitter (expressed in UI) Eye Amplitude levels (expressed in mV) Eye Rise/Fall times (expressed in ps) Eye Rise/Fall ‘Delta’ i.e. the difference between measured rise and fall times (expressed in ps) Eye Rise/Fall Overshoot (expressed as a percentage of the Eye amplitude).

Timecode Settings Separate sections detailing for each supported timecode type (VITC, LTC, ATC VITC #1, ATC VITC #2 and ATC LTC) whether an error report is required in relation to the presence/absence of a valid timecode and the number of discontinuities in the timecode above which an error should be reported.

Caption Settings

Message type The first line for each of the supported closed caption and teletext types sets the conditions under which the presence/absence of this message type are reported in the Event Log.

Page Sets the PAL or OP-47 teletext page from which subtitles may be taken for display on the Picture view and for logging in the Closed Caption Log.

Page Cache Enables/disables the caching of teletext pages.

Log Type Sets the information to be recorded in the separate Closed Caption Logs for each message type. The choice offered is generally between just the captions or both captions and raw data. If raw data is selected, this will be recorded in a separate _bin file.

Expected Line (Line 21 captions) Displays the line on which Line 21 captions are expected to be found but may be edited if required.


Picture View Aspect Ratio

Type Selects the source for the aspect ratio used in displaying the Picture view of the video. The possible sources are:

‘None’ i.e. the aspect ratio is set directly by the number of lines and the number of pixels per line in the Active frame

Manual settings (see below)

EN300294 WSS data

ARDSPEC WSS data

ARDSPEC Video Index

RP186SP Video Index

Active Format Descriptor (AFD)

Manual X Aspect Ratio; Manual Y Aspect Ratio These settings together specify the aspect ratio to be applied to the image shown in the Picture view when the above Type is set to Manual. For example, a 16:9 aspect ratio is applied by setting Type to Manual, the Manual X Aspect Ratio to 16 and the Manual Y Aspect Ratio to 9.

Figure T-3: The Picture Aspect Ratio settings


T.3 Audio Config Page

The Audio Config page of the Config window is concerned with the metering that is applied in Audio PPM displays and the various settings of reference level, ballistics etc. that are associated with the selected metering type. It also allows you to specify whether any errors that occur are reported in the log, cause an SNMP trap to be generated or trigger an alarm.

Figure T-4: Audio Configuration Page

The Audio Config page is arranged in the same way as the Video Config page described above and is driven in the same way. The first item to select on this page is the Audio Meter. A range of standard metering types are offered, including dBFS, dBFS Log, Nordic, DIN, BBC, EBU, VU (Standard), VU (North America) and VU (France). Selecting a metering type automatically sets the other parameters to the standard values for this metering type. You can then customise the meter by changing the values shown on this page. The selected metering type and your custom settings are recorded in a Users audio configuration file, along with the various choices you make for the ways in which error events are handled. The OTM 1000 supports different types of audio, depending on which software options are installed. The basic AUDIO option just supports embedded audio, but AES audio and Dolby audio can also be supported. Separate Audio PPM displays available for the different types of audio input and a different meter can be used on each of these displays. The different types of


audio are therefore associated with separate configuration files. Embedded audio is associated with an ‘Users Audio’ configuration file, AES audio with an ‘Users AES’ configuration file and Dolby E audio with an ‘Users Dolby E’ configuration file. The selection made for a particular type of audio affects all Audio PPMs displays showing that type of audio. At any one time, the Audio Config page is displaying the settings associated with one of these configuration files, identified at the top of the hierarchy of settings. (How to select the required configuration file is explained below.) Note: Any changes made to the settings for a particular type of metering become your standard for that type of metering and are automatically applied to all Audio PPMs that use that style of metering.

Selecting the Audio Type The type of audio the page is currently set to modify is shown at the top of the display.


To switch it to affect a different type of audio:

1. Call up the Audio Inputs page. 2. Move the cursor to the audio input that you want to affect. 3. Return to the Audio Config page. This will now be set up to modify the selected type of audio input.

Parameters

Channel Status These settings record the level of CRC errors and the level of errors in Z-bit position within the audio at which errors/warnings should be raised.

Audio Meter The selection of a meter type selects a particular metering graticule and sets the standard metering ballistics for that meter type. The type of metering to be applied may be selected from a choice that covers dBFS, dBFS Log, Nordic, DIN, BBC, EBU, VU (Standard), VU (North America) and VU (France) metering. The scope of the main metering types is shown in the diagram on the following page:

Error Detection This section defines the conditions under which PPMs become marked with ‘Clip’, ‘Over’, ‘Silence’ or ‘Mute’. For ‘Over’ and ‘Silence’, both a level and a length of time at this level are set. For ‘Clip’, the setting records the number of consecutive samples that need to be ‘all high’ before the error is reported; for ‘Mute’, it records the number of consecutive samples that need to be zero before an error is reported.

Reference Levels These settings control the position of the red and yellow markers alongside the individual PPM meter displays and the points in those displays at which the colour used for the meter bar changes from green to yellow and from yellow to red.


0dBFS-9dBFS-18dBFS

+120-10

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

-6

-27dBFS

-30

0 4 8 12-4-8-12

3210-2-4-6-8-10-12-20

3210-2-4-6-8-10-12-20

AL PML

dB

dB

dB

dB

dB

EBU PPM DigitalCurrent Meter

Nordic +6dB

BBC PPM

EBU PPM

VU North America

VU France

-4

+50-5-10-20dBDin/Nordic PPM

+6-35

+120-10dBNordic +6dB

+4-35

+120-10dBNordic +6dB

+8-35

Figure T-5: The main metering systems

Ballistics This section sets the responsiveness of the PPM display to changes in the audio level. The Integration setting sets the time in milliseconds the PPM takes to rise to within 2dB of the peak value. The Decay Duration sets the time (also in milliseconds) the PPM takes to fall by the percentage set as the Decay Rate.

Loudness This section principally sets the parameters that are applied in determining loudness values. These include the levels at which errors in the Integrated Loudness value and the Short-term Loudness value should be reported. For further information, see Section K.4.

Maximum True Peak Sets the level above which errors are reported (shown in red on the True Peak version of the Audio PPMs display described in Section K.2).

Stereo Mix Down This section sets the parameters used in generating the different possible types of stereo downmix. The Mode setting selects the type of stereo downmix that is applied, while the LFE setting chooses between the basic form of downmix (LFE Off) and one that includes a contribution from the LFE channel (LFE On). How the various parameters are applied is explained in Section K.3.

Delay measurement source This section sets the audio channels to be used in carrying out In-Service A/V Delay Measurements (as described in Section N.2).


T.4 System Page

This page covers Version and Licence information, along with overrides for some system settings.

Figure T-6: The System Page

System Configuration Settings

Application Type (where included) Where the PQA software option is installed, this entry allows you to select between running the OTM as a Waveform Monitor + Signal Generator or running it in ‘PQA Mode’. Note: The range of options offered changes both on this page and on other pages of the Config window, depending on which Application type is selected.

Simultaneous Monitoring Where the OTM 1000 includes the option to monitor multiple inputs simultaneously, the Simultaneous Monitoring option controls whether the View window tiles can be individually set to display results from different inputs (option ticked) or whether selecting an input in one tile automatically switches all the tiles to that input (option not ticked).

Analyser 1 source, Analyser 2 source (where included) The OTM 1000 is supplied set up to use the SDI inputs as its source of video to analyse, with Analyser 1 taking its source from SDI Input 1 and Analyser 2 taking its source from SDI Input 2.


Where one of the optional Eye/Jitter cards has been installed in the OTM 1000, the OTM 1000 needs to be configured to take its source from the Eye/Jitter card instead. This is done by setting either or both of these options to point to the corresponding input on the Eye/Jitter card (i.e. Analyser 1 pointing to Eye Input 1 and/or Analyser 2 pointing to Eye Input 2). The Analysers can also be set to use the built-in Generator 1 or Generator 2 (where fitted) as their source. Note: Making an Eye/Jitter card input or the Generator the source prevents access to the corresponding SDI input. Before the SDI inputs can be used again, at least one analyser needs to be returned to taking its source from the corresponding SDI input.

Amplitude Measurement Units This setting selects the units in which data on waveform, gamut and histogram displays are expressed between the actual digital values, percentage IRE values and millivolts.

Always show ‘SDI stream 2’ buttons The number of streams associated with any SDI input is normally dictated by the current video standard. Ticking the ‘Always show…’ option forces the OTM 1000 to associate two streams with SDI Input 1. This might be used, for example, to create a 3G Level B dual-stream set-up without actually having to attach a 3G Level B dual-stream source.

Postpone video loss detection Ticking this option delays the clearance of accumulated status values following the loss of the signal being analysed.

SMPTE RP168 analog reference timing The basic analog/digital timing relationship is defined as illustrated in Figure 3 of SMPTE 274M. The process of timing an SDI input against an analog reference, however, is relatively complex. The methodology described in SMPTE RP168 specifies that the SDI signal should be converted to analog, introducing a D/A converter into the measurement which in turn introduces a delay. In some common implementations, this delay is about three microseconds. The SMPTE RP168 analog reference timing option allows you to align measurements of the timing of SD/HD signals made on the OTM with measurements made using or assuming such a D/A converter by adjusting the timing measurements made on the OTM to include the above delay.

Ignore Smpte (Override) The OTM normally checks that the input Video Standard it detects is consistent with any SMPTE 352 packet included in the video at least with regard to the interface type, the picture rate and the sampling structure. When this option is ticked, the OTM will not make this check. This option may be useful to select if the OTM has difficulty in locking to the current input, possibly because the SMPTE 352 packet that specifies the video standard has become corrupted.

Force Dual-Link (Override) The OTM 1000 is normally able to identify when the video fed to two separate inputs form the two parts of a single dual-link source. When this option is ticked, however, the OTM will ignore any SMPTE 352 packet and automatically treat the two incoming sources as a single dual-link source. Note: Where the OTM is fitted with mouse & keyboard, this option can also be toggled from the View window by typing D on the keyboard.

Dual-Link Colourspace (Override) This setting is used to set the colour space when the above Force Dual-Link option is ticked.


AES Clock Source (where included) Where an AES card is fitted, this option needs to be set to the analyser with which the AES card is to be used.

AES Output (where included) Where audio is output over an AES card, this option needs to select the type of audio that is to be played out – Embedded, Embedded Surround Sound, AES, AES Surround Sound or Dolby.

AES Routing (where included) Sets whether the input channels should pass directly to the corresponding output channels (the Fixed option) or whether the output channels should follow the mapping set up on the Audio Inputs page for the selected type of audio (the Mapped option).

Slave to Headphone Control (where included) When this option is ticked, the Speaker Volume setting in the View window Properties that controls headphone volume also controls the volume of audio played out through the AES card.

Cable Type (where included) To estimate the cable length (as described in Section M.5), the OTM needs information on the type of cable that is being used. This option offers a choice of standard cable types.

3D Settings (where included)

Allow 3D Monitoring (where included) Tick option that enables and disables analysis of Stereo 3D video and the Camera Alignment facilities. Note: When this option is ticked, the generator facilities are reduced to simple pass-through of live input.

Channel Sources (where included) Selects between the various options for the source of the left-eye and right-eye images – as separate image streams, one delivered to the input selected above as the Analyser 1 source (Input 1) and the other to the input selected as the Analyser 2 source (Input 2); as Side-by-side images delivered to Input 1 or Input 2 (left-eye image to the left); or as Top-and-Bottom images delivered to Input 1 or Input 2 (left-eye image on top). Note: Where the right-eye image is delivered on Input 1 and the left-eye image is delivered on Input 2, the thumbnails on the Status Bar will switch so that the left-eye image is always shown to the left.

Viewer Distance (where included) The distance in metres in front of the screen that the viewer is expected to sit. In accordance with SMPTE recommendations, the default Viewer Distance is 1.75m.

Interocular Distance (where included) The distance in metres between the viewer’s eyes, normally taken to be 0.064m.

Screen Width (where included) The width in metres of the screen on which the video is to be displayed.

Depth Map Line Increment (where included) The increment set here defines the spacing of the frame lines that the OTM will process in determining disparities between left-eye and right-eye images. A value of 1 will cause the OTM to process every line of the active frame.


Disparity/Crosshair Units (where included) Sets the units in which the disparity is expressed from a choice of pixels, metres or percentage of screen width. Where VIEW_3D is installed and 3D Monitoring is selected, the crosshair position is also expressed in these units (see Section E.2). Further, when measurement in metres is selected, the origin for the cursor position is the centre of the screen.

Minimum/Maximum Search (where included) The values set here define the minimum (most negative) and maximum (most positive) disparities that the OTM will consider in looking for matching features in the left-eye and right-eye images. These disparities may be expressed either directly (in the currently selected units: see above), or as depths (in metres) in the viewer’s world coordinates. Note: Disparities may exist outside the specified range but the OTM will not report these.

Minimum/Maximum Budget (where included) The values set here define the range of depths over which you want items of interest to appear. These depths may be expressed either in metres or in terms of the equivalent disparity (expressed in the currently selected units: see above). Note: To make infinity the end point of a range, either set the disparity to the interocular distance or, where a mouse and keyboard are fitted, select Infinity from the right-click menu.

Camera Flip Mode (where included) Use these settings to record whether the left-eye images or the right-eye images are flipped either horizontally or vertically (e.g. through being recorded on a mirror rig).

Auto Gain Control (where included) Differences in the gain and lift of the colour components of the left-eye and right-eye images, such as those experienced with images from mirror rigs, impair the OTM’s ability to match objects across the two images. However, the OTM is also able to assess these differences and correct for them. Tick this option to have the necessary correction applied to the gain and lift before the search for matching points is carried out.

Auto-correct Vertical Disparity (where included) Any vertical disparity between the images that are being compared also impairs the OTM’s ability to match objects across the two images, but again the OTM is able to assess this disparity and correct for it. Tick this option to have the necessary correction applied before the search for matching points is carried out.

Waveform Graticules Lock: When this option is ticked, the graticules associated with the Waveform View do not move when the horizontal and vertical offsets are changed. When this option is cleared, the graticules move with the waveform. Show 10% Amplitude Markers: When this option is ticked, the Waveform graticule marks every 10% on the amplitude axis. When cleared, markers are shown at 25% intervals.

Time The settings here are used to adjust the clock shown on the Status Bar and set the format in which the date and time are displayed. The main selection to make is the Time Zone in which you are working. Any further adjustments that are required can then be made by modifying the Hour and Minute displays.


System Information This section of the display provides information about the OTM 1000 and about the version of the firmware and software that is running on the OTM. These are details to have to hand when discussing operational issues with OmniTek Customer Support.

IP Address Information This section of the display records the OTM’s machine name together with its IP address. Note: If the IP address of the machine is changed using tools associated with the operating system, the IP address shown in this display may not be automatically updated. To refresh the display, switch to a different page of the Config window then switch back to this System page.

Licences This section lists the optional features that may be licensed on the OTM 1000 and indicates which of these features are licensed, the start date of that licence and either the number of days left (for time-limited licences) or the word Permanent. The list starts with details of the various optional features that are associated with the OTM’s main card. Where the OTM also includes further cards (for example, an Eye/Jitter card), this is followed by similar lists of the optional features associated with those cards. Features that are licensed are shown in white, together with start and end date details. Features that are not currently licensed are shown greyed out and without any start or end date details: this includes any features that were the subject of a time-limited licence that has expired.

Button Bar options

Load Licence option Used to add a new licence file. Copy the licence file provided by OmniTek to a USB stick, insert this USB stick then take the Load Licence option and use the file selector displayed to pick out the licence file to load.

Save Licence option Used to save a file containing details of the currently installed licences. A copy of this file needs to be sent to OmniTek prior to making any additions to the range of options that are licensed. Note: A fuller description of the process of adding extra licences is given in Section A.4.

Manage Disk option Calls up the Manage User Files dialogue through which you can import, export and delete presets, log files and other User files. For details, see Section U.


T.5 Video Inputs Page

This page gives details of the various video services that are currently available to be analysed – specifying the name by which they are identified, identifying the physical input to which they are attached and the video standard that has been identified on that service.

Figure T-7: Video Inputs Page

The HORIZ and VERT knobs can be used to navigate round those parts of the information shown that are under user control.

T.6 Audio Inputs Page

Depending on the software options installed, the OTM 1000 can analyse up to 16 channels of embedded audio, up to 8 channel pairs of AES audio and/or Dolby audio encoded in a channel pair of either embedded audio or AES audio. Embedded audio and AES audio can further be interpreted either as simple channel pairs or as components of a surround sound system. With a choice of two physical inputs through which the audio can be delivered, this gives a wide range of different possible audio inputs for Audio PPM displays. The Audio Inputs page shows a list of the available inputs, together with brief details of their source and their type. It also allows you to set which audio channels are shown in Audio PPM displays, which channels are used to produce surround sound and which channel pair Dolby audio is delivered on. (Note: The Stereo Downmix is not selected here: it is selected on the Audio Config page.) The input that is currently highlighted both determines the input on which any channel allocation is made (see below) and which type of audio is affected by settings made on the Audio Config page (see Section T.3).

Figure T-8: Audio Inputs Page


Channel Allocation The OTM 1000 has default allocations that it adopts when displaying PPMs of stereo pairs or interpreting the components of a surround sound system but allows the user to make any changes they want to these allocations. Note: The position with Dolby decoding is slightly different because Dolby decoding can only be active on one input at a time. In this case, it is left to the user to select the channel carrying the Dolby data on the required input. Any setting that was previously made for Dolby on the other input is automatically cancelled.


To both inspect and to modify the allocation currently associated with any audio service:

1. Select the audio service with the cursor (either by turning the GENERAL knob or by clicking the mouse button (if fitted))

2. Take the Edit option from the Button Bar. This calls up an Edit screen which mainly comprises a table such as those shown below with a tick showing the stereo pair that is allocated to the feature listed in the left-most column of the display (one tick per line).

3. To change the allocation, simply tick the required stereo pair each line.

As on the Video Inputs page, the HORIZ and VERT knobs can be used to navigate round those parts of the information shown that are under user control, while the allocations can be changed by pushing the knob on the appropriate boxes.

1. Select the audio service with the cursor by clicking the mouse button

2. Take the Edit option from the Button Bar. This calls up an Edit screen which mainly comprises a table such as those shown below with a tick showing the stereo pair that is allocated to the feature listed in the left-most column of the display (one tick per line).

3. To change the allocation, simply tick the required stereo pair each line.

Note: There is no need to clear existing ticks before making your new selections. Any setting that conflicts with the new selection you have made is cleared automatically.


Embedded Audio The display used to allocate audio channels to PPMs is a grid with columns representing the stereo pairs and rows representing the PPMs that are displayed, starting with the left-most PPM.

Figure T-9: Allocation of Stereo Pairs to the bars of the PPM display

There is no need to display all the incoming channels. Simply allocate the stereo pairs you want to inspect in the order that you want them to appear in the PPMs display. The rows in which selections are made will be automatically numbered 1, 2, 3… in line with the order in which the PPMs will be displayed. The remaining rows will not be numbered and no PPMs will be displayed for these rows.

Figure T-10: Modified allocation

Where a mouse and keyboard are fitted to the OTM, you can also use standard editing techniques to replace the standard names for the stereo pairs (1+2, 3+4 etc.) with names that are more descriptive of their use.


Surround Sound interpretation The display used to allocate to channels for surround sound display is similar to the one used for the embedded audio. The main difference is that in this case, the channels are handled individually rather than in pairs and separate selections are made for each of L, R, C, LFE, Ls and Rs, together with Bsl and Bsr where 7.1 Surround Sound is to be analysed.

Figure T-11: Allocation of Stereo Pairs to the components of a Surround Sound display

Dolby decode (where installed) Dolby data is delivered by a single channel pair so the display used to allocate channels for Dolby decode comprises a single line.

Figure T-12: Selection of the stereo pair carrying Dolby data

When the display is called up, it will show either one pair ticked or highlighting over the last selection to be made (if Dolby is currently selected on the other input). Ticking the required stereo pair in this display automatically switches the Dolby decode facilities to the analyser associated with the input for which the setting is being made.

OmniTek OTM 1000 User Guide, v3.1 U-1

U : Importing/Exporting Settings and User Files

This section describes the facilities provided for transferring settings, presets and generator patterns between your OTM and another OTM or OTR system. By transferring these ‘User files’ between systems, you can set up one or more OTM or OTR to match either the whole or some aspects of another OTM or OTR system. Similar steps may also be used to export any log files you have created for further analysis, report writing etc. These facilities were introduced in V2.1 and are available on all OTM installations, but please note that the procedures described in this section only apply where both the system from which the user settings etc. are taken and the system to which it is being transferred are running V2.1 or later of the OTM Application software.

U.1 Overview

When the OTM is delivered, the way it is configured is governed by ‘Factory’ configuration files. It is also delivered with a ‘Factory’ set of pre-defined presets to allow you to switch quickly and easily to alternative screen arrangements and test pattern selections. (Presets are introduced in Section B.4.) When you record your own presets or change any settings within the Config window, ‘User’ files are created which record the settings you have made. Further User files are created when you create log files (see Section J), save zoneplates and line patterns (see Section Q), and capture images and sequences from the incoming video (see Section R). In general, these files are saved in a default location on your OTM (referred to as your User area) but you can pick a different location for Generator Patterns (zoneplates, line patterns, captures etc.) when you save these. It also possible to select a different location for your log files (see Section U.2), Where there is both a ‘Factory’ version and a ‘User’ version of the configuration, the ‘User’ version takes precedence. Similarly, the ‘User’ definition of any preset takes precedence over the ‘Factory’ definition of that preset. All OTM and OTR systems are delivered configured in the same way and so a particular set of User files will modify the configuration in the same way on any system. It is therefore possible to set up one system to match another system by exporting the User files from the system that you want to copy and importing them into the system that you want set up to match. The facilities described in this section allow the import and export of User files from the default location. They also allow you to export log files for analysis away from the OTM; import and export Generator Patterns from wherever these are stored; and delete any of these files that are no longer wanted. In general, the associated settings are simply lost but where you delete the ‘User’ version of the configuration or a preset for which a ‘Factory’ version was offered, then the system automatically reverts to the ‘Factory’ version. The various operations are all carried out from a ‘Manage User Files’ dialogue, an example of which is shown below. This dialogue provides a window on the current range of user files.


Figure U-1: Manage User Files dialogue

The left-hand side of this dialogue lists the different categories of User files that can be exchanged between systems – together with a Log files folder option that allows you to select the location used to store any log files you create: see Section U.2; and a USB Drives option that can be used to inspect the available USB Drives (and unmount any that are unneeded): also described in Section U.2. The following User files are included:

A System Settings file comprising the current Configuration and all the Presets that are currently in use (see below).

The Configuration comprising the settings made in the Config window (see Section T) Presets, comprising the current default plus View presets, Gen presets, Config presets

and System presets (see Section B.4) Event Log Captures (see Section J.1) Loudness Logs (see Section J.2) Closed Caption Logs (see Section J.3) Generator Patterns, comprising all the images, captures, zoneplates and line patterns

currently known to your system Moving the cursor through the list of categories displays alphabetical lists of the User files of this type in the default area. Selecting a category from this list moves the cursor into the list of items and adds tick boxes (and, where appropriate, an All option) for you to use to identify specific file selections from among the items shown e.g. for export. For Generator Patterns, a ‘..’ entry is also added through which you can access other areas of the OTM’s disk space. Options on the Button Bar enable you to import, export or delete User files as you require. The Export and Delete options are greyed out where there are no User files of that type; the Import option is greyed out for both types of Log file because it is not possible to import these files. The various operations are described below. The steps are essentially the same for each type of User file, but there are special features to importing/exporting the Configuration and to importing/ exporting the overall System file. These are described in Sections U.6 and U.7 respectively. IMPORTANT: Care is needed when transferring any Gen Preset from one machine to another to ensure that the source files for each of the patterns in the Preset are also transferred and that these are imported into the identical location on the destination system. In practice, this means that it is only worth transferring a Gen Preset where all the patterns refer to either ‘Factory’ supplied images or images that have been captured to the default location on your system (because that is the only location into which you can import Generator Patterns). You should also be aware that any System Preset that you transfer includes a similar set of details about the patterns on the Gen window at the time the Preset was saved.


U.2 Calling up the Manage User Files Dialogue

The Manage User Files dialogue is called up by selecting the ‘Manage Disk’ option where this is offered. Some screens have dedicated ‘Manage Disk’ options either included on their Button Bar or accessible from menus associated with options included on the Button Bar. The screens that offer this option are:

The Event Log window (Manage Disk option included in the menu accessed from the Session option on the Button Bar)

The Closed Captions Log window (Manage Disk option included on the Button Bar)

The Gen window (Manage Disk option included in the menu accessed from the File option on the Button Bar)

The Config window (Manage Disk option included on the Button Bar) A Manage Disk option is also offered on the Button Bar associated with the dialogue that lists all the presets that are currently set up. This dialogue can be called up from any screen within the OTM application (except where there is already a dialogue on the screen relating to some uncompleted task), and so provides a general route by which the Manage User Files dialogue can be accessed. The steps to use are given below.


To display the Manage User Files dialogue:

1. Press and hold the PRESET button on the control panel.

1. With the OTM in Windows mode, take the Load/Save Presets option from the File menu offered at the top of the screen.

2. Take the Manage Disk option from the Button Bar that is displayed.


Log Files Folder By default, all log files are stored within a \OmniTek\DataLab folder in the Documents area of the OTM. However, a different location can be chosen for these files using the Log files folder option offered on the left-hand side of the menu. Use this option with a network of OTM/OTR systems to store all log files in a central location.

Figure U-2: Log files folder option


To set the Log Files Folder:

1. Display the Manage User Files dialogue as described above. 2. Select Log files folder in the left-hand column. 3. Enter the path to the required folder in the slot for the Network folder in the right-hand

column of the dialogue. The alternative Local disk option may be used to switch back to using the default location.

Note: The Manage User Files dialogue will display log files both from your selected Log File Folder and from the default location.

USB Drives The USB Drives option is provided to allow you to inspect the USB drives that are currently available and to unmount any that are not required.


To unmount a drive:

1. Display the Manage User Files dialogue as described above. 2. Select User Drives in the left-hand column. The right-hand column then displays a set of

Unmount options, one for each drive. 3. Unmount any unwanted drives by selecting the corresponding Unmount option.


U.3 Exporting User Files

The steps in this section save User files to a chosen location e.g. on a USB memory stick. These files are generally to be found in the appropriate default location but Generator Patterns can be located anywhere across your disk structure. Facilities are offered for exporting either all the User files in a particular category in the default directory or just a selection of these files, and for picking out Generator Patterns from anywhere on your disk. Facilities are also included for creating a folder in which to store the files. Two ‘routes’ are provided through the export procedure: one intended principally for exporting all the files from the default category; the other to be used where you want to select the files for export individually. However, in practice either route can be used to select the files you require. The description below is divided into two sections: one describing the steps used to export files from their default location; the other describing the special features of exporting Generator Patterns from outside the default location.

Exporting Files from their Default location Control Panel Mouse & Keyboard

Route 1: Principally used to export all files

1. Display the Manage User Files dialogue as described in Section U.2. 2. Scroll to the category of user file you want to export in the left-hand side of the dialogue. 3. Select Export from the Button Bar. 4. If there is more than one User file of the selected category, the right-hand side of the dialogue

then shows a list of the files in the default location with ticks beside all the files and a tick beside the All option at the top of the list. To export all the files: simply take the Next option from the Button Bar. To export just a selection: clear the ticks against any files you do not wish to export, then take the Next option. Note: Clearing the tick beside All clears all the ticks.

5. Use the dialogue that is displayed to select the folder into which you want to copy the exported files. If needed, use the Create new option offered on the Button Bar to create a new folder in which to store these files. Note: The files are stored under their existing names. The use of separate folders is therefore recommended to distinguish between separate sets of User files.

6. Select OK from the Button Bar to copy the files to the selected location. 7. At the end of the process, you are returned to the Manage User Files dialogue. If you have

finished with the dialogue, select Close (or Back then Close).



Route 2: Principally used to export a selection of files

1. Display the Manage User Files dialogue as described in Section U.2.

2. In the left-hand side of the dialogue, highlight the category of User file that you want to export by twisting the GENERAL knob, then press GENERAL.

3. The right-hand side of the dialogue then shows a list of the files in the default location of the selected category. To select a different category, take the Back option from the Button Bar.

4. Twist the GENERAL knob to select each file you want to export then either press GENERAL or use the Toggle Check option on the Button Bar to tick this selection. Note: Ticking All selects all the listed files.


2. Click on the category of user file you want to export in the left-hand side of the dialogue.

3. The right-hand side of the dialogue then shows a list of the files in the default location of the selected category. To select a different category, simply click on its name.

4. Tick the files you want to export by clicking on the check boxes. Note: Ticking All selects all the listed files.

5. Take Export from the Button Bar. 6. Use the dialogue that is displayed to select the folder into which you want to copy the

exported files. If needed, use the Create new option offered on the Button Bar to create a new folder in which to store these files. Note: The files are stored under their existing names. The use of separate folders is therefore recommended to distinguish between separate sets of User files.


finished with the dialogue, select Back then Close.


Exporting Generator Patterns from other locations Generator Patterns (images, sequences etc.) can be stored in other locations on the disk than the default user directory. To export these Generator Patterns, you need to follow the second route listed above, but at Step 3 (when the list of files is displayed), you need to take the .. option. The right-hand side of the display (together with the .. option it includes) can then be used to pick out images, sequences etc. to export from your disk. More detailed steps are given below.


To export Generator Patterns from other locations:


2. In the left-hand side of the dialogue, highlight Generator Patterns by twisting the GENERAL knob, then press GENERAL.

3. Select the .. entry at the top of the list in the right-hand side of the dialogue and press GENERAL


2. Click on Generator Patterns in the left-hand side of the dialogue.

3. Double-click the .. entry at the top of the list in the right-hand side of the dialogue.

4. Use the sets of folders and files shown in the right-hand side of the dialogue to navigate to the files you require.

5. Tick the files you want to export. 6. Take Export from the Button Bar. 7. Use the dialogue that is displayed to select the folder into which you want to copy the

exported files. If needed, use the Create new option offered on the Button Bar to create a new folder in which to store these files.




U.4 Importing Files into the User area

The steps in this section import User files e.g. from a USB memory stick into the appropriate default folder on the OTM on which this procedure is carried out. The files that can be imported in this way are:

a System Settings (.OTX) file;

a Configuration (.CCF) file;

All type of Preset;

All types of Generator Pattern (images, sequences, line patterns, zoneplates) Note: Event logs or closed caption logs cannot be imported. Files can be imported either singly or as a group but you can only import files from one category at a time. The OTM notes which type of User file is selected in the left-hand side of the dialogue and automatically filters the list of files offered to just show files of that type. Warnings are displayed before any matching file is overwritten. Note: There can only ever be one Configuration file and one Settings file, so the import of either a Configuration (.CCF) file or a System Settings file (.OTX) file always replaces the current configuration/settings (after a suitable warning message).


To import one or more user files of a particular category:


2. Move the cursor to the category of file you will be importing. If you would also like to scroll through the current list of items in that category, press GENERAL.

3. Select Import from the Button Bar. 4. Use the File Selector that is shown to pick

out the files of the selected category that you want to import. (Use of this File Selector is described in Section B.5) Note: These can be taken from more than one directory.


2. Either scroll to or click on the category of file you will be importing

3. Select Import from the Button Bar. 4. Use the File Selector that is shown to pick

out the files of the selected category that you want to import. Note: These can be taken from more than one directory.

5. The OTM then proceeds to copy the files you selected into the appropriate areas for the type of file you are importing. If a User file of the same name is found: a message will appear offering a choice of overwriting the existing file (Yes), automatically overwriting anywhere there is a conflict (Yes (all) ), or leaving the existing file (No) – or aborting the operation (Abort).

6. At the end of the process, you are returned to the updated Manage User Files dialogue. If you have finished with the dialogue, select Close (or Back then Close).


U.5 Deleting User Files

The Manage User Files dialogue can also be used to delete unwanted User files. The steps to use are identical for all types of User file. For Event Log Captures and Closed Caption Logs, the file is simply deleted from the local ‘User’ area. (Copies of the files held elsewhere on disk are not affected.) In the case of Presets, the Configuration and the System Settings (which combines the Configuration and the View Presets), the User details are deleted but where there is a corresponding ‘Factory’ file, the settings of this Factory file will be used in place of the deleted User file. Deleting the User file therefore provides the way to revert to Factory settings for both the Configuration window and any supplied Presets. The procedure to follow is essentially identical to that used to Export User files (see Section U.3 above) but selecting Delete from the Button Bar instead of Export, and with an extra ‘confirmation step’ before the selected file(s) are deleted. Details of the steps are given below.

Deleting Files from their Default location Control Panel Mouse & Keyboard

Route 1: Principally used to delete all files in a category

1. Display the Manage User Files dialogue as described in Section U.2. 2. Scroll to the category of user file you want to delete in the left-hand side of the dialogue. 3. Select Delete from the Button Bar. 4. If there is more than one User file of the selected category, the right-hand side of the dialogue

then shows a list of the files in the default location with ticks beside all the files and a tick beside the All option at the top of the list.

5. To delete all the files: simply take the Next option from the Button Bar. To delete just a selection: clear the ticks against any files you do not wish to delete, then take the Next option. Note: Clearing the tick beside All clears all the ticks.

6. When the message appears asking you to confirm the deletion, select Yes from the Button Bar.

7. At the end of the process, you are returned to the updated Manage User Files dialogue. If you have finished with the dialogue, select Close (or Back then Close).

Route 2: Principally used to delete a selection of files


2. In the left-hand side of the dialogue, highlight the category of User file that you want to delete by twisting the GENERAL knob, then press GENERAL.

3. The right-hand side of the dialogue then shows a list of the files in the default location of the selected category. To select a different category, take the Back option from the Button Bar.


2. Click on the category of user file you want to delete in the left-hand side of the dialogue.

3. The right-hand side of the dialogue then shows a list of the files in the default location of the selected category. To select a different category, take the Back option from the Button Bar or simply click the other category.



4. Twist the GENERAL knob to select each file you want to delete then either press GENERAL or use the Toggle Check option on the Button Bar to tick/clear this selection. Note: Ticking All selects all the listed files.

4. Tick the files you want to delete by clicking on the check boxes. Note: Ticking All selects all the listed files.

5. Take Delete from the Button Bar. 6. When the message appears asking you to confirm the deletion, select Yes from the Button

Bar. 7. At the end of the process, you are returned to the Manage User Files dialogue. If you have


Deleting Generator Patterns from other locations Generator Patterns (images, sequences etc.) can be stored in other locations on the disk than the default user directory. To delete these Generator Patterns, you need to follow the second route listed above, but at Step 3 (when the list of files is displays), you need to take the .. option. The right-hand side of the display (together with the .. option it includes) can then be used to pick out images, sequences etc. to delete your disk. More detailed steps are given below.


To delete Generator Patterns from other locations:


2. In the left-hand side of the dialogue, highlight Generator Patterns by twisting the GENERAL knob, then press GENERAL.

3. Select the .. entry at the top of the list in the right-hand side of the dialogue and press GENERAL.


2. Click on Generator Patterns in the left-hand side of the dialogue.

3. Double click on the .. entry at the top of the list on the right-hand side of the dialogue.

4. Use the sets of folders and files shown in the right-hand side of the dialogue to navigate to the files you require.

5. Tick the files you want to delete. 6. Take Delete from the Button Bar. 7. When the message appears asking you to confirm the deletion, select Yes from the Button

Bar. 8. At the end of the process, you are returned to the Manage User Files dialogue. If you have



U.6 Importing/Exporting/Deleting the Configuration

Settings made within the Config window are held as the Configuration User file. The Configuration is stored as a CCF file. The steps used to import or export this Configuration file are the same as those used to import / export other User files (described in Sections 0 and U.4 above). The steps used to delete the Configuration file are also the same as those described in Section U.5. However there is only ever one Configuration User file. So when you import a Configuration file, this automatically overwrites the existing Configuration file. The other special feature of the Configuration file is that, when you delete this User file, the OTM’s configuration automatically reverts to the ‘Factory’-set configuration. So if at any time you want to revert to the Factory configuration, you can achieve this by displaying the Managing User Files dialogue and deleting the Configuration file.

U.7 Importing/Exporting/Deleting the System Settings

One of the options offered by the Manage User Files dialogue is to export the current Configuration plus all the Presets as a single ‘System Settings’ file. This file then provides a simple way of copying these details from one OTM or OTR to another. The System Settings are stored as an OTX file. Note: The various image files that are associated with the Gen Presets and System Presets are not included in the OTX file: these will need to be transferred separately to any system to which the System Settings file is copied. The steps used to import or export this System Settings file are much the same as those used to import / export other User files (described in Sections 0 and U.4 above). The steps used to delete the current System Settings are also the same as those described in Section U.5. However there is only ever one System User file. So when you import a System file, this automatically overwrites the existing Configuration and View Presets. So a message appears offering to delete all the View presets and configurations before importing the presets and configurations in the .OTX file. If you take the Yes option, the OTM will acquire exactly the same range of View presets as the source system. If you take the No option, you will be offered the chance to retain any additional View presets you have created. The other special feature of the System Settings file is that, when you delete this User file, the OTM’s configuration and presets automatically revert to the ‘Factory’ defaults. So if at any time you want to revert to the full Factory set-up, you can achieve this by displaying the Managing User Files dialogue and deleting the System Settings file.


OmniTek OTM 1000 User Guide, v3.1 V-1

V : Extended Video Support The basic OTM 1000 supports SD and HD video. The addition of the options described in this section extends the range of video standards that are supported to cover:

HD and HSDL dual-link video

Digital Cinema

3Gb/s Levels A and B This support covers both the analysis of video streams delivered in the appropriate video standards and the generation of test signals in those video standards (where the OTM 1000 includes the GEN option), and is added by installing options as follows: VIDEO_DL – adds support for HD Dual-Link to both VIEW and GEN facilities VIDEO_3G – adds support for 3Gb/s formats to both VIEW and GEN facilities To a great extent, analysis/generation of other video standards use identical steps to the ones used with SD and HD video, however special handling may be required in certain areas. This section details both the support offered under the different categories and any special aspects to working with video of this type. Note: To generate video of the supported standard, the GEN option also needs to be installed.


V.1 HD and HSDL Dual-Link Support (Added by VIDEO_DL)

Support for dual-link HD and HSDL video is added by installing the VIDEO_DL option. The OTM 1000 is then able to analyse/generate signals in the following standards:

4:4:4 RGB and YCbCr, 10-bit and 12-bit, +Alpha (SMPTE 372M)

Analysing HD/HSDL Dual-Link Video The major difference between analysing single-link video and analysing dual-link video is in the use of two cables to deliver the video. The primary connection should be made to the IN1 BNC, while the secondary connection should be made to the IN2 BNC. The OTM 1000 should automatically recognise the input as dual-link but, just in case, the System page of the Config window offers a Force Dual-Link option to use where necessary. Note: Although the signal is fed in through both SDI inputs, when analysing the video, you simply need to specify SDI Input 1 as the source – though you can, if you want, analyse the two links separately by configuring the system to ignore the embedded SMPTE code. (You should also check that the Force Dual-Link option is clear.) The OTM 1000 will then view the dual-link components as separate feeds.

Generating HD/HSDL Dual-Link Video The major difference between generating single-link video and generating dual-link video is in the use of two cables to deliver the video. The primary connection should be made to the OUT1 BNC, while the secondary connection should be made to the OUT2 BNC. As with SD video, the required video standard is set through the Output Video Standard setting in the Gen window’s Properties control (call this up e.g. by taking the Video Standard option from the Gen window Button Bar). The principal difference is simply that in setting up the details of the required output video standard, the first option to select is the ‘Dual Link’ Interface. It is then necessary to select the Raster Size of the required video standard, then its Refresh Rate and Sampling format – in that order – before selecting the Set option to switch to the specified video standard.


V.2 3G Level A Signal Support (Added by VIDEO_3G)

Support for Level A 3Gb/s 1080p50/60 (SMPTE 425M) video is added by installing the VIDEO_3G option.

Analysing 3G Level A Video The steps involved in analysing 3G Level A video are exactly the same as those used to analyse SD or HD video.

Generating 3G Level A Video The steps involved in generating 3G Level A video are essentially no different from those used to generate SD or HD video. As with SD or HD video, the required video standard is set through the Output Video Standard setting in the Gen window’s Properties control (call this up e.g. by taking the Video Standard option from the Gen window Button Bar). The principal difference is simply that in setting up the details of the required output video standard, the first option to select is the ‘3G A’ Interface. There are many more 3G formats than e.g. SD formats so it is then necessary to select the Raster Size of the required video standard, then its Refresh Rate and Sampling format – in that order – before selecting the Set option to switch to the specified video standard.


V.3 3G Level B Dual-Link Signals (Added by VIDEO_3G)

Installing the VIDEO_3G option also adds support for 3G Level B dual-link video.

Analysing 3G Level B Dual-Link Video The steps involved in analysing 3G Level B Dual-Link video are essentially the same as those used to analyse HD Dual-Link (see Section V.1), because again the two components of the video are delivered over separate cables. The OTM 1000 should automatically recognise the input as dual-link but, just in case, the System page of the Config window offers a Force Dual-Link option to use where necessary. Should you wish to examine the two components separately, you can do this by configuring the ‘system’ component of the OTM 1000 to ignore the embedded SMPTE code. (You should also check that the Force Dual-Link option is clear.) The OTM 1000 will then treat the two dual-link components as separate feeds.

Generating 3G Level B Dual-Link Video The main difference between generating 3G Level B Dual-Link video and generating SD video (or other single-link video) is in the use of two cables to deliver the video. The primary connection should be made to the OUT1 BNC, while the secondary connection should be made to the OUT2 BNC. As with SD or HD video, the required video standard is set through the Output Video Standard setting in the Gen window’s Properties control (call this up e.g. by taking the Video Standard option from the Gen window Button Bar). The principal difference is simply that in setting up the details of the required output video standard, the first option to select is ‘3G B DL’ Interface. There are many more 3G formats than e.g. SD formats so it is then necessary to select the Raster Size of the required video standard, then its Refresh Rate and Sampling format – in that order – before selecting the Set option to switch to the specified video standard.


V.4 3G Level B Dual-Stream Signals (Added by VIDEO_3G)

Installing the VIDEO_3G option also adds support for analysing 3G Level B Dual-stream video delivered through SDI IN1, while adding both the VIDEO_3G option and the GEN_2 option allows the output of 3G Level B Dual-stream video through SDI OUT 1. Note: SDI IN2 and SDI OUT 2 cannot be used for these operations.

Analysing 3G Level B Dual-Stream Video The difference between analysing 3G Level B dual-stream video and analysing SD video lies in way two separate data streams are transmitted over the same cable in the 3G case. The OTM handles the two data streams delivered to the IN1 BNC by making them available as two separate SDI Inputs: SDI Input 1 and SDI Input 3. There is no other difference in the procedure.

Generating 3G Level B Dual-Stream Video The generation of 3G Level B Dual-Stream video requires dual test signal generators and hence requires the GEN_2 option to be installed. With the second generator installed, Dual-stream video may be generated following the steps for dual-generator operation given in Section Q.12. The only special feature to its generation is that the selection of a 3G Level B Dual-stream format as the output video standard means that the two output streams are both output to SDI OUT 1.

V.5 Digital Cinema Support

Video for Digital Cinema may be delivered either as a 3G signal or as HD Dual-link. Support for Digital Cinema handled as a 3G signal is given by adding VIDEO_3G. Support for Digital Cinema handled as HD Dual-Link is given by adding the VIDEO_DL option. Further information is given in the appropriate sections above.



App. I : ANC Packet Descriptor Creation In the ‘Extended View’ version of the DataView pixel data display (see Section G), ANC packets are identified and interpreted by comparing the signal received against information supplied as XML files stored alongside the OTM 1000 application. If an ANC packet is detected that is not one of the types for which an XML descriptor file is provided, the message “No Definition Found” will be displayed together with the embedded ID to allow separate identification. A range of XML files are supplied as part of the VIEW_DATA option. These files enable the identification of a range of AES controls, SMPTE time codes and RP188 control codes. Users may also add their own packet definitions through installing additional XML-format descriptor files, for example to allow custom ANC packets to be decoded. Details are given below. Note: (i) The facility described below is limited to single ANC packets. It is not able to handle information spread across multiple packets such as those used to deliver Dolby-E metadata. (ii) Setting up these descriptor files is not a quick process as they effectively define how each bit of the packet is to be handled, so before embarking on this process for an industry-standard ANC packet, it is a good idea to check that you are not simply seeing this message because something has happened to make the supplied XML files unavailable to the application. The application directory within your program files should include an ANCParser\XMLDefs subdirectory and this subdirectory should include a range of .xml files. The format of ANC packets is defined by SMPTE 291. The format of the packet header is rigidly defined by this standard. What is different between one packet type and another is the format of the UDW block, so it is the structure of this block that the XML file principally defines, together with a few items of header information such as the packet identifier. The detailed structure of the packet header, EAVs and SAVs are of no concern here.

Overview The format of the XML descriptor files is defined by the .xsd schema file included in the ANCParser\XMLDefs subdirectory. A single file can cover more than one type of packet, but for maintenance purposes, it is advisable to limit the packets detailed in any XML file to ones allied to same task or defined in the same specification. The top level of the hierarchy in these XML files is a Protocol statement, which records the name of the XML schema file that is used and gives an overall name to the set of packets described by XML file. Nested within the Protocol element are one or more PacketType elements. Each PacketType element describes an individual packet among the ones defined for the selected protocol. The PacketType statement itself is principally used to specify the Data ID of the ANC packets being described and to set the name that will be displayed on the Extended DataView screen where this packet is identified within the video being analysed. The detailed description of the block of UDWs within the packet is given by a series of BitField elements, where necessary interspersed with Switch elements and/or BREAK statements.


Each BitField statement defines how an individual bit field within the UDW area of the packet is to be displayed. These statements mainly lead on to a sequence of Bit statements that map the individual bits within the bit field into data to be displayed. BitField elements may also include Determinant statements that determine whether data is displayed or hidden depending on the value of a bit field within the UDW. Switch elements allow different display structures to be used depending on the value of a particular bit field. Each Switch statement is therefore followed by a BitField element as described above, together with one or more Case elements (also with associated BitField elements) that define the required action in each of the different conditions covered by the Switch. The BREAK statements that may be included within a packet description are concerned purely with the layout of the data when displayed in the Extended View. They allow subheadings to be inserted in the data. All of the different statements include a number of attributes that define the necessary details. Some of these attributes are required within a particular type of statement, some are optional. Details are given below, together with examples. Attributes that must be given are marked (required). While the nesting of these statements obviously has to be correct, there is no requirement on the ordering of information within any particular level or on the ordering of the attributes. However, adopting a logical order is recommended for both ease of maintenance and ease of debugging. It is similarly a good idea to give different items appropriate names. Note: A number of the attributes associated with the different statements are purely concerned with the presentation of the information. Together, they offer a high degree of flexibility with regards to the layout of information. However, it is generally a good idea to just worry about getting the information you want out correctly to start with and leave worrying about the presentation of this information as a secondary task. Issues of layout are dealt with in a separate section below. It is however worth thinking about the length of any labels you define because these aren’t wrapped, so it is generally best to keep labels short.

Resources supplied The following resources are supplied as part of the OTM 1000 application:

XML Schema file (currently ANCV3.xsd)

A range of XML descriptor files, providing interpretation of a range of AES controls, SMPTE time codes and RP188 control codes.

These files are all located in ANCParser\XMLDefs subdirectory and can be viewed using a range of tools. Neither the Schema file nor the supplied XML should be changed but the supplied XML files may be used as examples on which to base your own XML files. Note, however, that these files can’t be edited in Microsoft® Excel.


Resources required In order to create your own XML descriptor files, you will need:

An XML file creation tool

Detailed specification of each ANC packet that you want to create a descriptor file for

Video sequences that include one or more examples of these packets – for testing purposes.

If you don’t have a dedicated XML file creation tool, we recommend downloading the free XML Notepad application from the Microsoft web-site. While it is possible to use a text editor to create the descriptor file, using a dedicated XML creation tool will usually be very much easier.

Description Creation The details of the procedure used to create a file depend on the tool used but in essence you need to create a file that:

1. First identifies the version of XML that is being used (must be compatible with the supplied schema, which is XML version 1.0).

2. Then selects the supplied schema (currently ANCV3.vsd). 3. Below that adds, for each of the required packet type(s), the appropriate statements

needed to define first the packet identifier (and give the packet a suitably descriptive name), then the location of the required data within UDW block.

The file then needs to be saved as a .xml file to the ANCParser\XMLDefs subdirectory, replacing any existing .xml file that describes any of the same packet types. The OTM automatically checks the Packet Identifier in ANC packets in the video against the .xml files it finds in its ANCParser\XMLDefs directory. If there are duplicate definitions, there is no guarantee that it will pick out the definition you want. Various approaches are possible but the easiest may be to copy the different elements you require from the supplied XML files (taking care not to save any changes you accidentally make to the supplied file), paste the required element into the new XML file and make any adjustments that are needed – and just continue doing this until you have defined how to handle each bit of information that you want to extract from the UDW region of the packet. Ultimately, the XML file is essentially a text file containing a sequence of XML-format statements. The syntax of the various statement types is given below, together with examples. However, your XML Editor may well present it in a more user-friendly form, for example with each component of any description shown as a user-editable sequence of associated attributes and values. The statements that are valid are ultimately defined by the schema, and depending on the XML Editor that you use, it may be possible to make this pick up and work with the supplied schema in such a way that it only offers / accepts valid constructs and valid information.

Testing To test the XML description that you have created at any stage, save the file to the ANCParser\XMLDefs directory. Then reload the OTM 1000 application and use your test video (see above) to see whether the packets you know it contains are both correctly identified and the required information displayed.


The Elements The sections below give the syntax of the different statements that may appear in descriptor files used with the supplied schema file, together with examples of valid statements. The examples given are taken from the supplied XML files.

Protocol Statement The Protocol is the top-level element. To be compliant, the XML document must specify exactly one Protocol element.

<Protocol Attributes> … </Protocol> Attributes:

xmlns="http://schema-file" (required) where schema-file is the name of the .xsd file (assumed to be located within the ANCParser\XMLDefs directory).

e.g. xmlns="http://ANCV3"

ProtocolName="protocol-name" (required) where protocol-name is a string that gives a suitable overall name to the set of packets described by XML file, for example one that identifies the specification defining the packets. This string does not have to be unique to this XML document.

e.g. ProtocolName="AES"

Example: <Protocol xmlns="http://ANCV3" ProtocolName="AES"> Nested within the Protocol element are one or more PacketType elements.


PacketType Statements The PacketType is the second-level element within the file. It is nested within the Protocol element. There must be at least one PacketType element within the file but there is no maximum number. Each PacketType element describes an individual packet among the ones defined for the selected protocol. Only those packets that are of interest need be defined: for any other packets, the Extended DataView will simply display the message ‘No Definition Found’ together with the packet’s Data ID.

<PacketType Attributes> … </PacketType> Attributes:

PacketIdentifier="string" (required) where string specifies the Data ID that (together with any Secondary Data ID, see below) identifies the type of ANC packet that is being described – as given in the specification for the packet. This identifier must be unique to the packet as it is the item by which the software identifies which XML description to use to analyse the data it contains. e.g. PacketIdentifier="0x2E7"

PacketName="string" (required) where string describes the Packets decoded by this PacketType element. This name is displayed at the start of the description of the packet. e.g. PacketName="HDTV audio Group 1"

DescriptionLabel="string" where string defines a heading to go above the data. This is particularly useful where a tabular layout is used for the data. e.g. DescriptionLabel=" Sample Z V U C F"

LabelOffset="integer" where integer specifies that the above label should be positioned one or more lines below its default position in the Extended DataView display. e.g. LabelOffset="1"

Repetative="boolean" where boolean is set to "true" where the target packet consists of a repeated sequence of bit fields and "false" in all other instances. Note: You aren’t asked to specify the number of repetitions because this can be deduced in any particular case from the length information given in the packet header. e.g. Repetative="false"

SecondaryPacketIdentifier="string" where string specifies the Secondary Data ID (SDID) associated with a Type 2 ANC packet. Note: This attribute is optional and may be omitted for Type 1 PacketType definitions. e.g. SecondaryPacketIdentifier="0x260"

Example: <PacketType PacketIdentifier="0x2E7" PacketName="HDTV audio Group 1" Repetative="false" DescriptionLabel=" Sample Z P C U V" LabelOffset="1">


Each Packet is composed of a number of bit fields, the descriptions of which are given by individual BitField elements. At present each PacketType element must include at least one BitField element. It may also include Break statements and Switch elements.

BitField Statements Each BitField element describes a group of bits that together make up a single item of information within the packet. They typically comprise a BitField statement together with a sequence of Bit statements but, where appropriate, they may also include Determinant statements. There must be at least 1 BitField element within any PacketType element but there is no maximum number. Note: A bit field may stretch across multiple words, but at present may not go above 32 bits in length.

<BitField Attributes> … </BitField> Attributes:

FieldName="string" (required) where string is a suitably descriptive name for the Bit Field. This name will be used to label the associated data in the DataView, subject to the setting of the Label attribute. The name used does not have to be unique. e.g. FieldName="CH 1 Audio Data"

BFWordOffset="integer" (required) where integer identifies the word within the packet at which the bit field starts, by identifying its offset from the start of the UDW block/the start of the current repetition if the PacketType Repetative attribute has been set to "true". e.g. BFWordOffset="2"

FieldLength="integer" (required) where integer is the number of bits in the reconstructed bit field. At present, this is limited to a maximum of 32 bits. e.g. FieldLength="22"

Repeated="boolean" (required) This distinguishes between bit fields that are repeated and those which are not. boolean is true where the bit field being described is repeated within a repetitive PacketType, but otherwise should be false. e.g. Repeated="true"

Repitions="integer" Where Repeated is true, integer gives the number of repetitions. e.g. Repitions="3"

BFType="BitFieldType" This is used where the BitField statement is part of a Switch or Case element to specify how the value of the bit field should be treated. BitFieldType may be either Selective, Conditional or Default.. e.g. BFType="Selective"


Label="boolean" (required) where boolean is true where the reconstructed data is to be laid out as a sequence of <field-name> <data> statements but should be false where it is to be laid out as a series of values without any field-name labels (though possibly with a sequence separator between the different items). e.g. Label="false"

DisplayBase="integer" where integer sets the base in which the value of the field is to be displayed and is either 10 (decimal) or 16 (hex). If DisplayBase is not set, the data will be displayed in hex. e.g. DisplayBase="16"

DisplayWidth="integer" This is used, particularly where the data is laid out in a table, to allocate a specific number of characters to the display of the bit field data. e.g. DisplayWidth="6"

SequencePosition="integer" where integer gives the position of the bit field data in a sequence of data displayed on the same line of the Extended Dataview display (i.e. Label="false"). e.g. SequencePosition="0"

SequenceSeperator="string" where string specifies one or more characters to append to the current bit field data when Label="false", in order to separate it from the data taken from the next bit field. e.g. SequenceSeperator=" : "

Example: <BitField BFWordOffset="2" FieldName="CH 1 Audio Data" FieldLength="22"

Repeated="false" Label="false" DisplayWidth="6" DisplayBase="16"

SequencePosition="0" SequenceSeperator=" ">


Any BitField element must contain at least one Bit statement.

Bit Statements Each Bit statement describes a single bit within the associated bit field. There must be at least one Bit statement within any BitField element. The maximum number is 32.

<Bit Attributes /> Attributes:

BitName="string" (required) where string typically describes the significance of the bit within the bit field. It is used solely as a way of identifying the item in the specification that the bit represents. The name used doesn’t have to be unique but it rapidly becomes confusing if the same name is used for different bits within the same bit field. e.g. BitName="audio 10"

WordOffset="integer" (required) where integer identifies the word that contains the bit by defining its position relative to the word picked out by the BFWordOffset given in the BitField statement. This is not the same as the offset within the packet and will only ever be greater than 0 where the bit field is longer than 1 word in length. e.g. WordOffset="1"

BitOffset="integer" (required) where integer gives the offset of the bit within the word identified by the WordOffset. e.g. BitOffset="6"

Destination="integer" (required) where integer gives the offset of the bit within the reconstructed bit field. e.g. Destination="10"

Example: <Bit BitName="audio 10" WordOffset="1" BitOffset="6" Destination="10" />


Determinant Statements BitField elements may include one or more Determinant statements. These specify one or more bits within a group of up to 32 bits that are to act as flags, determining whether the BitField element should be applied. If the BitField element includes a number of Determinant statements, the results from the separate Determinant statements are ANDed i.e. all must be satisfied in order for the BitField element to be applied.

<Determinant Attributes /> Attributes:

WordOffset="integer" (required) where integer identifies the word in the packet to be inspected from the start of the UDW block/the start of the current repetition if the PacketType Repetative attribute has been set to "true". e.g. WordOffset="3"

Mask="string" (required) where string is a Hexadecimal value that defines a mask to be applied to the data starting at the WordOffset. At present the maximum supported length of a mask is 32 bits. e.g. Mask="0x80"

Target="string" (required) where string specifies, in hex, the required value once the Mask has been applied to the data. e.g. Target="0x80"

Allow="boolean" (required) where boolean is true where a positive result should allow the BitField element to be applied, and is false where a positive result should prevent the BitField element from being applied. e.g. Allow="true"

Example: <Determinant WordOffset="3" Mask="0x80" Target="0x80" Allow="true" />


Switch Statements PacketType elements may include one or more Switch elements. Each Switch element comprises a Switch statement, a BitField element and one or more Case elements (see below). The Switch statement and the BitField element together identify the bit field within the UDW block that determines which of the possible actions is to be selected. The Case elements define the action to take in each case. An example of a Switch element may be found in the RP 188ATCDef.xml file. There is no limit on the number of Switch elements that may be included in any PacketType element.

<Switch Attribute> … </Switch> Attribute:

WordOffset="integer" (required) where integer specifies the word in the UDW block from which the Switch statement operates, counting either from the start of the block or, if appropriate, from the start of the current repetition. e.g. WordOffset="0"

Example: <Switch WordOffset="0">


Each Switch statement is followed by a BitField element, together with one or more Case elements (see below). The BitField element defines the data whose value will determine which of the Case elements will be selected. The location of this data is given relative to the word selected by the WordOffset included in the associated Switch statement.

Case Statement Switch elements include one or more Case elements. These specify how data should be both selected and displayed in the different cases identified by the bit field data selected by the Switch element as the control. Examples of Case elements may be found in the RP 188ATCDef.xml file. There is no limit on the number of Case elements that may be included in any Switch element.

<Case Attributes> … </Case> Attributes:

Target="integer" where integer is the value of the bit field data for which the following BitField element(s) should be applied. e.g. Target="0"

Title="string" where string is an optional side-heading that may be inserted before the data extracted by the following BitField elements. e.g. Title="Longitudinal TimeCode"

Example: <Case Target="0" Title="Longitudinal TimeCode">

Each Case statement is followed by one or more BitField elements.

BREAK Statements PacketType elements may include one or more BREAK statements. BREAK statements are used where multiple items of data are presented on the same line (e.g. in a table) to specify where one line ends and another begins. They can also be used to insert a label at the start of the current line of data.

<BREAK Attributes /> Attributes:

WordOffset="integer" (required) where integer identifies the word within the UDW after which the break should be inserted. Where appropriate, the offset is calculated from the start of the current repetition. e.g. WordOffset="14"

Label="string" where string is the required side-heading. This is inserted at the start of the line of data e.g. Label="Ch 3 : "

Example: <BREAK WordOffset="14" Label="Ch 3 : " />


Layout The items of data extracted from the ANC packets are basically presented as lines of information, all displayed in the system font. However the XML statements detailed in the previous section include attributes which provide some control over how the data is positioned. This section looks at the main ways in which data from an ANC packet might be laid out in the Extended DataView and describes the statement attributes used to achieve these results. The examples given are all taken from the supplied XML files.

Tabular Layout <heading1> <heading2> <heading3> <heading4> <heading5> <data1> <data2> <data3> <data4> <data5> <data1> <data2> <data3> <data4> <data5> … This layout is achieved through a combination of (i) the PacketType statement; (ii) BitField elements; and (iii) BREAK statements. The PacketType statement sets the column headings and whether these are to be displayed at the beginning of the packet or after any other lines of information. The attributes that set these things are:

DescriptionLabel = "string"

where string defines the line of headings to go above the data, suitably padded to fit with the columns of data set up by the BitField elements. (Each item of data is positioned to the left within the space allocated to it.)

LabelOffset="integer"

where integer specifies that the above label should be positioned one or more screen lines below its default position in the Extended View display.

The BitField statements need to specify that there is no label with the bit field data and to set the widths of the items such that they line up with the headings. The attributes that set these things are:

Label = "false"

DisplayWidth = "integer" where integer sets the number of characters to be allocated to the data. (The data itself will be positioned to the left within this width.

The BREAK statements mark the point at which the current line should be terminated and a new one started. The only attribute to set is:

WordOffset="integer"

where integer specifies the word within the UDW that ends the current line of data – by giving either its offset from the start of the UDW or, where appropriate, its offset from the start of the current repetition.

The following example of this layout being used is taken from the supplied ANCHDAudioDef.xml file.


Example XML Statements

…

Example Result

List Layout <name> = <data> <name> = <data> …. This is the most straightforward way of laying out the data. It is achieved through using individual BitField statements, each with:

Fieldname = <name> Label = "true"

The following example of this layout being used is taken from the supplied RP188ATC.xml file.


Example Result


Handling Timestamps <timestamp-name> <hours> : <minutes> : <seconds> : <frames> This layout is achieved through a combination of BitField elements and a BREAK statement. The details of the BitField statements depend on whether the associated data represents the first item, the last item or one in the middle, as follows. The first BitField statement (e.g. <hours>) needs to include:

Label="false"

to stop any label associated with the data from being displayed.

SequencePosition="0"

to place this item firmly at the beginning of the group.

SequenceSeperator=" : "

to place a colon between the end of this item and the start of the next item. ‘Middle’ BitField statements (e.g. <minutes>, <seconds>) need to include:

Label="false"


SequencePosition="integer"

where integer gives the position of the bit field data in a sequence of data displayed on the same line ("2"; "3" etc.).

SequenceSeperator=" : "

to place a colon between the end of this item and the start of the next item. The last BitField statement (e.g. <fractions of a second>) needs to include:

Label="false"


SequencePosition="last"

where last gives the number this item should have in the sequence (e.g. "4").

SequenceSeperator=""

as this is the last item on the line. The BREAK statement is required both to terminate the time display and to preface the information with a suitable title (e.g. the type of timestamp that is being shown). The attributes to set are:

WordOffset="integer"

where integer identifies where the break needs to be inserted by giving the offset from either the start of the UDW or the start of the current repetition of the word containing the data that completes the timestamp.

Label = "name"

This name will precede the timestamp details. The following example of this layout being used is taken from the supplied RP188ATC.xml file.



Example Result


Placing Table Headings on a Particular Line The line of headings defined by the Description Label are placed by default on the line corresponding to the start of the ANC packet. However, it could well be that the packet starts with some data that isn’t part of this table. In that case, you may well want to place the line of headings below this other data. This can be achieved by using LabelOffset attribute of the PacketType statement to specify that these Description Label should be placed a given number of screen lines below its default position. The following example of this layout being used is taken from the supplied ANCHDTVAudioDef.xml file.


…

Example Result

OmniTek OTM 1000 User Guide, v2.4 II-1

App. II : Remote Control using SNMP The OTM 1000 supports remote control using the SNMP protocol.

II.1 Set-Up

To make use of this facility, attach the PC you want to use to the OTM through one of the Ethernet connectors on the back of the OTM.

Figure II-1: Rear view of an OTM 1000 showing the essential connections

needed for remote control of the OTM using SNMP. The PC used to control the OTM also needs to be running both the Windows SNMP service and an SNMP Manager such as LabVIEW. In addition, the SNMP Manager needs to be suitably programmed both to issue the appropriate Get/Set commands to run the required tests and to issue appropriate responses to any SNMP traps that are generated.

Note: SNMP Service Configuration Issues The SNMP service on the OTM is provided by the Windows operating system that underlies the OTM 1000 application. In the absence of information about the environment in which the OTM is being used, Windows will only send SNMP traps to the host machine – i.e. only to itself. Windows will also only allow the local machine to act as the SNMP manager in that it will only accept Get/Set commands from itself.


To send traps to other machines and to allow other machines to send Get/Set commands to the OTM 1000, you will need to access the SNMP Configuration window as follows:

Push and hold the PROPS button to display the System Properties control.

Select the System page of Properties control.

From here, trap destination and permitted manager addresses can be added, edited and deleted.

Power On/Off Master Switch

Power Socket

SDI IN 1,2

Ethernet Connectors

SDI OUT 1,2 ANA OUT SDI OUT2 SDI OUT1 SDI IN2 SDI IN1


Figure II-2: SNMP Configuration

II.2 Controlling the OTM

The OTM is remotely controlled through Get/Set commands that read/write system parameters. The parameters that can be accessed in this way are defined through a MIB (Management Information Base) file. This MIB file is automatically loaded into c:\Program Files\OmniTek\DataLab as part of the software installation. The information given about each parameter includes whether the parameter can be read and/or written and the format of the data that is read or written (using terms such as ‘Integer32’ and ‘DisplayString’ that are also defined within the MIB file). The MIB file also includes details of the traps that the OTM may produce. The MIB file is human-readable but is most easily inspected by importing it into a MIB Browser, which can typically also be used to issue Get/Set commands. The following examples illustrate the Get/Set commands needed to achieve some common results. Example 1: Loading an image file into the Generator

Set the patternImportFromDisk parameter to a string corresponding to the filepath and filename of the required image file e.g. D:\Data\Snapshots\s2.bmp

Example 2: Checking the filepath and name of a pattern loaded in the Generator 1. Set the patternInspectIndex parameter to the position number of the pattern you are

interested in. (Note: The first pattern in the display has position number 1.) 2. Get the patternInspectFilename parameter to see the file details.

Example 3: Setting the Video Output Standard Each video output standard is identified by its SMPTE ID, expressed as a decimal number. The values to quote for each of the video standards that are currently supported are listed as ‘SNMP ID’ values in the SNMPCommandInfo XML file that is supplied alongside each version of the OTM application (in the Program Files/OmniTek/DataLab directory). Alternatively, the user can determine the required value by doing a hex to decimal conversion of the required video standard’s SMPTE ID. The steps used to set the video output standard are

1. Find the entry for the required video standard in the SNMPCommandInfo.xml file. 2. Set the videoStandardSMPTEID parameter to the hexadecimal value quoted as the

SMPTEID. 3. Confirm that the required video standard has been set by using a Get

videoStandardSMPTEID command.


Example 4: Reading the name, current value and status of a Status Parameter Note: A single generic procedure is used to read the above details of any Status Parameter. The selection of the parameter to be read involves the setting of a range of parameters that identify not just the parameter of interest but also the input channel and the service on that channel with which the parameter is associated. The procedure is as follows:

1. Set the virtualChannelID parameter to the appropriate integer value (listed in the SNMPCommandInfo.xml file). Confirm by using the corresponding Get command.

2. Set the serviceType parameter to the appropriate integer value (also listed in the SNMPCommandInfo.xml file). Confirm by using the corresponding Get command.

3. Set the subChannelID parameter to the appropriate index value for the instance of this service you require information about (see the SNMPCommandInfo.xml file). Confirm by using the corresponding Get command.

4. Set the statusParameterID parameter to the appropriate integer value (see the SNMPCommandInfo.xml file). Confirm by using the corresponding Get command.

5. Set the statusParameterIndex parameter to the appropriate integer value (also listed in the SNMPCommandInfo.xml file). Confirm by using the corresponding Get command.

6. Set the statusParameterOptionType parameter to the appropriate integer value (also listed in the SNMPCommandInfo.xml file). Confirm by using the corresponding Get command.

7. To read the parameter’s name, get the statusParameterName parameter. To read the current value of the parameter, get the statusParameterDataValue parameter. To read the current value interpreted as a string, get the statusParameter parameter. To read the current ‘Alert Level’ (Error, Warning, OK etc.) of the parameter, get the statusParameterAlertLevel parameter.

Example 5: Reading the name and/or SMPTE 352 ID of the Incoming Video Standard

1. Set the virtualChannelID parameter to the appropriate integer value (listed in the SNMPCommandInfo.xml file). Confirm by using the corresponding Get command.

2. Set the serviceType parameter to 0. Confirm by using the corresponding Get command. 3. Set the subChannelID parameter to 0. Confirm by using the corresponding Get

command. 4. Set the statusParameterID parameter to 32 (Video/Format). Confirm by using the

corresponding Get command. 5. Set the statusParameterIndex parameter to 0. Confirm by using the corresponding Get

command. 6. Set the statusParameterOptionType parameter to 1. Confirm by using the

corresponding Get command. 7. To read the name of the video standard, get the statusParameter parameter.

To read its SMPTE 352 ID, get the statusParameterDataValue parameter.


Example 6: Trapping Status Parameter Changes Any change in a Status Parameter causes a statusParameterChangeTRAP trap to be sent: This trap has seven parameters, the values of which both identify the Status Parameter that has changed and its current value. The parameters are:

statusParameterChangeVirtualChannelID statusParameterChangeServiceType statusParameterChangeSubchannelID statusParameterChangeID statusParameterChangeIndex statusParameterChangeName statusParameterChangeValue

The first five of these provide corresponding information to the values set by the first five steps of Example 4. statusParameterChangeName gives the name-string associated with the given Status Parameter ID, while statusParameterChangeValue gives the parameter’s current value (as shown for example in the Status display). Example 7: Resetting Status Parameters SNMP commands can be used to reset status parameters either individually or all together. To reset individual status parameters:

1. Carry out the first six steps of the procedure given in Example 4. 2. Set the statusParameterReset parameter.

To reset all status parameters: 1. Set the virtualChannelID parameter to the appropriate integer value (listed in the

SNMPCommandInfo.xml file). Confirm by using the corresponding Get command. 2. Set the statusParametersReset parameter.

Example 8: Loading a Preset

Set the systemLoadxxxPreset parameter to the number of the required Preset (where xxx is System to load a system configuration, View to load a View window preset, etc.)

Example 9: Logging It is possible to both start and stop one or more Logging Sessions (see Section J) using SNMP. The results of each logging session are stored on disc as an XML file. The filepath and filename selected for the session provides the identifier by which sessions that are run concurrently may be distinguished. The parameters that are logged are those selected as Shown in Log on the Video Config page of the OTM’s Config window. The command sequences used to start and stop a logging session are given below. To Start a Logging Session:

1. Set the eventLogSessionVirtualChannelID parameter to appropriate value (as listed in the SNMPCommandInfo.xml file).

2. Set the eventLogSessionFilePath parameter to a string corresponding to the filepath and filename required for the XML file e.g. D:\Data\Logs\session1.xml

3. Set the startEventLogSession parameter to 1. 4. The start of this session is confirmed when an eventLogSessionTRAP trap arrives with the

given filepath and filename as one of its parameters (eventLogSessionStartedFilePath) and a 1 as the other parameter (eventLogSessionStartedState).


To stop a Logging Session: 1. Set the eventLogSessionFilePath parameter to the filepath and filename of the session

that you want to stop. 2. Set the startEventLogSession parameter to 0. 3. Confirmation that the session has stopped comes when an eventLogSessionTRAP

trap arrives with the given filepath and filename as the eventLogSessionStartedFilePath and a 2 as the eventLogSessionStartedState.

Status Parameter IDs and Related IDs To enable users to update status parameter ID information, the same SNMPCommandInfo.xml file that includes the details of the video standard parameters (mentioned above) also includes a complete listing of status parameter IDs and associated status parameter names. Note: These details may change as new features are introduced on the OTM 1000. These changes will be kept to a minimum but it is especially likely that Status Parameter IDs may change. In addition, the OTM SNMP parameters include a statusParameterName parameter that returns the name associated with a given Status Parameter ID. This can be used to update status parameter ID information on a one-by-one basis. Alternatively, enumerating all the possible status parameter values will reveal a set of status parameter names which can then be matched to the recorded status parameter names to update the associated IDs.


OmniTek OTM 1000 User Guide, v2.4 III-1

App. III : OmniTek OTM 1000 System Recovery This section describes the procedure to follow where the system running on an OmniTek OTM 1000 has become corrupted, for example as a result of a computer virus. This procedure replaces the contents of the Drive C operating system and application partition by a copy of the operating system and application that was installed when the instrument was delivered. The Data partition (Drive D) will remain intact but any special configurations or presets that have been created will be deleted. Any updates made to the licence file following the purchase of further options will also need to be re-installed after the procedure has been completed. A mouse and keyboard need to be added to the OTM to carry out this procedure. IMPORTANT: This procedure may only be used on systems based on Windows Image version 1.2 or above. The current Windows Image version number is listed on the top line of the text file ImageVersion-DONOTREMOVE that is included in the root of both the C: and D: drives. On versions to which this procedure applies, it is also displayed in the bottom left-hand corner of the screen as the OmniTek software is loaded (as shown below).

Steps

1. If the OTM is switched on, use the Power button on the front panel to power it down. A simple press of this button should lead to the standard Shut Down option: if not, press and hold the Power button until the instrument shuts down.

2. Check that you have a mouse and a keyboard plugged into the OTM. These may be attached through any of the USB ports included on the instrument (one on the front and two on the back).

3. Check that the OTM is switched on at the back, then press the Power button on the front panel to turn the instrument on, wait for the logo to appear, then immediately start repeatedly pressing the [F8] key on the keyboard at a rate of about two presses per second. Continue doing this until an ‘Advanced Boot Options’ window is displayed (after a couple of dedicated OmniTek displays). If instead the OTM just continues to try to load the OTM 1000 software, use the Power button to switch off the machine, then try again.

OmniTek OTM 1000 User Guide, v2.4 III-2

4. When the Advanced Boot Options window appears, check that the option to Repair Your Computer is selected then press [Enter]. The underlying system then proceeds to load some files.

5. When a dialogue offering a choice of System Recovery Options appears, click on ‘OmniTek OTM 1000 Factory Restore’. This opens a dialogue entitled ‘OmniTek OTM 1000 Factory Restore’, which offers a single Restore option. If instead you accidentally take the alternative ‘Startup Repair’ option, take the Cancel option that is offered and try again.

6. Click on the Restore option in the OmniTek OTM 1000 Factory Restore dialogue, then click on the Accept button in the following Licence Agreement display. By clicking on Accept you confirm that you agree to only use the OTM 1000 software on the OTM 1000 hardware.

7. When asked to confirm that you want to install the recovery system, click the Yes option. 8. The OTM then displays an information screen, reporting on the progress of the system

recovery. Simply wait until this screen shows that 100% of the recovery system has been installed. DO NOT switch off or otherwise remove power from the OTM while this installation is in progress.

9. When a message appears saying that the recovery is complete, press [Enter] and return to the System Recovery Options dialogue that was displayed at Step 5.

10. Continue working with the OTM by taking the Restart option from the System Recovery Options dialogue (or Shut down if preferred).

The OTM should now power up into the OTM 1000 application in the expected way, but should there be a problem restarting the instrument (for example, the light on the Power button continuing to flash orange and green after the application has loaded), simply power the instrument right down and then switch off at the back. When the Power button light goes off, switch the instrument back on and let the OTM reload the OTM 1000 application.

OmniTek OTM 1000 User Guide, v3.1

Intec Unit 2.3, Wade Road, Basingstoke, Hants RG22 8NE, UK Tel: +44 (0)1256 345900 Fax: +44 (0)1256 345901 Email: [email protected] Web: www.omnitek.tv

mailto:[email protected]
